Home

Solution 844/862/880 Installation Manual

1. Figure 19 Solution Wireless ON OFF Interface WE800 2 Channel Radio Interface RE005 The EDM 2 channel radio interface has been designed to allow customers to remotely operate Solution control panels and control two on board relays The interface may also be used as a stand alone receiver independent of a Solution control panel and used solely for remote control of external devices connected to the two on board relays The interface s operating frequency is 304 Mhz with the ability to store up to 120 radio remote codes When connecting the interface to a Solution control panel there is only a three wire connection in parallel to the codepad and Option 8 in LOCATION 427 on page 232 needs to be programmed Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Optional Equipment 253 EDMSAT Satellite Siren SS914 The EDMSAT Satellite Siren is a totally self contained unit incorporating a high powered siren and a weatherproof strobe A 1 2 AH sealed lead acid battery needs to be fitted The EDMSAT requires only two wires for operation on which the charging of the battery and triggering of the siren and strobe are carried out This is done by pulse code modulating PCM the charging voltage Any attempt to tamper with the wiring or to substitute an alternative power source across the wiring will disrupt the data transmission and the EDMSAT will activate immediately When the EDMSAT carries out a battery test the unit
2. esceseeseeeeeeeeeees 152 Call Back Telephone Numbetr eee eee 151 Dialling Formatie seannsa e 149 Handshake Tone For Receiver 1 0 0 0 eee eee 144 Handshake Tone For Receiver 2 147 Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 143 Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 146 Programing Telephone Numbers c cceeseeeeee 142 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited 305 Ring COUN seeiis ccsisgcoetest kis tse ss hosts a abor TESE SS 152 Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 143 Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 146 Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1 00 145 Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2 0 0 0 148 Telco Arming Sequence 0 0 eee eee eeeeeereeeeeeeeees 150 Telco Disarming Sequence oo eee eee eeeeeeeeee 151 Telephone Line Fault Options 0 0 00 eee 153 Transmission Format For Receiver 1 0 0 0 145 Transmission Format For Receiver 2 0 0 00 148 Dialler Options 1 Allow Dialler Reporting Functions 1 0 00 157 Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed 157 Disable Dialler Reporting Functions 157 Remote Arming Via Telephone eee 157 Dialler Options 2 Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete 158 Extend Time To Wait For Handshake 000 158 Open Close Reports In STAY Mode ee 158 Open Close Reports Only If Previous Alarm Has Occurred 2 630 sei ins aeons helt 158 Dialler Op
3. ELECTRONICS DESIGN MANUFACTURING Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual ISSUE 1 40 TELLA q amp ie ELECTRONICS DESIGN amp MANUFACTURING MA8XXI Solution This page has been included for you to cut out and insert into the spine _ of the folder 844 862 880 Installation Manual ISSUE 1 40 wy Austre aw lo 61 2 9672 1233 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Copyright 2001 by Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited SYDNEY AUSTRALIA Document Part Number MA8XxXI DOCUMENT ISSUE 1 40 Printed 10 May 2001 This documentation is provided to suit Solut ion 844 862 880 Control Panel CC404 CC406 CC408 Firmware Revision 1 00 1 09 Hardware Revision A J Alarm Link required 2 74 or higher Control Panel Software Version 1 00 1 09 S404_V10 406_V10 408_V10 Copyright Notice All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted or stored in a retrieval system in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Trademarks Throughout this document trademark names may have been used Rather than put a trademark symbol in every occurrence of a trademark name we state that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion and to the benefit of the trademark
4. Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 103 How To Delete A Remote Radio User Code 1 Enter your MASTER CODE followed by 1 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter the USER NuMBER 9 16 that you wish to delete followed by the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding ZONE indicator will illuminate Refer to Table 45 Codepad Indicators Showing Relative Remote User Numbers on page 103 3 Press the STAY button to delete the user code Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish If you wish to delete any further remote radio user codes repeat this procedure as many times as required WASTER CODE 1 ava USER NUMBER AWAY STAY When deleting remote radio user codes this function will automatically terminate if a button is not pressed within sixty seconds or by pressing the Away button will also terminate the session at anytime One long beep indicates the an incorrect user number has been selected User Zonel ey 40 ae 40 Zone4 Zone5 Zone6 Zone7 Zone8 MAINS No Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator ee Ee as a a wf ee a ea se Pee oe ee ie peo a e a a a Table 45 Codepad Indicators Showing Relative Remote User Numbers Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 104 So
5. LOCATION 424 on page 229 Sirens Running This output will operate for the duration of the siren run time programmed in LOCATION 411 on page 221 When the sirens have been activated this output will reset once the siren run time has expired The relay output Output 4 is factory default for this operation Strobe Operating This output will operate when an alarm condition occurs and will reset once a valid user code has been entered The strobe output Output 3 is factory default for this operation and is programmed to automatically reset after 8 hours of duration Silent Alarm This output will operate when any zone programmed to be silent alarm has triggered The output will reset when the siren run time expires an audible alarm has triggered or a valid user code has been entered Alarm When In STAY Mode This output will operate whenever an audible or silent zone alarm has triggered when the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 The output will reset when the system has been disarmed Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 208 ISSUE140 23 24 25 26 27 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Alarm When In AWAY Mode This output will operate whenever an audible or silent zone alarm has triggered when the system has been armed in AWAY Mode The output will reset when the system has been disarmed Mimic System Fault This output will operate without any time delays
6. Q Q O Receiver Q lt Interface Zone Connection Termination Strip 4 ae 5 ae Phone Amplifier or amp xO Direct Link Cable Q lt q RELAY CONTACT Q SELECT z4 co amp gt Programming Key or gt z0 gt aSa amp u lt Hand Held Programmer 8 Output g Plugs In Here amp Termination xq Q Strip o et E ae os e el k ti z e z amp DEFAULT ic Ea ST Q SWITCH E Q t Q 7 S 3 Amp 1 Amp 1 Amp Battery Fuse Accessory Fuse Codepad Fuse A Plug Pack Input EDM TF008 Figure 21 Solution 844 862 880 Component Overlay Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 264 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Telecom Connection Diagrams TELECOM CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR AUSTRALIA 605 PLUG 611 SOCKET TOP VIEW Yellow Control Bua Panel GREENie li YELLOW 4P4C PLUG 1 Green Internal Phone Line 2 Black Telecom Line Street 3 Not Connected 5 Yellow Internal Phone Line 6 Red Telecom Line Street 4 Not Connected Telecom Line TELECOM CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR NEW ZEALAND iN BLACK TOP VIEW IN RED CONTROL L ES PANEL OUT Q ELLOW ouT a RJ45 PLUG Black Telecom Line Street Green Internal Phone Line Red Telecom Line Street Yellow Internal Phone Line TELECOM CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR CHINA TOP VIEW TOP VIEW BLACK CONTROL RED
7. Remote Connect With Customer Control If you wish to configure the control panel so that a remote connection can only be established when the client initiates it through the remote codepad you will need to program the following information LOCATION 159 174 on page 151 will need to have the Call Back Telephone Number programmed and Option 1 in LOCATION 180 on page 129 160 will need to be disabled The control panel has now been set so that the client has control of when a remote connection can be established To activate the control panel to dial the remote computer to establish a link hold the 6 button down until two beeps are heard on the remote codepad Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Alarm Link Operations 127 Remote Connect Without Call Back Verification Remote connect without call back verification can be handy where you have a need to perform Upload Download functions from multiple locations There are two methods that you may program so that the call back verification is disabled It should be noted that by using this feature you are reducing the security of the control panel Method One Method one allows you to call the control panel from any remote location without the need of having the control panel call back to the computer to establish a link In using method one the customer has no access to initiate a modem call by holding down the 6 button The following locations need to be programmed
8. 2 Receiver 2 4 Receiver 1 2 8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails Location 333 334 Open Close Reports Location 333 Opening Report Location 334 Closing Report Location 335 Open Close Reporting Options 0 No Report Required 1 Receiver 1 2 Receiver 2 4 Receiver 1 2 8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails Location 336 Codepad Duress Report Location 337 338 Codepad Panic Report Location 339 340 Codepad Fire Report Location 341 342 Codepad Medical Report Location 343 Codepad Reporting Options 0 No Report Required 1 Receiver 1 2 Receiver 2 4 Receiver 1 2 8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited E Solution 844 Programming Sheets Location 344 345 System Status Fuse Fail Report Location 346 347 System Status Fuse Fail Restore Report Location 348 349 System Status AC Fail Report Location 350 351 System Status AC Fail Restore Report Location 352 353 System Status Low Battery Report Location 354 355 System Status Low Battery Restore Report Location 356 358 System Status Access Denied kocation 356 Location 357 Location 358 Code Retries Reporting Code Tens Digit Reporting Code Units Digit Location 359 System Status Reporting Options 0 No Report Required 1 Receiver 1 2 Receiver 2 4 Receiver 1 2 8
9. Call Forward Immediate Off To turn Call Forward Immediate Off 2 1 If you wish to disable the Telco Arming Call Forward Immediate upon disarming the system from AWAY Mode you would program the following 2 21 2J000000000000 Telco Arming Call Forward No Answer Off To turn Call Forward No Answer Off O1 If you wish to disable the Telco Arming Call Forward No Answer upon disarming the system from AWAY Mode you would program the following 2161 2J000000000000 Call Back Telephone Number LOCATION 159 174 0000000000000000 This location contains the telephone number that will be called when Upload Download is requested or the number 6 button is held down to initiate a modem call from the control panel to establish a communications link with the remote computer The computer must be running the Alarm Link Software CC816 and will need to be set to Waiting For An Incoming Call The Call Back Telephone Number is also required to be programmed if Remote Connect With Call Back Verification on page 127 is required Refer to the section Alarm Link Operations beginning on page 125 for more information Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 152 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual LOCATION 175 8 This location sets the number of rings before the control panel will answer an incoming call This should be set at an acceptable level bearing in mind that one ring Ring Ring Ring
10. Changing Domestic Phone Numbers Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones Turning Outputs On Off Setting The Date and Time Walk Test Mode Event Memory Recall Mode Reserved Table 43 Master Code Functions Arm or Disarm Both Areas At The Same Time This Master Code function only operates on Solution 880 systems that have been partitioned The Master Code function allows those Master Code user codes that are allocated to both Area 1 and Area 2 to arm or disarm both areas at the same time This allows the user to ensure that both areas will be armed or disarmed by pressing one extra button rather that entering a code twice to ensure both areas are armed or disarmed This function can be used to arm both areas at the same time from either the CP5 Area Addressable Codepad CP500A or the Master Partitioned Codepad CP500P Refer to Option 2 in LOCATION 433 on page 244 to enable this feature How To Arm Disarm Both Areas At The Same Time 1 Enter your MASTER cone followed by O and the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard and both areas will be armed or disarmed from AWAY Mode If you require both areas to be armed or disarmed in STAY Mode 1 substitute the AWAY button with the LSTAYJ button WASTER CODE O aw Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 100 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Changing and Deleting User Codes This function allows a Master Code
11. Eight Programmable User Codes 1 8 Eight Remote Radio User Codes 9 16 Four Programmable Burglary Zones Four 24 Hour Programmable Zones Dual Reporting On Board Line Fault Module Telco Arming Disarming Sequence Automatic Arming Automatic Disarming Codepad Duress Panic Fire Medical Alarms STAY Mode and AWAY Mode Operation Upload Download Programmable Dynamic Battery Testing Entry and Exit Warning Beeper Remote Arming Answering Machine Bypass AC Fail and System Fault Indicators Monitored Siren Output Strobe Output Relay Output Separate Fire Alarm Sound EDMSAT Satellite Siren Compatible Zone Lockout Sensor Watch Day Alarm Event Memory Recall Walk Test Mode Delayed Reporting Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited 19 844 security system uses the very latest in microprocessor technology to provide you with more useful features and superior reliability and performance ISSUE140 20 Solution 862 Features The Solut ion Following is a list of the main features that the control panel will provide V VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV V Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Eight Programmable User Codes 1 8 Eight Remote Radio User Codes 9 16 Six Programmable Burglary Zones Two 24 Hour Programmable Zones Dual Reporting On Board Line Fault Module Telco Arming Disarming Sequence Automatic Arming Automatic Disarming Codepad Duress Panic Fire Medical
12. Holding the O button down until two beeps are heard will transmit a test report Contact ID Event Code 602 that is used to test the dialling and reporting capabilities of the system without causing the sirens to sound A test report will not be transmitted if the Subscriber ID Number is 0000 This feature is only applicable if the control panel has been programmed to report via the telephone Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Remote System Operations Via Telephone 124 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Remote Arming Via The Telephone ISSUE140 This feature allows you to arm your system from any remote location via the telephone line For obvious security reasons the system cannot be disarmed using this method To make use of this feature you will require a touch tone telephone or the Phone Controller CC911 How To Remofely Arm Your System Via The Telephone 1 Call the telephone number that your control panel has been connected to 2 When the control panel answers the incoming call a short jingle will be heard Hold the phone controller to the mouthpiece of the telephone and press the button on the side of the unit for 3 seconds You can alternatively press the button on the touch tone telephone for 3 seconds to arm the system If you hear a number of strange sounding tones when the control panel answers the incoming call this means that the system has been programmed for remote programmin
13. If the events were as follows Event No Event Description System Armed In AWAY Mode Alarm In Zone 3 Alarm In Zone 4 System Disarmed Table 50 Event Memory Recall Example Events The event memory playback will report as follows Event No Codepad Indicator Event Description 4 All Indicators Off Except MAINS System Disarmed Zone 4 AWAY Indicator Illuminates Alarm In Zone 4 Zone 3 AWAY Indicator Illuminates Alarm In Zone 3 AWAY Indicator I uminates System Armed In AWAY Mode Table 51 Event Memory Recall Example Event Playback A beep and an illuminated codepad indicator indicate each event Resetting a 24 hour alarm in the disarmed state is indicated by one beep only After the last event three beeps will be heard to indicate the end of playback The replay of event memory can be terminated at any time by pressing the AWAY button If the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 the STAY indicator will display during the event memory playback There is no differentiation between arming the system in STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 If the control panel has been powered down the memory of all events will be lost Reserved Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 117 User Code Functions or USERCODE FUNCTION Away Function Description 0 Arm Or Disarm Both Areas At The Same Time CC408 Table 52 User Code Functions Arm or Disarm Both Areas At The
14. LOCATION 336 on page 192 for more information If you require to activate a duress alarm by adding a number 3 to the end of any valid user code being used to disarm the system enable Option 2 in LOCATION 430 on page 235 F E 9 anor Codepad Panic Alarm An audible codepad panic alarm will be activated when both the 1 and3 buttons co or both the stay and buttons are pressed simultaneously Refer to Option 1 in LOCATION 425 on page 230 if you wish to program codepad panic to be silent If you wish to disable the codepad panic alarm report refer to LOCATION 337 338 on page 192 for more information A codepad panic alarm 7 8 STAY MAINS FAULT AWAY will transmit a Contact ID Event Code 120 when reporting back to a base station receiver KF 1 3 or stay Away L PANIC Le Codepad Fire Alarm FIRE An audible codepad fire alarm will be activated when both the 4 and buttons on Lo L MEDICAL the remote codepad are pressed simultaneously A distinct fire sound is emitted through the horn speaker to indicate this type of alarm condition The fire sound is Lo different to the burglary sound L PANIC Refer to Option 2 in LOCATION 425 on page 230 if you wish to program codepad fire to be silent If you wish to disable the codepad fire alarm report refer to LOCATION 339 340 on page 193 for more information A codepad fire alarm will transmit a
15. LOCATION 428 on page 233 if you require the system to arm in STAY Mode 1 If forced arming has been disabled for any zone the feature of automatic arming will operate regardless of any zones being unsealed Refer to Zone Options 2 on page 183 for more information on programming zones for forced arming User code 16 will be report when the feature of automatic arming is used On Solut ion 880 control panels that have been partitioned into two separate areas both areas will automatically arm in AWAY Mode at the same time every day ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Event Timers 223 Auto Disarming Time LOCATION 418 421 0000 Location Description Actual Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Actual Hour Of The Day Units Digit Actual Minute Of The Day Tens Digit 421 Actual Minute Of The Day Units Digit Table 127 Auto Disarming Time Locations These locations are used to program the actual time of the day that the system will automatically disarm itself from AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 This time must be set in 24 hour format i e 10 30 PM would be programmed as 2230 User code 16 will report when the feature of automatic disarming is used On Solution 880 control panels that have been partitioned into two separate areas both areas will automatically disarm at the same time every day programmed to automatically arm To solve the problem we suggest that you program the
16. LOCATION 466 513 For more information on programming domestic dialling refer to Setting Up and Programming Domestic Reporting on page 133 for more information Location Description Setting Table 8 Command 965 Defaults As you can see from the table above the transmission format has automatically been set for domestic dialling and the Subscriber ID Number has been set for one identification beep All reports except zone status reporting and system status reporting have been allocated to Receiver for domestic dialling This means that the zone status reports including zone bypass zone trouble sensor watch and alarm restore codes as well as system status reports including fuse fail AC fail low battery and access denied reports have been allocated to Receiver 2 and will not report unless Receiver 2 has also been set up to report Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 44 ISSUE140 Example Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Command 966 Enable Disable Automatic Stepping Of Locations This command allows automatic stepping of locations while programming via Installer s Programming Mode When enabled via the hand held programmer the decimal point of the left most display will reflect the mode of operation If the decimal point is illuminated on the hand held programmer automatic stepping of locations is active An automatic increment of the location being programmed will occur as s
17. Method Two y ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Disarming The System From STAY Mode 1 There are two methods for disarming the system from STAY Mode 1 Method one is standard and will always operate Method two is optional and needs Option 4 to be enabled in LOCATION 429 on page 234 Method two will not operate unless both Option 2 and Option 4 has been enabled in LOCATION 429 on page 234 How To Disarm The System From STAY Mode 1 1 Enter your followed by the stay button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will extinguish The system is now disarmed CODE STAY A flashing ZONE indicator represents a previous alarm on that zone If this is the case a valid user code will need to be used to disarm the system using method one To enable method two Option 4 in LOCATION 429 on page 234 will need to be enabled How To Disarm The System From STAY Mode 1 1 Hold down the button until two beeps are heard The STAY indicator will extinguish and the system is now disarmed STAY Single button disarming from STAY Mode 1 will report as user code number 16 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Operations 67 Arming The System In STAY Mode 2 Arming the system in STAY Mode 2 is only used when the perimeter and unused areas of the premises need to be armed to detect any would be intruder from entering the premises at the same time allowing you to move freely
18. Ring and that a ring count of 10 represents approximately 60 seconds This location only has an effect if remote arming and or remote Upload Download via Alarm Link Software has been enabled If this location is programmed as zero then the answering of incoming calls will be totally disabled irrespective of any programmed options Answering Machine Bypass Answering machine bypass has been incorporated so that it is possible to make a connection with the control panel for remote arming or Upload Download when there is an answering machine or facsimile machine on the same telephone line There are two different methods of using answering machine bypass as explained below The secondary method should only be used when there is a large amount of traffic on the line e g A home office It will reduce the chance of the control panel incorrectly answering incoming calls 1 Programming the ring count as 15 will enable Answering Machine Bypass in the primary mode When calling the control panel let the phone ring for no more than 4 rings and then hang up If you call again within 45 seconds the control panel will answer the call on the first ring and the connection will be established This will prevent the answering machine or facsimile from answering the call Refer to Option 2 in LOCATION 177 on page 157 if you wish to enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When System Is Armed 2 Programming a 14 as the ring count will enable Answering Ma
19. Table 137 System Options 3 AC Fail In 1 Hour Disabled After 2 Minutes I If this option has been selected the MAINS indicator will begin to flash as soon as the AC mains supply becomes disconnected An AC Loss signal Contact ID Event Code 301 will be transmitted to the base station receiver after the AC mains supply has been disconnected continuously for more than 60 minutes If this option has not been selected the MAINS indicator will begin to flash and an AC Loss signal Contact ID Event Code 301 will be transmitted to the base station receiver after the AC mains power has been disconnected continuously for 2 minutes The MAINS indicator will cease to flash once the AC mains supply has been restored for more than two minutes An AC Loss Restore report will be transmitted to the base station receiver after the AC mains supply has been restored continuously for more than 2 minutes irrespective of this option being set Ignore AC Fail 2 If this option has been selected the MAINS indicator will not flash nor will the codepad beep once every minute when the AC mains has been disconnected from the control panel If you require a programmable output to operate when the AC mains has failed refer to Output Event Type AC Fail on page 206 If this options has been selected an AC Loss report Contact ID Event Code 301 will still report to the base station receiver unless disabled in LOCATION 350 351 on pa
20. Table 88 Zone Dialler Options Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Information 185 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren LOCATION 323 3 Location Description 323 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren 0 15 Table 89 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren Location This location determines the number of times the sirens can be triggered before any lockout options will take effect A minimum of one zone must be programmed for lockout siren for this location to be effective Refer to Zone Options 1 on page 179 to program zones for lockout siren Only alarms triggered from zone inputs will increment the swinger shutdown counter This means alarms such as codepad panic access denied and any other system alarms will not effect the swinger shutdown count While the sirens are operating the counter for the sirens is only incremented by the first zone that causes the alarm Any other zones that are triggered during siren run time will not effect the counter While the dialler is on line its counter is only incremented by the first zone that causes the alarm Any other zones that are triggered while the dialler is on line will not effect the counter When the swinger shutdown count As programmed in LOCATION 323 has been reached all zones that have been triggered will be locked out according to their individual lockout settings Example All eight zones have been programmed for lockout siren with a swinger shutdown count
21. Zone 3 2 Zone 2 8 Zone 4 Location 266 OO ee ek I oe te ey Page 170 FOL Resistor Value 0 No End Of Line Resistor 9 10K a 1 1K 10 12K 2 1K5 11 22K 3 2K2 12 Reserved 4 3K3 13 Reserved 5 3K9 14 Reserved 6 4K7 15 Split EOL 3K3 6K8 7 5K6 Eight Programmable Zones 8 6K8 Location 267 3220 Page 174 Zones Zone Location 267 273 Zone 2 Location 274 280 BOODDGD ojoti laj Zone 3 Location 281 287 pogoni Zone 6 Location 302 308 ofoofo fiafia Zone4 Location 288 294 pogori Zone 7 Location 309 315 jo fofols fraji ja Zone 5 Location 295 301 ofoofo fraja i Zone 8 Location 316 322 pogonig E da dA E E E Dialler Type Count Count Time Option 1 Option 2 Code Options Zone Types There are fifteen different zone types to choose from Each zone contains eight locations Zone alas Description Zone Type Description Instant 8 24 Hour Hold Up 1 Handover 24 HourTamper O P Delay Reserved S O 4 Reserved 2 24 Hour BBurglary 24 Hour Fire 6 24Hour Medical Chime Only 24 Hour Panic Zone Not Used Table 171 Available Zone Types Connections For Split EOL Resistors For 8 Zone Operation Enable 8 Zone Operation Using 3K3 6K8 Configuration and N C Switches 12V Z1 Z2 GND 12V Z3 Z4 12V TAMPER 1 TAMPER 2 6K8 ZONE 3 3K3 ZONE 4 3K3 TAMPER 3 6K8 TAMPER 4 6K8 Figure 23 Split EOL Wiring Diagram ISSUE140 E
22. awww ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System and Consumer Options 228 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Programming Option Bits ISSUE140 Example When programming these locations you will notice that there are four options per location You may select one two three or all four of these options however only one number needs to be programmed This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together Program a seven 7 if you require options 1 2 and 4 simultaneously i e 1 2 4 7 If at LOCATION 424 you want options 1 2 and 4 add the numbers together and the total is the number to be programmed In this example the number to be programmed is 7 i e 1 2 4 7 Description EDM Smart Lockout Allowed Horn Speaker Monitor ooa Strobe Indication For Radio Arm Disarm Oos Horn Speaker Beeps For Radio Arm Disarm Table 132 Example Programming Option Bits Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System and Consumer Options 229 System Options 1 LOCATION 424 1 Description EDM Smart Lockout Allowed Horn Speaker Monitor Strobe Indication For Radio Arm Disarm Horn Speaker Beeps For Radio Arm Disarm Table 133 System Options 1 EDM Smart Lockout Allowed This feature allows the control panel to remove any zones that are programmed for lockout dialler from the lockout list while the sirens are running This feature allows a monitori
23. B sic Paleis epee eae ehete ape KeS SEES 139 Contact ID Format ee ee ceseceseceeecseeeeeeeeeeeeees 136 Domestic Dialling cee eee ceee ossessi rsrs 132 Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default 39 Ring Burst TINEri p eases 154 Ring COUDE ere eera en a ae E E a Eee RTN Ei 152 S Satellite Siren pno RE Eas 253 259 Satellite Siren Service Mode eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 96 Sealed esere onenian sts cobs ee EEE REE E eases eee ented 260 Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 143 Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 146 Sensor Watch ccccccccccccecsessssscecececeeserseee 74 180 260 REPOLts iiec ssdistissicdocnsch a e a Suis 190 PUM yE E Gistetent cvs atts watuteno E 220 Silent Alarm 0 cccccccecceccceceesesseeceeeeeesesssaeeeeees 180 260 Siren amp Strobe In STAY Mode 235 Siren Run Time aseinio iaei ires atai 221 Siren Sound Rate cesesssensesscesseeseeeeecenecensenes 221 Smart Watie aeeoeia e ai a i 229 Software Version Number eeseeeseeeeeeersrrerrereereen 271 Solution Codepad Mimic Board cece eeeeeeeeee 254 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Index SP CIPICATIONS sonreir iridia 269 271 STAY Indicator nanana ered 51 54 STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status 233 STAY Modes occiesscisscsocctss css istesashentvcesstedssescentssbsstevesss 261 ATID G se ses dscesstssenescesd testask stesesttdeeeestetesesoeseses 64 118
24. Day Of The Month Tens Digit Day Of The Month Units Digit F906 Month Of The Year Units Digit 909 Year Tens Digit 910 Year Units Digit Table 131 System Date Locations The Solut ion 844 862 880 control panel has a real time 12 month calendar that needs to be set during installation This time must be set using the format DDMMYY i e If the date that is required to be set is the 1 July 1997 you would then program 010797 Every time the system has been powered down the system date will need to be reset Setting The Date and Time The Master Code holder is allowed to set the date and time as follows How To Set The New Date and Time 1 Enter your followed by and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash T 2 Enter the day month year hour and minute using the DD MM YY HH MM format i e DD Day of the month MM Month of the year YY Current year HH Hour of the day MM Minute of the day Please note that when programming the hour of the day you will need to use 24 00 hour format 3 Press the LAWAY button when finished Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish If a long beep is heard an error was made when entering the date and time Example If the date and time needs to be set for the Ist January 1997 at 10 30 PM program the date and time as follows 2580 6 Ay O 1 0 1 9 2 2 3 0
25. Fire Alarm Resetting cee eeeeceesseeseceseenseeeees 208 Fire Alarm Verification 2 0 0 0 ceeeceseeseceseceseeeees 208 Fuse Fail cs4 6 3408 Shttatiea set ities Seats 206 Global Chime 0 eiscc ccassevis doce seecsock eis olasescunee tutes 210 Horn Speaker e 2 2 si ss nhs eirinen eesriie euoe risia 207 Horn Speaker Monitor Fail cece eee eeeeeeeees 206 Kiss Off After Exit Time eee eeeeeeeeeees 205 Kiss Off Received 0 0 eee ceseceecseecneeeseeeeeeeeees 206 TOW Batterys scsccicocsncecehecis cs coesee seis cevesessunetetees 206 Mimic System Fault 0 eee eee cee ceeeeeeeeeees 208 Mamie Zone Lacs occ ois soa Ghee itso eecen soies 210 Mamie ZONE 2is5 cssiek oP isa eieo nee cee ekes 210 Mimic Zone 3 3 3 k chet Ga eese kit ok esate telcos 210 Mimic ZOMG 4 sees Leds es i sneis cocheeceh le telcos 210 Mimie Zone Se e eases 210 Mime ZOnE Oe E E R s 210 Mime ZONE Tere ea ia E Sa EEA RS 210 Mime Zole Sae a ones ete sheen RRE 210 Radio Control Output 1 eeeeeeeseeees 209 Radio Control Output 1 Not In AWAY Mode 209 Radio Control Output 2 oo ee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 209 Radio Control Output 2 Not In AWAY Mode 209 Remote Control Tysen nana a 209 Remote Control 2 pes ects hose eto Sa A 209 Remote Control 3a ssns a 209 Ring Det ct iier a isise r E 209 Sensor Watch Alarm eeseeesseeeeseerseeerrsreersereerseess 206 Silent Al Miei tinin eser eenn ri 207 Sirens RUNNING isisiiiitrsieset s sopes roks esi 207 Str
26. Forced Arming Disarming The System From STAY Mode 2 Codepad Duress Alarm Codepad Panic Alarm Codepad Fire Alarm Codepad Medical Alarm Isolating Zones Standard Isolating Code To Isolate Fault Analysis Mode Fault Descriptions Low Battery Date and Time Sensor Watch Horn Speaker Monitor Telephone Line Fault E Fault Fuse Fail Communication Failure AC Mains Failure Remote Radio Transmitter Operations Indications Upon Remote Radio Transmitter Operations Remote Radio User Code Priority Levels Changing Or Deleting Remote Radio User Codes 2 Channel Radio Remote Hand Held Transmitter Operations Arming In AWAY Mode Disarming From AWAY Mode Arming In STAY Mode 1 Disarming From STAY Mode 1 Panic Alarm 4 Channel Radio Remote Hand Held Transmitter Operations Arming In AWAY Mode Disarming From AWAY Mode Arming In STAY Mode 1 Disarming From STAY Mode 1 Panic Alarm Turning Output 1 ON Turning Output 1 OFF Turning Output 2 ON Turning Output 2 OFF System Functions 85 System Functions 86 Installer Code Functions 86 Reserved 86 Set The Number Of Days Until The First Test Report 87 Changing Domestic Phone Numbers 88 Change Telco
27. Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails Location 360 366 A H Location 360 Test Reporting Time POETE Location 362 Location 363 Location 364 Location 365 Location 366 Location 367 Actual Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Actual Hour Of The Day Units Digit Actual Minute Of The Day Tens Digit Actual Minute Of The Day Units Digit Test Report Code Tens Digit Test Report Code Units Digit lo ofojo 7 7fo Repeat Interval In Days Test Reporting Dialler Options 0 No Report Required 1 Receiver 1 2 Receiver 2 4 Receiver 1 2 8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails Location 368 397 Output Location 368 373 Configurations Output 1 1140 0 0 Default For Horn Speaker Location 386 391 Location 374 379 Output 2 2 7 1o 2 1 5 Strobe Default For Fire Alarm Verification Location 392 397 foley 1 fos ojoo Ca o aa 2t fa Default For Sirens Running Default For Entry Exit Warning Day Alarm O O U Ee Event Type Polarity Time Base Time Multiplier Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Page 199 Page 202 Location 380 385 zlojejejoje Default For Strobe Reset In 8 Hrs ISSUE140 280 Location 398 399 Entry Timer 1 Location 398 Location 399 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Page 218 Location 400 401 Entry Timer 2 Location 400
28. This facility will allow you to make alterations to your customers control panel without the need to leave your office thus improving customer service and saving you time and money For country locations where a control panel may be situated hundreds of kilometres from your office the Upload Download feature is invaluable When selecting the control panel type during the setup of a new customer database in the Alarm Link Software refer to the table below to select the software version number that corresponds to the control panel type required Control Panels Software Version Select Panel Type Solution 844 1 00 S 404_V10 Solution 862 1 00 S 406_V10 Solution 880 1 00 S 408_V10 Table 54 Alarm Link Panel Forms After selecting the correct panel type when adding a new customer in the Alarm Link Software the Subscriber ID Number and the Installer Code must match that of the control panel for synchronisation when making connection to the control panel If these two locations do not match that of the control panel the computer and the control panel will not synchronise Remote Connect The remote connect feature allows you to establish a connection through the telephone network from your IBM or compatible computer to the Solution 844 862 880 control panel anywhere in the country where a telephone line is present The advantages of this are very obvious and having this facility will allow you to offer faster service to your clients
29. be transmitted when this user code has been used to arm or disarm the system This option requires Open Close reports in LOCATION 333 334 to be enabled on page 191 for it to be effective Refer to Isolating Zones on page 70 for more information Isolating zones will only be allowed by using the method Code To Isolate once this priority level has been set Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Information 168 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Day Alarm Zones LOCATION 265 0 When programming this location you will notice that there are four options per location You may select one two three or all four of these options however only one number needs to be programmed This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together Program a seven 7 if you require options 1 2 and 4 simultaneously i e 1 2 4 7 Day Alarm Zone Table 79 Day Alarm Zones 1 4 Day alarm allows a combination of zones to be monitored while the system is in the disarmed state Indications are available via any of the programmable outputs including the codepad buzzer This function has been expanded to accommodate latching and non latching day alarm output event types When the system has been armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 zones that have been programmed as day alarm zones will activate the sirens and dialler just as non day alarm zones do When day alarm has been activated it will ignore
30. iol li 1 Australian DTMF 5 Digits Second 4 International DTMF Dialling Format 2 Australian Decadic 5 Reversed Decadic 3 Alternate DTMF amp Decadic AUST 6 Alternate DTMF amp Reversed Decadic Location 081 112 00 Page 149 Reserved Location 113 1420 Page 150 Telco Arming Sequence Location 143 158 Page 151 eke Diserang Soon poooggggG0000000u0o Location 159 174 ne Page 151 Cal Back Telephone Number pooooooooooo0000 He ahi ye end ruse y a uearege dart pager rc gy Ge bh nti yh me timer t a Bs Preset ny may Page 152 Ring Count 0 Panel Will Not Answer 14 Answering Machine Bypass 2 8 1 13 No Of Rings Until Panel Answers 15 Answering Machine Bypass 1 Location 176 Page 153 1 Display FAULT Indicator When Telephone Line Fails 2 Sound Alarm When System Is Armed 4 Sound Alarm When System Is Disarmed 8 Reserved Telephone Line Fault Options ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Solution 880 Programming Sheets 295 Location 177 Page 157 H H 1 Dialler Reporting Functions Allowed Dialler Options l 2 Remote Arming Via The Telephone Allowed 4 Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed 8 Use Bell 103 For FSK Format Disabled CCITT V21 Location 178 Page 158 Dialler Options 2 1 Open Close Reports Only If Previous Alarm o p 2 Open Close Reports For STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 4 Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete 8 Extend Time To Wait For Handshake From 30 Seconds
31. owner with no intention of infringement of the trademark Notice of Liability While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document neither Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited nor any of its official representatives shall have any liability to any person or entity with respect to any liability loss or damage caused or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by the information contained in this book Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited reserves the right to make changes to features and specifications at any time without prior notification in the interest of ongoing product development and improvement Table Of Contents Zone Indicators Introduction 17 Introduction___ 18 Solution 844 Features 19 Solution 862 Features 20 Solution 880 Features 21 Quick Start 22 Solution 844 Zone Defaults 24 Solution 862 Zone Defaults 24 Solution 880 Zone Defaults 24 Zone Types 25 Programming 27 Programming 28 Programming With The Remote Codepad 29 Programming With The Hand Held Programmer 31 Programming With The Programming Key 33 Programming Option Bits 34 Installer s Programming Commands 35 Command 958 Enable Disable Zone Status Mode 36 Command 959 Test Programming Key 37 Command 960 Exit Installer s Programming Mode 39 Command 961 Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default Settings
32. 1 If this option has been selected the system will arm in STAY Mode 1 when using the momentary keyswitch input Arming the system in AWAY Mode or disarming the system will not be permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected Momentary Disarm From STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 If this option has been selected the system will only disarm the system from STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 when using the momentary keyswitch input Arming the system in STAY Mode 1 STAY Mode 2 or arming and disarming the system from AWAY Mode will not be permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected 8 ze Ee EOL KEY SWITCH MOMENTARY TOGGLE Figure 11 Wiring Diagram For Keyswitch Zone Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Information 183 Zone Options 2 When programming this location you will notice that there are four options per location You may select one two three or all four of these options however only one number needs to be programmed This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together Program a seven 7 if you require options 1 2 and 4 simultaneously i e 1 2 4 7 Option Description Isolate In STAY Mode 1 Zone Isolation Allowed 4 Forced Arming Allowed Oos Zone Restore Report Table 87 Zone Options 2 Isolate In STAY Mode 1 If this option has been selected it will allow the zone to be automatically isolated when the system has been armed in
33. 1 Off System Is Not Armed In STAY Mode 1 Table 146 Partial Indicator Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 240 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual AUX Indicator If Option 8 in LOCATION 432 on page 243 has been enabled the AUX indicator will be used to display when the control panel is using the telephone line The AUX indicator will also flash in unison with the PARTIAL indicator when Installer s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions are used Indicator Definition a OES System Is Armed In STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 Off System Is Not Armed In STAY Mode Flashing Zone Isolating Mode Or Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones Table 147 AUX Indicator MAINS Indicator The MAINS indicator is used to display that the systems AC mains supply is normal or has failed When programming numbers i e Installer s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions the MAINS indicator will illuminate when you program numbers between 10 and 15 The MAINS indicator represents digit 10 plus the value of the illuminated zone indicator e g If you program a twelve the MAINS indicator and zone 2 will illuminate Indicator Definition Flashing AC Mains Failure Table 148 MAINS Indicator FAULT Indicator The FAULT indicator is used to display that the system has detected a system fault Refer to Fault Analysis Mode on page 73 for more information on system faults Every time a new system
34. 162 Installer Code 12la fa Location 185 264 Page 163 User Codes Location 185 189 Location 190 194 User Code 1 2 5 8 o User Code 2 Location 195 199 Location 200 204 Location 205 209 User Code 3 User Code 4 User Code 5 15 5 15 5 15 2 isi ns 214 Location 215 219 rafts fis 224 User Code 6 15 2 User Code 7 15 15 15 15 User Code 8 15 3 BBE 225 229 Location 230 234 Bie 235 239 Radio Code 9 Radio Code 10 Radio Code 11 Location 240 244 Location 245 249 Location 250 254 Radio Code 12 Radio Code 13 Radio Code 14 j5 Location 255 259 Location 260 264 Radio Code 15 Radio Code 16 aslisjis is o User Code Priority Priority Description Priority Description eport Arm Only Lee Arm Disarm Master Code Functions i Arm Di Master Code Functions Daa Open Close Report OO Arm Di Master Code Functions Code T Arm Di Master Code Functions Code T Table 156 User Code Priority Levels Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 276 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Location 265 Page 168 Day Alarm Zones 1 Zone 1 4 Zone 3 2 Zone 2 8 Zone 4 Location 266 Page 170 H 0 No End Of Line Resistor 9 10K EOL Resistor Value ee saan 2 1K5 11 22K 3 2K2 12 Reserved 4 3kK3 13 Reserved 5 3K9 14 Reserved 6 4K7 15 Split EOL 8K3 6K8 Four Burglary 7 5K6 Zones and Four 24 Hour Zones 15 8 6K8 Location 267 322 Page 174 Zones Zone 3 Locat
35. 2 5 and 6 to be automatically isolated when arming in STAY Mode 2 follow the sequence below Remember to substitute the default Master Code 2580 with the Master Code that has been programmed I a 4 m Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 112 os 5 EF Example I ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual How To Disable STAY Mode 2 Zones If at any time you wish to disable all zones selected to be automatically isolated for STAY Mode 2 you may enter your followed by 4 and the button followed by the button MR 4 awww away Turning Outputs On Off If an output has been programmed for remote operation you can turn the remote output on or off using this Master Code function or remotely using the Alarm Link Software For this Master Code Function to operate one or more of the following output event types need to be programmed in any of the programmable outputs Output Number 1 Output Event Type 2 8 on page 209 Output Number 2 Output Event Type 2 9 on page 209 Output Number 3 Output Event Type 2 10 on page 209 How To Turn An Output On From The Remote Codepad 1 Enter your MASTER cone followed by 5 andthe AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter the required ouTPUT no 1 3 followed by the button Three beeps will be heard and the output will now turn on Repeat step 2 if more than on
36. 207 Codepad Fire Alarm This output will operate when a codepad medical alarm has been activated by pressing the 4 and buttons on the remote codepad simultaneously This output will reset once a valid user code has been entered at the remote codepad Codepad Panic Alarm This output will operate when a codepad panic alarm audible or silent has been activated by pressing the 1 and3 buttons or the stay and away buttons on the remote codepad simultaneously This output will reset once a valid user code has been entered at the remote codepad Codepad Duress Alarm This output will operate when a duress alarm has been activated by adding a 9 to the end of the user code being used to disarm the system This output will reset the next time the system has been armed Codepad Tamper Access Denied This output will operate when the wrong code has been entered more times than allowed Refer to LOCATION 356 on page 197 for setting the number of incorrect attempts that may be allowed This output will reset once a valid user code has been entered Horn Speaker Output 1 Only This output will operate only on Output and should be programmed whenever an 8 ohm horn speaker is required A maximum of two horn speakers may be used Refer to LOCATION 411 on page 221 for setting the siren run time and LOCATION 412 on page 221 for setting the siren sound rate If you require monitoring of the horn speaker refer to Option 2 in
37. 24 Hour Tamper zone Contact ID Event Code 137 is always ready to trigger the dialler horn speaker bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed state A 24 Hour Tamper zone will not send a restore report until the zone actually restores Reserved Keyswitch Zone A Keyswitch zone is used when you need to connect a keyswitch to operate the system Refer to Keyswitch Zone Options on page 181 for selecting options such as momentary toggle etc User code number 16 will be reported when arming and disarming using this method of operation Programming the polarity level of user code 16 will also effect the operation of the keyswitch zone Refer to User Code Priority on page 165 for more information 24 Hour Burglary Zone A 24 Hour Burglary zone Contact ID Event Code 133 is always ready to trigger the dialler horn speaker bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed state A 24 Hour Burglary zone will not send a restore report until the zone actually restores 24 Hour Fire Zone A 24 Hour Fire zone Contact ID Event Code 110 is always ready to trigger the dialler horn speaker bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed state A distinct fire sound is emitted through the horn speaker to indicate this type of alarm condition This fire sound is completely different to the burglary sound A 24 Hour Fire zone will not send a restore report until the
38. 8 MAINS Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Table 49 Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions EF Example I 107 How To Program Telco Arming Sequence Easy Call Forward No Answer On 1 Enter your followed by 3 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Press button followed by the away button to change the telco arming sequence Three beeps will be heard If a previous call forwarding sequence has already been programmed the sequence will be displayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators Refer to Table 49 Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence on page 106 for the indicators and their meanings If there is no call forward sequence programmed a further two beeps will be heard after entering this mode These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the call forward sequence has been displayed Enter stay 6 1 followed by the you wish the control panel to divert all calls to followed by stay 2 and the button Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state aww 1 foo 1 6 1 E Sax ow If you wish to automatically divert all unanswered incoming calls to another telephone number e g 9672 1777 when the system is armed in
39. 880 Installation Manual ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Optional Equipment 252 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Optional Equipment ISSUE140 EDM manufactures numerous accessories that can be used in conjunction with the Solut ion 844 862 880 control panel These optional pieces of equipment will enhance certain features thus making the system extremely flexible 2 Channel 4 Channel Hand Held Transmitters 304 Mhz REO12 RE013 These hand held radio transmitters can be used in conjunction with the 304 Mhz RF Receiver WE800 to remotely operate the system Both hand held transmitters have the ability to remotely arm and disarm the system in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 and activate remote panic alarms The 4 channel hand held transmitter has the added ability to operate outputs such as garage doors swimming pool pumps or outside lights etc 304 Mhz RF Receiver WE800 This interface was designed to allow the use of up to eight radio user codes 9 16 This is useful if you require the system to be radio controlled and you would like to give your customer total control via a radio hand held remote transmitter chal iat FOVAYSLNI ASO NO SSATSYIM NOILNIOS RED WIRE AUXILIARY Em ANODULE A BLACK WIRE 27 O27 ao 3920 Qs 530 o pE ED Sos Pe 3 S gS oo o Qn a y Fa Sp PR lt 3 8 Qio ss cs an Y Qor g gag a 509 E e388 3 e395 3 ora es g
40. 880 Programming Sheets 294 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Location 000 015 Page 143 Pinay Telephone Number For Receiver 1 pogogooooooooooo Location 016 031 lt lt Va Page 143 Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 Location 032 Page 144 f 1 HI LO Handshake Contact ID 4 No Handshake Required Handshake Tone For Receiver 1 a O O cuore ae 3 2300 Hz Low Speed Sescoa Location 033 Page 145 Transmission Format For Receiver I 1 Contact ID 5 Basic Pager 2 4 2 Express 6 Reserved 3 FSK 300 Baud 7 Reserved 4 Domestic 8 Reserved Locdiono sA Ose JAE E E A A A TO AEE E E Page 145 Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1 folo olojolo Locaion oao S055 0 Vege kt ee oe eae be ee ee es eg ee ee ee ee gl Page 145 Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 fo o o ojolo olojofojojo ojo o Location 056 071 Page 146 Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 Location 072 Page 148 H n sh ke Tone For Receiver 2 1 HI LO Handshake Contact ID 4 No Handshake Required andsha 2 1400 Hz TX 1900 Hz 5 Pager 3 2300 Hz Low Speed Sescoa Location OI ee te eG gy 8 8 Gee ve ema fet E os Wyo ew tece Nao ey Page 148 Transmission Format For Receiver 2 1 Contact ID 5 Basic Pager 2 4 2 Express 6 Reserved 3 FSK 300 Baud 7 Reserved 4 Domestic 8 Reserved Location 074 079 lt lt lt Page 148 Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2 folo olojolo Location 080 Page 149
41. 9672 1777 and 9672 1233 follow the sequence below and replace the telephone numbers mentioned in the manual with the telephone numbers that you wish to program 2580 2 Aw 96721777 sAd 4 96721233 y Disable Domestic Dialling If at any time you wish to cancel domestic dialling for any reason e g You are moving house and do not wish the system to continue calling your work place or mobile phone etc you may enter your MASTER cone followed by 2 and the button the button followed by the 4 and the button to disable domestic dialling ASTER CODE 2 Aw St 4 wy Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Dialler Reporting Formats 136 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Transmission Formats When making use of the control panel s dialling and communication features there are a number of transmission formats available Refer to LOCATION 033 on page 145 to set the required transmission format for Receiver 1 and LOCATION 073 on page 148 to set the required transmission formation for Receiver 2 The Solution 844 862 880 control panel comes factory default to report in the Contact ID Format Contact ID Format This format can identify hundreds of protection zones by their unique code and provides a single digit event qualifier and a three digit event code that quickly identifies the condition being reported Subscriber Group Point ID ID Number Qualifier Number Number Four Digit Even
42. AWAY Mode follow the example sequence below and replace the telephone number mentioned in the manual with the telephone number that you wish to divert all calls to Remember to substitute the default Master Code 2580 with the Master Code that has been programmed 2580 3 AW me ae ees EF How To Disable The Telco Arming Sequence If at any time you wish to cancel the telco arming sequence you may enter your MASTER CODE followed by 3 and the button followed by 1 and the button then the stay button followed by the 4 and the button WASTER CODE e 1 fom E4 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 108 ISSUE140 EF Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual How To Program The Telco Disarming Sequence Easy Call Forward No Answer Off 1 Enter your MASTER cone followed by 3 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Press button 2 followed by the Away button to change the telco disarming sequence Three beeps will be heard If a previous telco disarming sequence has already been programmed the sequence will be displayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators Refer to Table 49 Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence on page 106 for the indicators and their meanings If no telco disarming sequence has been programmed a further two beeps will be heard after entering this mo
43. Arm Disarm Tracking On Power Up 4 Internal Crystal To Keep Time 8 Keyswitch Interface Night Arm Station Or RE005 Installed 1 Test Reports Only When Armed 2 Test Report After Siren Reset 4 Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 8 STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status 1 Codepad Display Extinguish After 60 Seconds 2 Single Button Arming In Allowed AWAY STAY Mode 1 amp 2 4 Single Button Disarming Allowed STAY Mode 1 amp 2 8 Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm 1 Codepad Fault Alarm Beeps Allowed 2 Use Digit 3 For Codepad Duress Instead Of Digit 9 4 Alarms Activate Siren amp Strobe Outputs In STAY Mode 1 amp 2 8 Reserved 1 Radio Receiver WE800 2 Latching Keyswitch Input 3 Momentary Keyswitch Input 4 Reserved Increments Of 5 ms Increments Of 80 ms Location 748 Location 749 0 Defaulting Enabled 15 Defaulting Disabled Location 901 Location 902 Location 903 Location 904 Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Hour Of The Day Units Digit Minute Of The Day Tens Digit lo o olo Minute Of The Day Units Digit Location 905 Location 906 Location 907 Location 908 Location 909 Location 910 Day Of The Month Tens Digit Day Of The Month Units Digit Month Of The Year Tens Digit Month Of The Year Units Digit Year Tens Digit Year Units Digit ISSUE140 292 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Solution
44. Contact ID Event Code 110 to a base station receiver Figure 4 CP5 LED Codepad Showing Audible Alarm Buttons EF 4 6 Codepad Medical Alarm An audible codepad medical alarm will be triggered when both the 7 and QO buttons on the remote codepad are pressed simultaneously Refer to Option 4 in LOCATION 425 on page 230 if you wish to program codepad medical to be silent If you wish to disable the reporting of the codepad medical alarm report refer to LOCATION 341 342 on page 193 for more information A codepad medical alarm will transmit a Contact ID Event Code 100 to a base station receiver EF 7 9 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 70 Isolating Zones ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Isolating zones allow you to manually disable one or more zones before arming the system in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 Once a zone has been isolated access is allowed into that zone during the armed state without activating the sirens or dialler An example when you may require to isolate a zone before arming in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 may be when a zone PIR detector may be false alarming or that you may need to leave a pet inside a particular zone whilst you are away Isolating zones is performed by one of two methods One way requires the use of a valid user code while the other way does not The ability to isolate zones is governed by the priority level allocate
45. Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 154 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Ring Burst Time LOCATION 748 749 46 Location Description Increments Of 5 ms Increments Of 80 ms Table 72 Ring Burst Time Locations V1 07 These locations program the ring burst time Default 500 ms If the duration of the telephone ring tone is 1 5 seconds programming the ring burst time more than the telephone ring duration 1 5 seconds the control panel will not detect an incoming call Always program the ring burst time less than the duration of the ring tone al These locations are factory set and should not be changed unless required ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Dialler Options 156 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Programming Option Bits When programming these locations you will notice that there are four options per location You may select one two three or all four of these options however only one number needs to be programmed This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together Example If at LOCATION 177 you want options 1 2 and 4 add the numbers together and the total is the number to be programmed In this example the number to be programmed is 7 i e 1 2 4 7 E Description Dialler Reporting Functions Allowed 1 Remote Arming Via The Telephone Allowed he cgo i Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed _ Option Use
46. Disarming Time Location 418 Location 419 Location 420 Location 421 Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Hour Of The Day Units Digit Minute Of The Day Tens Digit Minute Of The Day Units Digit Location 422 Kiss Off Wait Time Location 422 Increments Of 500 ms 500 ms 8 Sec s Le Location 423 Reserved ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited p w Q Oo N N wo Solution 862 Programming Sheets Location 424 System Options 1 Location 425 System Options 2 Location 426 System Options 3 Location 427 System Options 4 Location 428 Consumer Options 1 Location 429 Consumer Options 2 Location 430 Consumer Options 3 Location 431 Radio Input Options Location 748 749 Ring Burst Count Location 900 Disable Factory Default Location 901 904 System Time Location 905 910 System Date Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited 291 Page 229 1 EDM Smart Lockout Allowed 2 Horn Speaker Monitor 4 Strobe Indications For Radio Arm Disarm 8 Horn Speaker Beeps For Radio Arm Disarm L Page 230 1 Codepad Panic To Be Silent 2 Codepad Fire To Be Silent 4 Codepad Medical To Be Silent o 8 Access Denied To Be Silent Page 231 1 AC Fail After 1 Hour Disabled After 2 Minutes 2 Ignore AC Fail 4 Pulse Count Handover Allowed 8 8 Handover Delay To Be Sequential Page 232 1 Panel To Power Up In The Disarmed If Power Reset 2
47. For Upload Download Terminate Upload Download On Alarm External Modem Module CC811 Required For Upload Download Table 77 Alarm Link Options Upload Download Allowed This option will need to be selected if you require to use the Alarm Link Software CC816 to remotely program the control panel The control panel will not respond to the Alarm Link Software if this option is not selected Refer to Alarm Link Software on page 126 for more information Call Back Phone Number Required For Upload Download 2 If this option has been selected and a call back telephone number has been programmed the remote programming computer must be connected to the telephone line that has been programmed in the call back telephone number in LOCATION 159 174 on page 151 If this option is not selected it will allow the installer to connect to their customers control panel from any remote location when attempting upload download operations without the need to wait for the control panel to call back to the remote computer but still allows the ability for the customer to initiate the modem call from the codepad when requested by holding down the button Refer to Alarm Link Software on page 126 for more information Terminate Upload Download On Alarm 4 If the control panel is communicating with a remote computer via Alarm Link Software CC816 and an alarm has registered the Alarm Link session will be terminated and the relevant alarm
48. From STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode s Momentary Armand Disarm In AWAY Mode 97 Momentary Armin AWAY Mode Table 86 Keyswitch Zone Options Latching Arm and Disarm In AWAY Mode If this option has been selected the system will either arm or disarm from AWAY Mode when using the latching keyswitch input Latching Arm In AWAY Mode If this option has been selected the system will arm in AWAY Mode when using the latching keyswitch input Disarming the system will not be permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected Latching Disarm From AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 If this option has been selected the system will disarm from AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 when using the latching keyswitch input Arming the system will not be permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected Latching Arm and Disarm In STAY Mode 1 If this option has been selected the system will arm or disarm in STAY Mode 1 when using the latching keyswitch input Arming and disarming the system in AWAY Mode will not be permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected Latching Arm In STAY Mode 1 If this option has been selected the system will arm in STAY Mode 1 when using the latching keyswitch input Arming the system in AWAY Mode or disarming the system will not be permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected Latching Disarm From STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 If this optio
49. Hand Held Programmer CC814 has five seven segment displays The three seven segment displays on the left display the current location number and the two seven segment displays on the right display the data for the location currently being displayed To connect the hand held programmer locate the socket marked PROGRAMMING KEY found at the top of the PCB printed circuit board next to the Auxiliary Module socket Observe the triangular markings on the PCB and line them up with the markings on the hand held programmers connecting socket When the hand held programmer is correctly connected onto the printed circuit board one beep will be heard and four centre bars on the hand held programmer will illuminate with either an A or U suffix to indicate the system is armed or unarmed Only when the Installer s Programming Mode has been accessed will any numerals appear on the display When connecting the hand held programmer to the control panel make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position and that no external programming key has been connected Failing to do this may corrupt the control panel s memory If this occurs the control panel will need to be returned to Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited where a service fee will be charged to unlock the control panel s memory To access the Installer s Programming Mode enter the INSTALLER CODE followed by the button The factory default Installers Code
50. However a user code with this priority level will only send a closing report only after a previous code that has the ability to send an opening report has disarmed the system Arm Only I This priority level allows the user code holder to arm the system but not disarm it No closing reports will be transmitted when this user code has been used to arm the system However a user code with this priority level will only send a closing report only after a previous code that has the ability to send an opening report has disarmed the system Arm and Disarm Open Close Reports 2 This priority level allows the user code holder to arm and disarm the system When this user code has been used an opening or closing report will always be transmitted along with the user number that armed or disarmed the system This option requires Open Close reports in LOCATION 333 334 to be enabled on page 191 for it to be effective Arm Only Closing Reports 3 This priority level allows the user code holder to arm the system but not disarm it When this user code has been used a closing report will always be transmitted along with the user number that armed the system This option requires Open Close reports in LOCATION 333 334 to be enabled on page 191 for it to be effective Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 166 10 12 14 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Arm and Disarm Code To Isol
51. ISSUE140 Enter Installer s Programming Mode i e 1 2 34 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the data currently programmed in LOCATION 000 will be displayed via the hand held programmer or remote codepad If you are using the remote codepad the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash to indicate that you have entered Installer s Programming Mode Enter command 9 9 Q followed by the button Two beeps will be heard If you are using the hand held programmer the right display will indicate the software version number of the control panel If you are using the remote codepad the codepad will display a zone indicator corresponding to the control panel type Refer to Table 9 Control Panel Type above for more information Press the button to exit this command and return to the Installer s Programming Mode Enter command 9 6 O followed by the button to exit Installer s Programming Mode Two beeps will be heard and the system will now return to the disarmed state If you are using the remote codepad the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish to indicate that you have returned to the disarmed state Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 47 Disable Factory Default LOCATION 900 0 This feature prevents the control panel from being manually defaulted via the default button or to prevent using a programming key to perform an automatic download to the control pan
52. Indicator Definition On Areals Armed In AWAY Mode Or STAY Mode 1 Off Area Is Disarmed Table 144 Area On Off Indicators Area Display Indicators A group of four Area Display Indicators indicate which area is currently being displayed i e If number 1 is being displayed all information provided on the display relates only to Area 1 If number 2 is being displayed all information provided on the display relates only to Area 2 Pressing the away button will toggle or move you to the next area display i e If Area 1 is currently being displayed pressing the away button will toggle or move you to Area 2 Pressing the AWAY button a second time will toggle you back to display information for Area 1 Area Display Indicators Definition Indicates Current Area Being Displayed Off Indicates Current Area Not Being Displayed Table 145 Area Display Indicators Status Indicators A group of four indicators display the following PARTIAL Indicator The PARTIAL indicator is used to display that the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 The PARTIAL indicator will also flash in unison with the AUX indicator when Installer s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions are used For the different methods of arming the system in STAY Mode 1 refer to page 64 Refer to Zone Options 1 on page 173 for information on setting zones to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1 Indicator Definition a ee System Is Armed In STAY Mode
53. Installer s Programming Mode This command is used to exit the Installer s Programming Mode after you complete programming the control panel You may exit Installer s Programming Mode from any location by entering command 9 6 0 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state When using the remote codepad to program the system you will notice that the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish to indicate that you have terminated Installer s Programming Mode Command 961 Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default Settings This command will reset the control panel back to the factory default values Refer to the default values shown throughout this manual or the programming sheets on pages 273 293 for more information You may reset the control panel back to the factory default settings from any location when in Installer s Programming Mode This is achieved by entering command 9 6 1 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the system will default back to the factory default values Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 40 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Command 962 Copy Control Panel Memory To Programming Key This command is used to copy the control panel memory to the programming key Only the Programming Key CC891 may be used with the Solut ion 844 862 880 control panel How To Copy The Control Panel Memory
54. Location 325 326 Page 188 Zone Status Bypass Reports Location 325 Zone Bypass Report yp P Location 326 Zone Bypass Restore Report Location 327 328 ee Page 189 Zone Status Trouble Reports Location 327 Zone Trouble Report P Location 328 Zone Trouble Restore Report 213 Location 329 330 ak ee ar ee pe gp ee ee ee pe Page 190 Zone Status Sensor Watch Reports Location 329 Sensor Watch Hepo P Location 330 Sensor Watch Restore Report 4 5 bans eee eee Page 190 Zone Status Alarm Restore Code Location 38382 ee ee nn Ey pe lia a Page 190 Zone Status Reporting Options 0 No Report Required 1 Receiver 1 2 Receiver 2 4 Receiver 1 2 8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails Location 833 3834 Page 191 Open Close Reports Location 333 Opening Report p P Location 334 Closing Report 12 Location 3385 Page 191 4 H 0 No Report Required Open Close Reporting Options FS Reek 2 Receiver 2 4 Receiver 1 2 8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails Location 38386 O Page 192 Codepad Duress Report s Location 337 338 EE Page 192 Codepad Panic Report Location 339 3400 Page 193 Codepad Fire Report Location 341 3420 ee Page 193 Codepad Medical Report Location 343 Sy eee Page 194 Codepad Reporting Options 0 Ne neport Required 1 Receiver 1 2 Receiver 2 4 Receiver 1 2 8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails L ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Solution 880 Programming Sh
55. Location Description Area 1 Zone 1 Indicator Area 1 Zone 3 Indicator 440 Area Zone indicator SSS Area Zone 8 Indicator Table 153 Solution 880 Zone Allocations For Area 1 Zone Allocations For Area 2 LOCATION 442 449 00000000 Location Description Area 2 Zone 1 Indicator Area 2 Zone 2 Indicator Area 2 Zone 3 Indicator Table 154 Solution 880 Zone Allocations For Area 2 T Cw Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 246 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Example In this example zones 1 2 3 and 4 have been allocated to Area to appear as zones 1 2 3 and 4 Zones 1 5 6 7 amp 8 have been allocated to Area 2 to appear as zones 1 5 6 7 and 8 Programming the same zone into more than one area indicates that the zone will operate as a common zone Solution Solution 1 2 3 4 1 5 6 7 8 STAY MAINS FAULT AWAY STAY MAINS FAULT AWAY ee Oh T a o Figure 14 Area 1 Codepad Display Figure 15 Area 2 Codepad Display Area 1 Zone Allocations Area 2 Zone Allocations LOCATION 434 441 LOCATION 442 449 12340000 10005678 ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Partitioning 247 User Code Allocations LOCATION 450 465 are used to assign each user code to an area or multiple areas when the Solution 880 control panel has been partitioned A number 0 3 is required to be entered into each of these loc
56. Number allocated to that particular area Subscriber ID Numbers and Open Close reports must be programmed for both areas The option of first to open last to close reporting is only applicable when all user codes biii have their priority level set with no open close reports Therefore if user codes have f priority levels set to open close reports an opening or closing report will always be reported when any area is disarmed or armed irrespective of which area was first to open or last to close Area I Codepad Connected To Data Terminal 2 If this option has been enabled the DATA terminal on the Solut ion 880 control panel will be configured to transmit status information only relevant to Area 1 This allows you to connect an area addressable codepad CP500A set for Area 1 operation to the DATA terminal of the control panel instead of connecting the addressable codepad to an output If this option has not been enabled the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad will need to be used as the DATA terminal on the control panel would display information for both Area 1 and Area 2 An advantage in using this option is that it allows you to configure a system into separate areas while still leaving the maximum number of programmable outputs available for other applications Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 244 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Reset Sirens From Any Area Allowed 4 This option is only app
57. Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Table 120 Delay Alarm Reporting Time Locations These locations programs the time in seconds that a delayed report waits dormant in the dial buffer before reporting to the receiving party If a user code holder resets the alarm condition within this time frame the control panel will clear the dialler buffer and prevent the alarm from reporting to the receiving party Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 220 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Sensor Watch Time LOCATION 408 409 00 Location Description Increments Of Days Tens Digit Increments Of Days Units Digit Table 121 Sensor Watch Time Locations The time set in these two locations determine how many days 0 99 a zone may remain sealed before registering as a fault This feature is only active when the system is in the disarmed state If a zone programmed for sensor watch has not become unsealed and reset during this time the FAULT indicator will illuminate Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 74 for further information on sensor watch faults Refer to Zone Options 1 on page 179 for programming zones for sensor watch The sensor watch time counter is only active whilst the control panel is disarmed Therefore if the system is only disarmed for 8 hours a day and the sensor watch time is programmed for 1 day a zone that is programmed for sensor watch will registe
58. Refer to System Operations on page 62 for more information on operating the system How To Move From One Area To The Next 1 Press the away button The Area Display indicator will move to the next area display i e If the Area Display illuminates number 1 pressing the away button will toggle to display Area 2 Pressing the Away button a second time will toggle the display back to Area 1 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Partitioning 243 Programming The following locations area only applicable when partitioning the Solut ion 880 control panel Remember that when programming option bit locations you may add the options together e g If you require both options 2 and 4 you would add the two options together and program a 6 Partitioning Options 1 LOCATION 432 0 Description First To Open Last To Close Reporting Area 1 Codepad Connected To Data Terminal Reset Sirens From Any Area Allowed Master Codepad To Display AUX Indicator When On Line Table 151 Partitioning Options 1 First To Open Last To Close Reporting l This option needs to be enabled if only one Open Close report is required when the system has been partitioned Rather than having individual Open Close reports fore each area a closing report will be transmitted only when BOTH areas have been armed and an opening report will be transmitted as soon as one area has been disarmed The reports will be transmitted on the Subscriber ID
59. Same Time 0 This user code function only operates on Solution 880 systems that have been partitioned The function allows those user codes that are allocated to both Area 1 and Area 2 to arm or disarm both areas at the same time This allows the user to ensure that both areas will be armed or disarmed by pressing one extra button rather that entering a code twice to ensure both areas are armed or disarmed This function can be used to arm both areas at the same time from either the CP5 Area Addressable Codepad CP500A or the Master Partitioned Codepad CP500P Refer to Option 2 in LOCATION 433 on page 244 to enable this feature How To Arm Disarm Both Areas At The Same Time 1 Enter your USER CODE followed by O and the button Two beeps will be heard and both areas will be armed or disarmed from AWAY Mode If you require both areas to be armed or disarmed in STAY Mode 1 substitute the AWAY button with the LSTAYJ button F USERCODE Q Aww Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 118 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Hold Down Functions ISSUE140 Hold down functions have been incorporated to allow easy activation of specific operations When a button is held down for two seconds two beeps will be heard and a particular function will operate The hold down functions available are listed below Arm The System In AWAY Mode Holding the button down until two beeps are heard will ar
60. Using N O Contacts 12V amp N C EOL ZONE 6K8 INPUT EOL 3K3 ZONE 4K7 N O Figure 9 Connections Of Split EOL Resistors Using One N O Contact 12V ZONE INPUT ZONE Figure 10 Connections Of Split EOL Using Two N O Contacts ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Information 173 Zone Programming Each zone contains seven locations that are divided into three groups The first 3 locations determine how the zone will operate the next two locations allow various options for each zone and the last two locations contain the dialler reporting information of each zone Zone Operating Information Zone Type This location programs the Zone Type required e g Delay 1 Instant 24 Hour etc Zone Pulse Count This location sets how many times the zone must trigger within the time specified in the Zone Pulse Count Time Zone Pulse Count Time This parameter sets the time period for the number of times the zone must trigger before activating an alarm Zone Options Zone Options 1 This location controls the zone e g Lockout Siren Silent etc Zone Options 2 This location controls the zone e g Isolate In STAY Mode 1 Forced Arming Allowed etc Zone Reporting Information Zone Report Code If you wish the control panel to transmit zone alarm reports this location should be programmed as 1 If you do not wish to transmit zone alarm reports this location sho
61. a a 76 Access Codes Installer Coden raii n 162 User Code Priority Level 165 USEr Codes uini t a AE T AOR 163 Access Denied Code Retries arisin a e ER 197 Access Denied To Be Silent 0 cee eeeeeeeeceseeeneeeeees 230 Alarm Condino enne oerien EE 259 Alarm LINK covets so iscsscesteeinaseet sspeesesbasuss ve sessi 129 160 Direct COMNECH ceiisscsitaibetseeesetevivestie ar E 128 Enable Alarm Link Call Back 0006 129 160 Enable Upload Download cece 129 160 External Modem Module cesceeeecceeneeeeeeeeeeees 129 Initiate Modem Call ceeeeesseceeeeeesseceeneeeneeeeenes 121 Remote Connect eriein i 126 Remote Connect With Call Back Verification 127 Remote Connect With Customer Control 126 Remote Connect Without Call Back Verification 127 Terminate Session If Report Pending 129 160 Alarm Link Software 0 eccceecceesceceeeeeeneeeceeeeeneeeees 253 Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm eee 234 Alarm Reporting 0 00 cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeensneceeeneeenes 179 Answering Machine Bypass eseeseeeeeeee 152 259 Only When Armed u ieee ce eeeeceeeeeceecnneenseenee 157 Area Display Indicator cee eeeeeeeeeteeeees 58 239 Area On Off Indicator cccccccccccceeeesssseeeeeeeenes 57 239 Armed id ist aidinmed el aided EREE 259 Arming Both Areas At Same Time ccceeseeseeeeeee 99 117 In AWAY Mode uu cece eseeereeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 62 118 In STAY
62. after a previous code that has the ability to send an opening report has disarmed the system Arm and Disarm Master Code Functions Open Close Reports This priority level allows arming and disarming of the system and the ability to carry out any of the Master Code Functions described on page 99 Opening and closing reports will always be transmitted when this user code has been used to arm or disarm the system This option requires Open Close reports in LOCATION 333 334 to be enabled on page 191 for it to be effective Arm and Disarm Master Code Functions Code To Isolate This priority level allows arming and disarming of the system and the ability to carry out any of the Master Code Functions described on page 99 No opening and closing reports will be transmitted when this user code has been used to arm or disarm the system However a user code with this priority level will only send a closing report after a previous code that has the ability to send an opening report has disarmed the system Isolating zones will only be allowed by using the method Code To Isolate once this priority level has been set Refer to Isolating Zones on page 70 for more information Arm and Disarm Master Code Functions Code To Isolate Open Close Reports This priority level allows arming and disarming of the system and the ability to carry out any of the Master Code Functions described on page 99 Opening and closing reports will always
63. and Manufacturing Pty Limited System and Consumer Options 233 Consumer Options 1 LOCATION 428 0 Description Test Reports Only When Armed Test Report After Siren Reset Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 8 STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status Table 139 Consumer Options 1 Test Reports When Armed 1 If this option has been selected test reports Contact ID Event Code 602 will only be sent when the system has been armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 Itis no longer necessary to send a test report as well as an opening and closing report every day During the working week most commercial premises would be open and therefore a test report is not necessary as open and close reports would be sent at the time programmed If you wish to manually send a test report hold down the O button until two beeps are heard Refer to Test Reporting Time on page 199 to set the test report time required To set the first test report refer to the Installer Code Function Set The Number Of Days Until The First Test Report on page 87 Test Report After Siren Reset 2 Selecting this option will force the control panel to send a test report after the siren has reset This can be used to indicate to the monitoring station that the control panel itself has not been tampered with during the alarm period Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 4 If automatic arming in STAY Mode 1 is preferred to automatic arming in AWAY Mode this option will
64. are not required for testing Refer to Isolating Zones on page 70 for further information How To Enter Walk Test Mode 1 Enter your MASTER cone followed by 7 andthe AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash The codepad will beep once every second while the system is in walk test mode 2 Unseal and seal the zones to be tested The codepad will sound one long beep and the horn speaker will sound one short beep every time a zone is sealed or unsealed 3 Press the button to exit this function Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish The system has now returned to the disarmed state C WASTER CODE 7 AWAY Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 116 ISSUE140 Example Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Event Memory Recall Mode This function allows you to playback the last forty events that have occurred to the system The event memory recall mode reports all alarms and arming disarming of the system in the AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 This function helps with trouble shooting system faults The events are displayed via the codepad indicators How To Enter The Event Memory Recall Mode 1 Enter your MASTER cone followed by 8 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard The events will be played back via the codepad indicators in reverse chronological order WASTER CODE g awww
65. are sealed or manually isolated before you can arm the system Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Operations EF 63 Disarming The System From AWAY Mode When you enter the premises after the system has been armed in AWAY Mode you will need to disarm the system from AWAY Mode to disable detection devices that will activate the sirens strobe and bell outputs If there has been an alarm condition prior to disarming the system from AWAY Mode a flashing ZONE indicator will be displayed indicating a previous alarm on that zone How To Disarm The System From AWAY Mode 1 Enter your Cope followed by the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard and the AWAY indicator will extinguish CODE AWAY Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 64 ISSUE140 a Method One Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Arming The System In STAY Mode 1 Arming the system in STAY Mode is only used when the perimeter and unused areas of the premises need to be armed to detect any would be intruder from entering the premises at the same time allowing you to move freely within an area which has been automatically isolated Programming zones to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1 can only be programmed by the installer Refer to Zone Options 2 on page 183 for further information on setting zones to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1 There are two methods for arming your system i
66. at the top of the PCB next to the PROGRAMMING KEY connecting socket 4 Program a 15 into LOCATION 900 e g 1 5 followed by the F button 5 Release the default button 6 Enter command 9 6 O followed by the button to exit Installer s Programming Mode Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state If you are using a remote codepad the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish to indicate that the system has returned to the disarmed state Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 48 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Defaulting The Control Panel If the Solution 844 862 880 control panel does not have LOCATION 900 programmed as 15 follow the procedure outlined below to successfully default the control panel back to the factory default settings How To Default The Control Panel Via Installer Code 1 Enter Installer Programming Mode e g 1 2 34 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard The STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash to indicate that you have accessed programming mode 2 Enter Installer s Programming Command 9 6 5 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard after the control panel has successfully been defaulted 3 Enter Installer s Programming Command 960 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard The STAY and AWAY indicators will cease to flash and the system will return to the disarmed state The c
67. button to disarm the system and to reset any alarm that may have occurred during the system power up The AWAY indicator will extinguish to indicate that the system has now been disarmed If any zone indicators were flashing this would indicate that an alarm had occurred on that zone If a zone indicator is constantly illuminated this would indicate that the zone is unsealed The back up battery should now be connected Enter the factory default Installer Code 1 2 34 followed by the away button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will now flash simultaneously to indicate that you have now entered Installer s Programming Mode When entering Installer s Programming Mode you will be automatically positioned at LOCATION 000 the beginning of the Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 Enter the Primary Telephone Number followed by the Secondary Telephone Number and the Subscriber ID Number for Receiver 1 Refer to Dialler Information on page 142 for more information Remember that when programming a zero in the telephone numbers of Receiver and Receiver 2 a zero must be programmed as a ten Programming a zero in the telephone number will indicate the end of the dialling sequence A zero must be programmed as a zero in all other locations other than the telephone numbers for Receiver 1 Receiver 2 and the Call Back Telephone number unless otherwise stated Set the time for the test reports if required Any ot
68. call can clear the line by placing the hand piece back on the hook If you pick up the hand piece again dial tone will be received and you will be able to make a new call immediately This is not so here in Australia In Australia only the calling party can immediately terminate the call If you receive a call from someone and hang up on them picking the hand piece back up again to make a new call only reconnects you to the original caller It will not be possible to make another call until the original caller hangs up or you hang up phone for ninety seconds or longer So you see Australia is very different and needs a special form of anti jamming to suit our telephone network There are control panels on the market that after making a few call attempts which fail simply hang up and wait for ninety seconds or so in an attempt to clear the jamming incoming call This may work in some instances where the caller is not a genuine burglar and is not deliberately trying to jam the control panel With this simple method of hanging up for ninety seconds we have not only delayed the alarm signal for this time but also the time taken for the original failed call attempts which could easily total 4 minutes This is bad enough in its own right but even more disturbing is the fact that the initial failed call attempts allow for the establishment of an audio connection between the would be burglar and the control panel Anyone with a little knowledge of alarm sys
69. condition If a Delay 2 zone has not restored at the time the system is disarmed a zone restore report will be automatically sent to the receiving party Reserved Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 176 ISSUE140 10 1 12 13 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Reserved 24 Hour Medical A 24 Hour Medical zone Contact ID Event Code 100 is always ready to trigger the dialler horn speaker bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed state A medical report will be transmitted to the base station receiver A 24 Hour Medical zone will not send a restore report until the zone actually restores 24 Hour Panic A 24 Hour Panic zone Contact ID Event Code 120 is always ready to trigger the dialler horn speaker bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed state A panic report will be transmitted to the base station receiver A 24 Hour Panic zone will not send a restore report until the zone actually restores 24 Hour Hold Up A 24 Hour Hold Up zone Contact ID Event Code 122 is always ready to trigger the dialler horn speaker bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed state If you require the hold up alarm to be silent enable Option 4 Silent Alarm in Zone Options on page 179 A 24 Hour Hold Up zone will not send a restore report until the zone actually restores 24 Hour Tamper A
70. etc you may enter your followed by 2 and the AWAY button the stay button followed by the 4 and the Away button to disable domestic dialling air MASTERCODE 2 fm Sw 4 ow Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8 MAINS Digit Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Table 47 Codepad Indicators When Changing Domestic Telephone Numbers Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 106 Digit ISSUE140 Zone I Indicator Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Change Telco Arm Disarm Sequence This Master Code Function allows you to program the call forward sequence to automatically operate when you arm the system in AWAY Mode This feature is only available if your telecommunication provider has the call forward option available When arming the system in AWAY Mode the control panel will automatically dial the telecommunication exchange to redirect all calls to your mobile phone pocket pager or answering service When activated your telephone will not ring but outgoing calls may still be made Contact your telecommunications provider for more information on call forward operations Digit Required Number To Program Digit Required Number To Program W Refer To Digit O 10 11 12 5 Table 48 Telco Arm Disarm Dialling Digits a aa a ee ee ee E Seer er eee Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone
71. for Output 1 1 L2 L3 a will need to be programmed 4 j s 4 sjLs LOCATION 368 6 369 1 71 8 Ce 71 8 e esr 0 E inad isar 0 Paw MASTER PARTITIONED ADDRESSABLE CODEPAD AREA CODEPAD Figure 17 Connections For CP 5 Master Partitioned CP500P Codepad and CP 5 Area Addressable CP500A Codepad DOS O OOS GY YH OW GO OOS BATTERY 9 9 2319 Bla Gls vols Sins The following DIP Switch settings and locations must be lt programmed for the two CP 5 Area Addressable CP500A 5 codepads to function correctly AREA 1 CODEPAD PERRA auae DIP Switch 1 on the back of the remote codepad will need to be in samseeas sssaaa the ON position The following location will also need to be kikki programmed HOME MAINS FAULT AWAY HOME MANS FAULT AWAY LOCATION 432 Option bit 2 must be enabled EEE 1123 AREA 2 CODEPAD Output 1 4 5 6 4 5 l6 DIP Switch 2 on the back of the remote codepad will need to be in the ON position The following locations for Output 1 will need ca 7I 8 IL9 to be programmed esw 0 Em wsm 0 Fa LOCATION 368 6 369 1 AREA 1 AREA 2 CODEPAD CODEPAD Figure 18 Connections For Two CP 5 Eight Zone Area Addressable CP500A Codepads Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 250 Solution 844 862
72. for information on remote operations and adding and deleting remote radio user codes Location 185 189 Location 190 194 User Code 1 2 5l8 fo User Code 2 Location 195 199 Location 200 204 pit hs 209 User Code 3 User Code 4 User Code 5 15 5 15 15 2 Location 210 214 Location 215 219 refs 220 224 User Code 6 15 15 15 2 User Code 7 15 15 15 15 User Code 8 15 15 3 BE ns 229 Location 230 234 a ns 239 Radio Code9 5 15 15 2 Radio Code 10 Radio Code 11 15 5 15 15 2 Location 240 244 Location 245 249 Location 250 254 Radio Code 12 15 15 15 15 15 2 Radio Code 13 75 15 A Radio Code 14 15 15 15 2 Location 255 2 Location 4 B Radio Code 15 Radio Code 16 75 Solution 880 User Codes The Solution 880 has the ability to have up to sixteen programmable user codes User Codes 1 16 Refer to System Operations on page 62 for information on the different methods of arming and disarming the system However if you wish to remotely operate the system via hand held remote transmitters user codes 9 16 may be programmed as remote user codes Refer to Remote Radio Transmitter Operations on page 78 for information on remote operations and adding and deleting remote radio user codes Location 185 189 Location 190 194 User Code 1 2 5 8 o User Code 2 Location 195 199 Location 200 204 Location 205 209 User Code 3 User Code 4 User Code 5 Location 210 214 Location 215 219 Location
73. gives the control panel the ability to recognise that detection devices may have stopped working This is a feature that monitors the operation of a zone over a programmed time period Refer to LOCATION 408 409 on page 220 for programming sensor watch time This value determines how many 24 hour periods a zone may remain continuously sealed before it registers as a sensor watch fault The number of hours required to fulfil these 24 hour periods is only calculated while the system is in the disarmed state Every time the system is armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 the sensor watch timer pauses calculating Sensor watch timer will continue calculating the next time the system has been disarmed If the sensor watch time is programmed for two days in a situation where a premises is armed for twelve hours and disarmed for twelve hours each day it will take four days before a zone can register as a faulty sensor watch zone Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Information 181 Keyswitch Zone Options When you select a zone to be a keyswitch input then the following table relates to the options available to that keyswitch zone These keyswitch zone options replace Zone Options only for the zones that have been programmed to operate as a keyswitch zone Keyswitch zones will report as user code 16 Option Description 0 Latching Amand Disarm In AWAY Mode 4 ia Armand Disamin STAY Mode 6 Lachine Disarm
74. is 1234 Two beeps will be heard and the hand held programmer will display the current data stored in LOCATION 000 To move to another programming location enter the LOCATION NUMBER required followed by the button The data of the new location will now be displayed e g 3 4 followed by the button will automatically step you to the beginning of the Subscriber ID Number for Receiver 1 To move to the next location press the button This will step you to the next location and the data in that location will be displayed e g If you are currently positioned at LOCATION 034 pressing the button will step you to LOCATION 035 If you press the LSTA button without previously entering a location number the system will step back one location e g If you are positioned at LOCATION 035 and you press the X button you will step back one location to LOCATION 034 To change data in the current location enter the new value 0 15 followed by the button This will store the new data into the location and still leave you positioned at the same location You will notice that the new information programmed will be displayed on the data display of the hand held programmer e g If you enter the value 1 4 followed by the X button the data display will display 14 To move to the next location press the button The data in the next location will now be displayed Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty
75. isolate only after the system has been armed Repeat Step 4 if more than one zone is required to be isolated until all zones that are required to be isolated have been selected Press the Away button when finished selecting the zones to be isolated Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state The zones selected to be isolated when you arm the system in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 will continue to flash until the system has next been disarmed Example STAY CODE STAY ZONE NUMBER STAY Away As each zone is selected to be isolated the corresponding ZONE indicator will begin to flash If a mistake is made press the zone number that was incorrectly entered followed by the stay button This zone is now no longer selected to be isolated and the ZONE indicator will extinguish If you wish to manually isolate zones 1 3 and 4 the following sequence would be entered below STAY CODE STAY Sw 3 Sa 4 Sa Bo Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Operations 73 Fault Analysis Mode Whenever a system fault occurs the FAULT or MAINS indicator will flash and the codepad will beep once every minute If the MAINS indicator is flashing this is because the AC mains supply has been disconnected from the control panel If the AC mains supply has been disconnected continuously for more than 2 minutes the control panel will
76. occurs The output will switch back to zero volts once the 7 button on the remote codepad has been held down until two beeps are heard Time parameters are not applicable to this polarity Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs 215 Timing Of Outputs The timing of outputs is calculated by the time base and a multiplier These two values play different roles depending on the polarity selected When programming outputs to pulse both the On and Off times can be set One shot polarities can be programmed to operate between 200 ms up to 99 hours in duration d Time Multiplier Base Tens Units The maximum value that can be programmed in the two multiplier locations is 9 9 Option Time Base 1 Minute 60 Seconds 4 1 Hour 60 Minutes Table 113 Time Base Settings The time base settings can be set to only one of the values listed in Table 113 Time Base Settings The multiplier value is a two digit decimal number from 00 99 For greater accuracy use 60 seconds for 1 minute intervals and use 60 minutes for one hour intervals Pulsing Polarities When calculating pulsing polarities both the On and Off times need to be programmed The duration or On time of an output is determined by selecting only one of the time base options from Table 113 Time Base Settings This means there are only four On times to choose from The Off time is calculated as a multiple of the
77. on page 234 How To Disarm The System From STAY Mode 2 1 Enter your followed by the stay button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will extinguish The system is now disarmed CODE STAY A flashing ZONE indicator represents a previous alarm on that zone If this is the case a valid user code will need to be used to disarm the system using method one To enable method two Option 4 in LOCATION 429 on page 234 will need to be programmed How To Disarm The System From STAY Mode 2 1 Hold down the button until two beeps are heard The STAY indicator will extinguish and the system is now disarmed 0 Single button disarming from STAY Mode 2 will report as user code number 16 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Operations 1 Solution 2 3456 69 Codepad Duress Alarm A codepad duress alarm is used as a silent hold up alarm This will only occur when the number 9 is added to the end of any valid user code that is being used to disarm the system However if a user code has a priority level of arming only entering their user code followed by 9 will still transmit a duress alarm when the system is armed A duress alarm Contact ID Event Code 121 is only useful if your system is reporting back to a monitoring station or pocket pager as domestic reporting format can t decipher which type of alarm had occurred If you wish to disable the codepad duress alarm report refer to
78. pause or the control panel automatically hangs up after a period of two minutes The identification beep will allow the customer to verify which control panel made the call if more than one control panel is reporting to the same telephone number The identification beep is programmed in LOCATION 039 of the Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1 or LOCATION 079 of the Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2 A maximum of six calls per alarm event will be made when the control panel has been set up for Domestic Dialling Format This count includes any unsuccessful calls The counter will be reset if the zone re triggers and a further six attempts will be made The control panel will stop dialling after six attempts or three successful calls The control panel will also stop dialling if a valid user code has been entered at the remote codepad If both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 have been programmed for domestic dialling the maximum number of calls per alarm event is twelve Acknowledge Domestic Dialling Once the call has been received if it is not acknowledged during any of the transmission pauses by pressing the button on a touch tone telephone or by using the Phone Controller CC911 the control panel will continue to send its transmission for a period of 2 minutes It will then hang up and commence dialling the next telephone number If the call is successfully acknowledged the control panel will hang up and no further calls will be made for
79. report an AC mains fail to a base station receiver AC Fail report Contact ID Event Code 301 will be transmitted The MAINS indicator will cease to flash as soon as the AC mains supply has been reconnected When the AC mains supply has been continuously connected for a period of two minutes the codepad will cease the once a minute beep and AC Fail restore report will be transmitted to the base station receiver If Option 1 Enable AC Fail In 1 Hour in LOCATION 426 on page 231 has been enabled the codepad will flash the MAINS indicator as soon as the AC mains supply has been disconnected and will not activate the dialler or the codepad buzzer unless the AC mains supply has been disconnected continuously for a period of 1 hour If Option 2 Ignore AC Mains Fail in LOCATION 426 on page 231 has been enabled the codepad will not indicate when the AC mains supply has failed but the control panel will still report if enabled an AC Fail report Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Remote Radio Transmitter Operations 78 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Remote Radio Transmitter Operations ISSUE140 The Solution 844 862 880 control panel has the ability to be remotely operated using hand held radio remote transmitters There is a choice of using either a 2 channel hand held transmitter or a 4 channel hand held transmitter to operate the system Both the 2 channel and 4 channel hand h
80. reporting of the codepad fire alarm program LOCATION 339 340 on page 193 as zero Codepad Medical To Be Silent 4 If this option has been selected a codepad medical alarm will not operate the horn speaker the bell or the strobe outputs If this option is not selected all three outputs will operate after a codepad fire alarm has been activated when the 7 and QY buttons on the remote codepad are pressed simultaneously Selecting this option does not effect the operation of the communication dialler If you wish to disable the reporting of the codepad medical alarm program LOCATION 341 342 on page 193 as zero Access Denied To Be Silent 8 If this option has been selected a codepad tamper alarm will not operate the horn speaker bell or the strobe outputs If this option is not selected all three outputs will operate after a codepad tamper alarm has occurred Refer to LOCATION 356 on page 197 to set the number of invalid code retries before an alarm condition occurs Selecting this option does not effect the operation of the communication dialler If you wish to disable the reporting of access denied reports program LOCATION 357 358 as zero ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System and Consumer Options 231 System Options 3 LOCATION 426 8 Description AC Fail In 1 Hour Disabled After 2 Minutes Ignore AC Fail Pulse Count Handover 8 Handover Delay To Be Sequential
81. send an AC Loss signal Contact ID Event Code 301 to the base station receiver and the codepad will commence beeping once every minute until the AC mains supply has been reconnected or acknowledged by pressing the button When the AC mains supply has been restored the MAINS indicator will automatically stop flashing and return to its normal state Once the AC mains supply has been connected continuously for two minutes the control panel will send an AC Loss restore report and the codepad will automatically stop it s once a minute beep How To Determine The Type Of System Fault To determine all system faults other than the AC mains supply enter fault analysis mode by following the procedures below 1 Hold down the 5 button until two beeps are heard The FAULT indicator will remain steady and the STAY and AWAY indicators will flash in unison with each other The illuminated ZONE indicators will indicate the type of system fault that has occurred Refer to Table 30 Fault Indicators below for the list of different system faults that may occur 2 To exit fault analysis mode press the Away button The STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish and the FAULT indicator will remain illuminated Zone Indicator Fault Description 4 Hom Spent Discommena Co e O 8 Comnmicaioas Fars Table 30 Fault Indicators How To Acknowledge The System Fault 1 To acknowledge the system fault press the button The FAU
82. should be connected to the green wire on the TFO08 Plug Pack that is internally connected to the mains earth Extensive lightning protection has been built into the control panel and this terminal will have to be connected correctly if you are to take the best advantage of the protection provided These two terminals are plug on type and are the termination point for the TF008 Plug Pack The voltage of the plug pack being used must be 18 22 volts AC and rated at 1 3 Amps minimum for correct operation The BATTERY connects to the red positive terminal of the battery and the BATTERY connects to the black negative terminal of the battery The battery should be a 12 volt sealed lead acid rechargeable type with a capacity of between 1 2 AH 6 5 AH The back up battery is protected by a 3 Amp fuse The charging globe which is situated above the 3 Amp fuse will always be illuminated until the battery is 100 charged This group of terminals are the connection points for your system codepads All system codepads should connect in a parallel configuration back to these terminals The only factor restricting the number of codepads that can be connected is the available power and its distribution Each codepad has a maximum power requirement of 60 mA with all indicators illuminated therefore this should be taken into consideration when calculating your available continuous power The total continuous external load on the system should not exceed 1 Amp m
83. station receiver If an alarm occurs that does not need to report to the base station receiver the session will not be terminated If this option has not been selected and an alarm has registered the Alarm Link software will prompt the operator with a Terminate or Continue message 8 Use External Modem Module CC811 For Alarm Link Operations If this option has been selected the control panel will use the external plug in Module CC811 for remote programming operations via the Alarm Link Software CC816 This option should only be enabled where the telephone line is susceptible to noise Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 130 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Domestic Dialling 132 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Domestic Dialling Format ISSUE140 The locations of the primary telephone number and secondary telephone number for Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 are only used for base station reporting and pager reporting When either Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 is set up for domestic reporting both the primary telephone number and the secondary telephone number will be ignored The domestic dialling telephone numbers are located separately in LOCATIONS 466 514 making provision to store up to 48 digits The 48 locations are used to store any number of telephone numbers and subject to the length of each telephone numb
84. that event Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Domestic Dialling ir 133 Setting Up and Programming Domestic Reporting Programming the control panel for domestic reporting has been made extremely simple by the use of the Installer s Programming Command 965 Refer to Command 965 Set Up Domestic Dialling Format on page 43 for more information How To Set Up The Control Panel For Domestic Dialling 1 Enter Installer s Programming Mode EG 1 2 3 4 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Enter Command 9 6 5 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard The control panel has now been set up for Domestic Dialling Format Refer to Command 965 Set Up Domestic Dialling Format on page 43 for more information Exit Installer s Programming Mode by entering Command 9 6 0 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish The system will now return to the disarmed state Enter your MASTER CODE followed by 2 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash If there are telephone numbers programmed they will be displayed one digit at a time via the codepad indicators If there are no telephone numbers programmed a further two beeps will be heard after entering this mode These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the last phone num
85. the Area 2 Codepad to the main codepad terminals CP CP and CLK with the DATA terminal to be connected to one of the programmable outputs programmed as 6 1 Area 2 Codepad Data DIP switch 2 on the back of the Area 2 codepad will need to be in the ON position DIP Switches R22 LO R19 Area 1 51 nO E S1 w Area 2 52 on m Area 3 S1 S2 on jmo Area 4 53 onm E E an Ye ee Zoe ne any Cope ee eres m m Ril p12 Blk Red mae Figure 16 DIP Switch Location On Back Of Codepad PCB Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Partitioning 249 Codepad Connections For Partitioning FOSS OS GSVO IIII QIE QIR BATTERY cy eed z 8 z yol 2i s 29 R339985 g Sle o s gjan If the CP 5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad is assigned to Area 1 DIP Switch 1 on the back of the remote codepad will need 7 to be in the ON position The following locations for Output 1 FA will need to be programmed LOCATION 368 6 369 0 Solution Solution If the CP 5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad is assigned to Area 2 DIP Switch 2 on the back of the remote codepad will need to be in the ON position The following locations
86. the strobe will flash for 3 seconds to indicate that the system has been disarmed Panic Alarm 1 Press both the AWAY button and the STAY button together for two seconds on the hand held transmitter This will initiate an audible panic alarm that will activate the horn speaker strobe and internal sirens If Option 1 Enable Codepad Panic To Be Silent has been programmed in LOCATION 425 on page 230 the remote radio panic alarm will also be silent Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Remote Radio Transmitter Operations 83 p There are two remote outputs than can be operated from the DOOR and AUX buttons on the 4 channel hand held transmitter These outputs can only be programmed by the installer The output event types that can be used are listed in the table below Refer to the section on Programmable Outputs from page 201 for more information Output Event Type Description Page Radio Control Output 1 209 Radio Control Output 2 209 Radio Control Output 1 Not Armed In AWAY Mode 209 Radio Control Output 2 Not Armed In AWAY Mode 209 Table 34 Remote Output Event Types Turning Output 1 ON 1 Press the DOOR button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds Output 1 will now turn on Turning Output 1 OFF 1 Press the DOOR button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds Output 1 will now turn off Turning Output 2 ON 1 Press the AUX button on the hand held transmitter for two sec
87. this function will be automatically isolated To arm the system in STAY Mode 2 hold down the O button until two beeps are heard Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 118 or Arming The System In STAY Mode 2 on page 67 for more information How To Set STAY Mode 2 Zones 1 Enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 4 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will begin to flash Enter the ZONE NUMBER that you wish to automatically isolate followed by the stay button The corresponding ZONE indicator will begin to flash to display that you have selected the zone to be automatically isolated every time you arm the system in STAY Mode 2 If more than one zone is required to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2 repeat step 2 until all zones required have been selected Press the button to exit this function Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state The zones that were selected to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2 and the STAY indicator will extinguish RSTALLER CODE 4 Raw ONENOMBER Star wr As each zone has been selected to be isolated the corresponding ZONE indicator will begin to flash If a mistake has been made press the zone number that was incorrectly entered followed by the stay button This zone is now no longer programmed to be isolated and the ZONE indicator will extinguish This function will not operate on Solution 8
88. user code being used to disarm the system This alarm will always be silent A duress alarm can be triggered during exit time i e If the system has been armed and then disarmed by adding the O button to the end of the user code before exit time has expired a Duress report will be transmitted Adding Q tothe end of a user code when arming the system will not cause a duress alarm Refer to Option 2 in LOCATION 430 on page 235 if you wish to add the 3 button to the end of the user code being used to disarm the system Restore reports are not transmitted for this event If a Duress report is not required program LOCATION 336 with a zero Codepad Panic Report LOCATION 337 338 7 Location Description Codepad Panic Reporting Code Tens Digit Codepad Panic Reporting Code Units Digit Table 98 Codepad Panic Report Locations A Panic Alarm report Contact ID Event Code 120 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when either the two outside buttons 1 and 3 or stay and AWAY are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm Refer to Option 1 in LOCATION 425 on page 230 if you require codepad panic to be silent Restore reports are not transmitted for this event If a Panic report is not required program LOCATION 337 338 with a zero ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Reporting Information 193 Codepad Fire Report LOCATION 339 340 7 Location De
89. will never allow for an audio connection between the burglar and the control panel Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Appendices Appendix B 267 All dialling products produced by Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited have incorporated this true anti jamming feature as standard since 1985 and we do not consider it as an option but a must in any professional security system True anti jamming can only be found in products produced by Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited and any other manufacturer can only offer second best due to our patent on this very unique and effective procedure Test Reports Only When Armed The Solution 844 862 880 control panel allows for test reports to be transmitted to the base station receiver to verify that the dialler functional So what you might say as most alarm diallers allow you to do this The one problem with this is that installations that report opening and closing reports will generally also transmit a test report each day This call is unnecessary as a successful opening and closing report means that the dialler is functioning correctly The Solution 844 862 880 control panel allows you to save time and money by providing test reports only while the system is in the armed state Program LOCATION 428 on page 233 with Option 1 Send test reports only if the system is armed and then set the test report time to be in the middle of the day During Monday
90. will step you to LOCATION 035 If you press the button without previously entering a location number the system will step back one location e g If you are positioned at LOCATION 035 and you press the stay button you will step back one location to LOCATION 034 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 30 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual To change data in the current location enter the new value 0 15 followed by the stay button This will store the new data into the location and still leave you positioned at the same location You will notice that the new information programmed will be displayed on the codepad indicators e g If you enter the value 1 4 followed by the stay button both ZONE 4 and the MAINS indicator will illuminate To move to the next location press the Away button The data in the next locations data will now be displayed To exit the Installer s Programming Mode enter command 9 6 0 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish The system will now return to the disarmed state and is now ready for use Refer to Installer s Programming Commands on page 35 for further information on commands that can be performed during access of Installer s Programming Mode Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 31 Programming With The Hand Held Programmer Example The
91. within an area which has been automatically isolated Programming zones to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2 can be programmed either by the Installer Code Function Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 95 or Master Code Functions Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 111 Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode When arming the system in STAY Mode 2 an optional entry timer called Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode may be used to delay the sirens strobe and bell outputs if a zone that has not been automatically isolated has triggered into alarm condition Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode is the delay time used for all zones except 24 hour zones when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 If the Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode has been programmed and a zone that has not been automatically isolated has triggered the codepad will beep twice a second until the Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode has expired or the system has been disarmed If the alarm condition has not been reset before Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode expires the strobe bell and siren outputs will activate into alarm Single button arming in STAY Mode 2 will report as user code number 16 How To Arm The System In STAY Mode 2 1 Hold down the button until two beeps are heard The STAY indicator will illuminate and exit time will now commence Any zones that have been programmed to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2 will begin to flash until exit time expires At
92. you wish to program two separate telephone numbers 9672 1777 and 9672 1233 follow the sequence below and replace the telephone numbers mentioned in the manual with the telephone numbers that you wish to program EF 1234 2 a 96721777 6 4 96721233 y How To Disable Domestic Dialling If at any time you wish to cancel domestic dialling for any reason e g You are moving house and do not wish the system to continue calling your work place or mobile phone etc you may enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 2 and the AWAY button the LSTAY button followed Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8 MAINS Digit Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Table 37 Codepad Indicators When Changing Telephone Numbers Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 90 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Change Telco Arm Disarm Sequence 3 This installer code function allows you to program the call forward sequence to automatically operate when you arm the system in AWAY Mode This feature is only available if your telecommunication provider has the call forward option available When arming the system in AWAY Mode the control panel will automatically dial the telecommunication exchange to redirect all calls to your mobile phone pocket pager or answering service When activated your telephone will still allow outgoing calls to be made
93. 0 Seconds 2 Single Button Arming Allowed AWAY STAY Mode 1 amp 2 4 Single Button Disarming Allowed STAY Mode 1 amp 2 8 Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm 1 Codepad Fault Alarm Beeps Allowed 2 Use Digit 3 For Codepad Duress Instead Of Digit 9 4 Alarms Activate Siren amp Strobe Outputs In STAY Mode 1 amp 2 8 Reserved 1 Radio Receiver WE800 2 Latching Keyswitch Input 3 Momentary Keyswitch Input 4 Reserved Increments Of 5 ms Increments Of 80 ms Location 748 Location 749 0 Defaulting Enabled 15 Defaulting Disabled Location 901 Location 902 Location 903 Location 904 Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Hour Of The Day Units Digit Minute Of The Day Tens Digit Minute Of The Day Units Digit Location 905 Location 906 Location 907 Location 908 Location 909 Location 910 Day Of The Month Tens Digit Day Of The Month Units Digit Month Of The Year Tens Digit Month Of The Year Units Digit Year Tens Digit Year Units Digit ISSUE140 282 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Solution 862 Programming Sheets 284 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Location 000 015 Page 143 Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 pogogooooooooooo Location 016 031 lt lt Va Page 143 Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 Location 032 Handshake Tone For Receiver 1 HI LO Handshake Contact ID 4 No Ha
94. 1 Area 2 Is Disarmed eeeceeeecsseceereeenseceeneeenseeeeee 211 Armed In AWAY Mode ceescceeceeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeee 204 Armed In STAY Mode ceeceeescceeceessseceeereeeeeeee 204 Auto Arm Pre Alert Time 000 000 ceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 204 Codepad Duress Alarm 0 ee eeeescese cee eneeeneeeee 207 Codepad Fire Alarm ec ee ceeceeceseceseecneeeeeeeeees 207 Codepad Medical Alarm eee cece eceeeeeeeeeee 206 Codepad Panic Alarm 0 ce ee eeceseceseceecneetneeene 207 Codepad Tamper ec eeeeeeeccessceseceecssecnseeeeees 207 Communications Failure 0 00 ceseeeeeessecceseeeeneeeeee 209 307 Communications Failure After 3 Unsuccessful Calls ig RasS eae hatade sued SE shits E ET ics 209 Day Alarm Enabled 00 0 0 eee eee cseeeeeeeeeeeeees 206 Day Alarm Latching 0 0 ee eee eeeeeereeeeeeeeees 205 Day Alarm Resetting ieee eee ceeereeeeeeeeees 205 Dialler Active errespe eree esparset orae Er Esas 209 Dialler Disabled siiis sees setsstssssssossdssecs sehasestetess 209 EDMSAT Satellite Siren eee 204 Entry Warning soseer niers seiri eree enove iese 205 Entry Warning Day Alarm Resetting 00 0 205 Ext Warming en eye eh A a ee Rete 204 Exit Warning Entry Warning eee 205 Exit Warning Finished eee eeceeseceseeeeeees 205 Exit Warning With All Zones Sealed Or Entry Warning 40 dpe Ah edt a i eel ee Es 204 Fire Alarm Latching 00 0 0 cece eceeeeeseceseceeenseeeees 208
95. 1 2 3 4 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the hand held programmer will display the data currently programmed in LOCATION 000 2 Enter command 9 5 8 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the number 4 will illuminate to indicate zones 1 4 are being displayed How To Disable Zone Status Mode 1 Enter command 9 5 8 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and you will return to the Installer s Programming Mode A in the display indicates the zone is unsealed A blank display indicates the zone is sealed A 4 jndicates that zone 1 is sealed and zones 2 3 and 4 are unsealed 7 A 8 A indicates that zones 5 and 8 are unsealed and zones 6 and 7 are sealed Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 37 Command 959 Test Programming Key This command initiates a test to be carried out on the programming key Only the Programming Key CC891 may be used with the Solut ion 844 862 880 control panel The programming key test is non destructive and any data in the programming key will remain intact after the test has been completed One long beep indicates that the programming key test has failed and two beeps indicates a successful test If the programming key has been removed before the test is complete or the programming key has failed the data in the programming key has become corrupt Remember not to remove the programming key while the activ
96. 13 for further information Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 122 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Codepad Buzzer Tone Change Holding the 8 button down continuously will change the tone of the buzzer in the remote codepad There are fifty different tones to choose from between 1500 Hz 5000 Hz and they are specific to each codepad In a multiple codepad installation each codepad can have a different tone How To Change The Tone Of The Buzzer 1 To change the tone of the codepad buzzer hold the 8 button down continuously The tone of the buzzer will start to increase in pitch 2 Release the 8 button when the desired tone has been reached Every time the system has been powered down each codepad will need their individual tone reset using this function How To Determine The Area That The Codepad Belongs To When using Hold Down Function 8 on Solution 880 control panels that have been partitioned the codepad will indicate the area that the codepad belongs to 1 Hold the 8 button down until two beeps are heard 2 A ZONE indicator will illuminate to indicate which area that the codepad belongs to when the system has been partitioned Zone 1 Area 1 Codepad Zone 2 Area 2 Codepad Zone 7 Master Partitioned Codepad No ZONE indicator means that the codepad has incorrect settings or incorrect codepad used 3 Press the LAWAY button to exit this mode Send Test Report
97. 159 1740 Page 151 Cal Back Telephone Number pooooooooooooggg Location 175 O OOO ne Page 152 Ring Count 0 Panel Will Not Answer 14 Answering Machine Bypass 2 1 13 No Of Rings Until Panel Answers 15 Answering Machine Bypass 1 Location 176 Page 153 1 Operate The FAULT Indicator When Telephone Line Fails 2 Sound Speaker Bell amp Strobe When System Is Armed 4 Sound Speaker Bell amp Strobe When System Is Disarmed 8 Reserved Telephone Line Fault Options ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Solution 844 Programming Sheets 275 Location 177 Page 157 H H 1 Dialler Reporting Functions Allowed Dialler Options l 2 Remote Arming Via The Telephone Allowed 4 Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed 8 Use Bell 103 For FSK Format Disabled CCITT V21 e Location 178 Page 158 i H 1 Open Close Reports Only If Previous Alarm Dialler Op tions 2 2 Open Close Reports For STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 4 Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete 8 Extend Time To Wait For Handshake From 30 Seconds To 55 Seconds Location 179 OO Page 159 Dialler Options 3 1 Set DTMF Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit Second 2 Reserved 4 Change Decadic Dialling To 60 40 8 Reserved H H 1 Upload Download Allowed Alarm Link Op tions 2 Call Back Phone Number Required For Upload Download 4 Exit Upload Download Connection On Alarm 8 External Modem Module CC811 Required For Upload Download Location 181 184 Page
98. 2 255 Receiver 1 Handshake Tone seniiti erpii 144 Primary Telephone Numbet 0 cee eeeeeeeees 143 Secondary Telephone Number 0 0 cece 143 Subscriber ID Number 0 0 eee eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 145 Transmission Format eeecescesecsseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 145 Receiver 2 Handshake Tone eeeeceeeceseceecereeeeeeeeeeeeeees 147 Primary Telephone Numbet 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 146 Secondary Telephone Number 0 cece 146 Subscriber ID Number 00 0 eee cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 148 Transmission Format cceeeceeceseceeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 148 Relay Output erea E a eR E EEE 202 Remote Arming Via Telephone ee 124 157 Remote Operation Of Outputs Via Transmitter 83 Remote Radio Transmitter Operations 78 Add or Changing Transmitter Codes 79 102 Arming In AWAY Mode nsee 81 82 Arming In STAY Mode 1 oseese 81 82 Deleting Transmitter Codes 0 0 eee 80 103 Disarming From STAY Mode 1 81 82 Disarming In AWAY Mode 81 82 Horn Speaker Beeps 0 ce eeeeeeeseeceeeceseeeseeeeenaes 78 Operating Outputs 0 eee eee cess cesecnsecneeeeeenes 83 Pame Alarmi eeen e aei 81 82 Strobe Indications eeeseeeseeeeeseereeeersrreresreeresresree 78 Remote Radio User Codes Adding Or Changing eeseeeseeeeseeesreerereererreee 79 102 Deleting renee orr aeae oE ei 80 103 Reporting Format 4 2 Reporting Format e seeseeeeseeesrerrerserrsrreresen 138
99. 2 Reporting Format The 4 2 Express Format will report a Subscriber ID Number followed by an expansion code and the reporting channel number is transmitted directly after the expansion code Subscriber ID Number Expansion Code Channel Number SSSS Table 59 Example Reporting In 4 2 Format New Event 4 2 Report Event 4 2 Report Opening report ssssou CdS Closing Report sssscu_ o PtestReport__ ssss 0 Oo Program Altered ssssro Oo Pures sss Si Table 60 4 2 Reporting Format Code Description Description Alarm Restore Code Trouble Restore Code Bypass Restore Code AC Fail Restore Code 1 Digit AC Fail Restore Code 2 Digit Low Battery Restore Code 1 Digit AC Fail Code 2 Digit Low Battery Code 1 Digit Low Battery Code 2 Digit Panic Code 2 Digit pe esse t S Table 61 4 2 Transmission Code Descriptions A CH T E AC L LB CP U a Ca a ie nd Le il AC Fail Code 1 Digit Low Battery Restore Code 2 Digit Tor ft se Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Dialler Reporting Formats 139 Basic Pager Reporting Format Basic Pager Format requires some interpretation of the numbers that appear on the display however it is possible to differentiate between 1000 different control panels when a number of control panels are reporting to the one pager How To Setup Receiver For Basic Pager Reporting 1 LOCATION 000 015 on page 143 requires the Basi
100. 220 224 User Code 6 User Code 7 User Code 8 o 15 15 15 Location 225 229 Location 230 234 Location 235 239 User Code 9 User Code 10 User Code 11 Location 240 244 Location 245 249 Location 250 254 User Code 12 User Code 13 User Code 14 Location 255 259 Location 260 264 User Code 15 User Code 16 ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited User Codes 165 User Code Priority There are ten different priority levels that can be allocated to the user code Each priority level allows or restricts the functions that different user code holders may perform and can only be changed by the installer poem Once user code priority levels 4 6 12 or 14 have been programmed to any of the i available user codes the method of standard isolating will no longer operate Only those ji user codes with the priority level of 4 6 12 or 14 will be able to isolate zones using the method code to isolate Priority Description Priority Description eport Arm Only B Arm Disarm Master Code Functions Arm Disarm Master Code Functions Arm Disarm Open Close Report Open Close Report Arm Disarm Master Code Functions Code T Arm Disarm Master Code Functions Code T Table 78 User Code Priority Levels Arm and Disarm 0 This priority level allows the user code holder to arm and disarm the system No opening or closing reports will be transmitted when this user code has been used to arm or disarm the system
101. 220 Codepad Lockout Time 220 Siren Run Time 221 Siren Sound Rate 221 Auto Arming Pre Alert Timer 222 Auto Arming Time 222 Auto Disarming Time 223 Kiss Off Wait Time 223 Reserved 223 System Time 225 System Date 226 Setting The Date and Time 226 System and Consumer Options 227 Programming Option Bits 228 System Options 1 229 EDM Smart Lockout Allowed 229 Horn Speaker Monitor 229 Strobe Indications For Radio Arm Disarm 229 Horn Speaker Beeps For Radio Arm Disarm 229 System Options 2 230 Codepad Panic To Be Silent 230 Codepad Fire To Be Silent 230 odepad Medical To Be Silent 230 Access Denied To Be Silent 230 System Options 3 231 AC Fail In 1 Hour Disabled After 2 Minutes 231 Ignore AC Fail 231 Zone Pulse Count Handover 231 Handover Delay To Be Sequential 231 System Options 4 232 Panel To Power Up Disarmed If Power Reset 232 Arm Disarm Tracking On Power Up 232 Internal Crystal To Keep Time 232 Keyswitch Interface Night Arm Station Or REO05 Installed 232 Consumer Options 1 233 Test Reports When Armed 233 Test Report After Siren Reset 233 Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 233 STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status 233 Consumer Options 2 234 Codepad Display Extinguish After 60 Seconds 234 Single Button Arming Allowed AWAY STAY Mode 1 amp 2 234 Single Button Disarming Allowed STAY Mo
102. 343 1 Option Description No Report Required 1 2 Receiver 2 Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails Table 101 Codepad Reporting Options Location This location is factory default to report only to receiver 1 You can select whether the codepad reporting options will report on receiver 1 receiver 2 both receiver 1 and receiver 2 receiver 2 only when receiver 1 fails or no reporting at all System Status Fuse Fail Report LOCATION 344 345 System Status Fuse Fail Restore Report LOCATION 346 347 ISSUE140 1 3 Location Description System Status Fuse Fail Reporting Code Tens Digit System Status Fuse Fail Reporting Code Units Digit Table 102 System Status Fuse Fail Report Locations A system trouble report Contact ID Event Code 300 will be transmitted when either the codepad fuse or the accessories fuse has blown A delay of approximately 10 seconds will be between from when the fuse has blown and when the system will report the event 70 8 Location Description System Status Fuse Fail Restore Reporting Code Units Digit System Status Fuse Fail Restore Reporting Code Tens Digit Table 103 System Status Fuse Fail Restore Report Locations A system trouble restore report Contact ID Event Code 300 will be transmitted when either the codepad fuse or the accessories fuse has been replaced A delay of approximately 10 seconds
103. 38 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual How To Test The Programming Key Using The Hand Held Programmer 1 Before connecting the hand held programmer onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position and that no external key has been plugged onto the hand held programmer Enter the Installer s Programming Mode i e 1 2 3 4 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the hand held programmer will display the data currently programmed in LOCATION 000 Plug the programming key onto the pins marked EXTERNAL KEY on the hand held programmer Enter command 9 5 Q followed by the button Two beeps will be heard after the programming key has successfully been tested If you heard a long beep after issuing this command the programming key has become corrupt and will need to be erased to clear the corrupt data Refer to Command 964 Erase Programming Key on page 42 for more information Before removing the programming key from the hand held programmer enter command 9 6 0 followed by the button to exit the Installer s Programming Mode Two beeps will be heard and the system will now return to the disarmed state Failing to exit Installer s Programming Mode before removing the programming key may result in corrupting the data in the programming key Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 39 Command 960 Exit
104. 39 Command 962 Copy Control Panel Memory To Programming Key 40 Command 963 Copy From Programming Key To Control Panel 41 Command 964 Erase Programming Key 42 Command 965 Set Up Domestic Dialling Format 43 Command 966 Enable Disable Automatic Stepping Of Locations 44 Command 999 Display Panel Type Or Software Version Number 46 Disable Factory Default 47 Defaulting The Control Panel 48 Codepad Indicators 49 CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad 50 Zone Indicators 50 AWAY Indicator 50 STAY Indicator 51 MAINS Indicator 51 FAULT Indicator 51 Audible Indicators 52 CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad 53 Zone Indicators 53 AWAY Indicator 53 STAY Indicator 54 System Disarmed 54 MAINS Indicator 54 Zone Isolating Mode 54 FAULT Indicator 55 Programming Mode 55 Off Indicator Zone Sealed 55 On Indicator Zone In Alarm 55 Audible Indicators 56 CP5 Master Partitioned LED Codepad 57 System Operations Remote Radio Transmitter Operations Area On Off Indicators Area Display Indicators Status Indicators PARTIAL Indicator AUX Indicator MAINS Indicator FAULT Indicator Audible Indicators System Operations Arming The System In AWAY Mode Forced Arming Disarming The System From AWAY Mode Arming The System In STAY Mode 1 Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode Forced Arming Disarming The System From STAY Mode 1 Arming The System In STAY Mode 2 Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode
105. 4 PANEL GREEN i YELLOW 4P4C PLUG Green Internal Phone Line Yellow Internal Phone Line RJ12 PLUG Black Telecom Line Street Red Telecom Line Street REAR VIEW OF TELEPHONE PLATE Figure 22 Telecom Connection Diagrams For Solution 844 862 880 ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Internal Phones Internal Phones Telecom Line T Telecom Line Internal Phones Appendices 266 Appendix A ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Telephone Anti Jamming There are many companies today importing American designed products that claim to have Anti Jamming and believe it or not they push this feature as if it were a major break through in control panel technology Well this in fact is not the case at all as most control panels have some sort of Anti Jamming feature We can go as far back as the early 1980 s where even the 678 diallers incorporated a form of Anti Jamming as a standard programmable option The important thing to note is that as most American designed products are primarily aimed at their local market and telephone networks when they are imported to Australia their anti jamming function does not perform as it should To clear up just what anti jamming is and how it works needs some understanding of Telephone Networks In America either of the two parties i e the one who initiated the call or the one receiving the
106. 70 Code To Isolate sisisi essiens ipsssoen aera ie tieses Test 72 Standard Method 0 ee cee csecseecseeereeeeeeeeeeerees 71 K Keyswitch Zone eenias ooer e ia a oiii 176 OPULONS asraon eenen e eea si E 181 L Latching Outputs Resetting nei nE ESE AA 121 Lockout Dialler s iire 179 260 Lockout Sirens ecaa ai 179 260 Low Battery nacinane nnii i n 74 REpOrts seeds din Reel S RE NE 196 Restore Report eee eeceseceeecesecssecseecaeeeseeees 196 M MAINS Indicator eee eee eeeeeee eee 51 54 59 240 Master Code nonnene ieee enr eresi ia es 260 Master Code Function Arm Disarm Both Areas At Same Time 99 Changing amp Deleting Remote Radio Codes 102 Changing amp Deleting User Codes ee 100 Changing Domestic Telephone Numbers 104 Event Memory Recall 0 eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 116 Setting Date and Time eee eeeeeeeeeeeees 114 Turning Outputs ON OFF eee eee eneeeeeee 112 Walk Test Mode 3 5cccs s sccsees sspesseves aseeseepenpeeaerieess 115 Master Partitioned Codepad Area Display Indicators ee eee eee eects 58 239 Area On Off Indicators 00 ccccecsccccceceeeeseeees 57 239 Audible Indicators c cccccccccsessssseceeeceeeenseaees 59 241 AUX Inndicatoi ccc eeccccecccccccccecsessnnecececeesenseaees 58 240 FAULT Indicator 0 eee ceeecssecseeereeenes 59 240 MAINS Indicator eee cesecseeseeereeenes 59 240 PARTIAL Indicator eee eee cee cseenee
107. 80 Installation Manual Basic Pager Display Information ISSUE140 Subscriber ID Number This is the identification number of the control panel and is programmed in LOCATION 034 039 on page 145 for Receiver 1 and LOCATION 074 079 on page 148 for Receiver 2 The pocket pager will only display the last three digits of the Subscriber ID Number Zone Status The zone status display shows you the status of each zone 1 8 of the control panel The following table below describes what each number means when displayed on the zone status display of the pocket pager Number Displayed Zone Description Zone Normal This indicates that the corresponding zone is in the sealed state Alarm This indicates that the corresponding zone is unsealed and in alarm condition Zone Bypassed 2 This indicates that a system operator has manually isolated the corresponding zone Refer to Isolating Zones on page 70 for information on how to manually isolate a zone s prior to arming the system Refer to Zone Status Bypass Reports on page 188 for more information Zone Trouble Software Version 1 02 This indicates that a zone was left unsealed after the end of exit time Refer to Zone Status Trouble Reports on page 189 for more information Table 62 Zone Status Display Descriptions System Status The system status information is divided up into 4 digits The first digit of the system status display indicates whether
108. 80 control panels that have been partitioned If you wish to select zones 2 5 and 6 to be automatically isolated when arming in STAY Mode 2 follow the sequence below Meg te 4 aay Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 96 ISSUE140 7 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual How To Disable STAY Mode 2 Zones If at any time you wish to disable all zones selected to be automatically isolated for STAY Mode 2 you may enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 4 and the AWAY button followed by the AWAY button RSTALER CODE 4 wm aww Satellite Siren Service Mode If an EDMSAT is connected to Output 1 this function will allow you to perform service work on the system without triggering the satellite siren The satellite siren will return to its normal working state the next time the system is armed How To Enter Satellite Siren Service Mode 1 Enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 5 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard RSTAERCODE 5 wm Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions EF 97 Turning Telephone Monitor Mode On Off Telephone monitor mode allows the remote codepad to be used for a visual representation of data transmissions between the control panel and the base station receiver The dialling sequence is also shown in this mode The codepad will beep once every two seconds while telephone monitor mode is active
109. AC Fail Restore Report 195 System Status Low Battery Report 196 System Status Low Battery Restore Report 196 System Status Access Denied 197 Code Retries 197 System Status Reporting Options 198 Test Reporting Time 199 Test Reporting Dialler Options 199 Programmable Outputs 201 Outputs 202 Output Defaults 202 Default For Strobe 202 Default For Entry Exit 202 Redirecting Outputs To The Codepad Buzzer 203 Output Event Types 204 Output Polarity 213 Output Not Used 213 Normally Open Going Low 213 Normally Open Pulsing Low 213 Normally Open One Shot Low 213 Normally Open One Shot Low With Retrigger 213 Normally Open One Shot Low With Reset 213 Normally Open One Shot Low With Alarm 214 Normally Open Latching Low 214 Normally Low Going Open 214 Normally Low Pulsing Open 214 Normally Low One Shot Open 214 Normally Low One Shot Open With Retrigger 214 Normally Low One Shot Open With Reset 214 Normally Low One Shot Open With Alarm 214 Normally Low Latching Open 214 Timing Of Outputs 215 Pulsing Polarities 215 One Shot Polarities 216 System Event Timers 217 System Event Timers 218 Programming Entry Exit Timers 218 Entry Timer 1 218 Entry Timer 2 218 Exit Time 219 Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode 219 Delay Alarm Reporting Time 219 Sensor Watch Time
110. AY Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Operations 65 Method Two How To Arm The System In STAY Mode 1 1 Hold down the stay button until two beeps are heard The STAY indicator will illuminate and exit time will now commence Any zones that have been programmed to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1 will begin to flash until exit time expires At the end of exit time the ZONE indicators will extinguish and the codepad will give one short beep EF If a zone is not sealed at the end of exit time the zone will be automatically isolated and will be constantly illuminated on the remote codepad The zone will become an active part of the system again as soon as it has resealed i e If a window is left open after exit time has expired the window will not be an active part of the system until it has closed Opening the window after exit time has expired will cause an alarm condition Forced Arming The feature of arming the system when a zone is not sealed is known as forced arming Refer to Zone Options 2 on page 183 to enable forced arming for each zone If the STAY indicator does not illuminate and a long beep is heard when attempting to arm the system in STAY Mode 1 forced arming is not permitted If this is the case you must ensure that all zones are sealed or manually isolated before you can arm the system Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 66 d Method One F
111. Alarms STAY Mode and AWAY Mode Operation Upload Download Programmable Dynamic Battery Testing Entry and Exit Warning Beeper Remote Arming Answering Machine Bypass AC Fail and System Fault Indicators Monitored Siren Output Strobe Output Relay Output Separate Fire Alarm Sound EDMSAT Satellite Siren Compatible Zone Lockout Sensor Watch Day Alarm Event Memory Recall Walk Test Mode Delayed Reporting ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited 862 security system uses the very latest in microprocessor technology to provide you with more useful features and superior reliability and performance Introduction Solution 880 Features The Solution Following is a list of the main features that the control panel will provide gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Eight Programmable User Codes 1 8 21 880 security system uses the very latest in microprocessor technology to provide you with more useful features and superior reliability and performance Eight Variable User Codes Radio Remote Programmable User Codes 9 16 Eight Programmable Burglary Zones Partitionable To Two Separate Areas Dual Reporting On Board Line Fault Module Telco Arming Disarming Sequence Automatic Arming Automatic Disarming Codepad Duress Panic Fire Medical Alarms STAY Mode and AWAY M
112. An Instant zone Contact ID Event Code 130 will sound the sirens and operate the dialler as soon as it registers as unsealed after the exit timer has expired If an Instant zone has not restored at the time the system is disarmed a zone restore report will be automatically sent to the receiving party Handover Zone A Handover zone Contact ID Event Code 130 will act as an instant zone if it has been triggered by itself If a handover zone has triggered after a delay zone the remaining delay time will handover from the delay zone to the handover zone Handover may be sequential or non sequential The control panel is factory default with sequential handover Refer to Option 8 in LOCATION 426 on page 231 if you require handover to be non sequential If a Handover zone has not restored at the time the system is disarmed a zone restore report will be automatically sent to the receiving party Delay 1 Zone A Delay 1 zone Contact ID Event Code 130 will have a delay time determined by the value in Entry Timer 1 on page 218 After entry time has expired the system will activate into alarm condition If a Delay 1 zone has not restored at the time the system is disarmed a zone restore report will be automatically sent to the receiving party Delay 2 Zone A Delay 2 zone Contact ID Event Code 130 will have a delay time determined by the value in Entry Timer 2 on page 218 After entry time has expired the system will activate into alarm
113. Areas At The Same Time on page 99 and 117 for more information If the user arms both areas at the same time if in LOCATION 432 on page 243 has the option First To Open Last To Close Reporting enabled only a closing report for the Area 2 will be reported If the user disarms both areas at the same time if in LOCATION 432 on page 243 has the option First To Open Last To Close Reporting enabled only an opening report for Area 1 will be reported Reserved Reserved ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Partitioning 245 Zone Allocations Each area can have up to eight zones allocated to it The eight locations for each area represents ZONE indicators one to eight on the remote area addressable codepad Any of the zone inputs 1 8 can be mapped to any area to appear as any zone on the remote area addressable codepad i e Any zone can be programmed to both Area and Area 2 to become common zones Zones that have been programmed as common zones e g Allocated to both Area 1 and Area 2 will report to the base station receiver on group zero i e Area Group and Area 2 Group 2 Zones that are allocated only to one area will report on the corresponding group number Common zones that are programmed other than 24 hour zone types will not activate an alarm until both areas have been armed in either AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 Zone Allocations For Area 1 LOCATION 434 441 00000000
114. Arm Disarm Sequence 90 Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones 95 Satellite Siren Service Mode 96 Turning Telephone Monitor Mode On Off 97 Walk Test Mode 97 Event Memory Recall Mode 98 Reserved 98 Master Code Functions 99 Arm or Disarm Both Areas At The Same Time 99 Changing and Deleting User Codes 100 Changing and Deleting Remote Radio User Codes 102 Changing Domestic Phone Numbers 104 Change Telco Arm Disarm Sequence 106 Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones 111 Turning Outputs On Off 112 Setting The Date and Time 114 Walk Test Mode 115 Event Memory Recall Mode 116 Reserved 116 User Code Functions 117 Arm or Disarm Both Areas At The Same Time 117 Hold Down Functions 118 Arm The System In AWAY Mode 118 Arm The System In STAY Mode 1 118 Arm The System In STAY Mode 2 119 Horn Speaker Test 119 Bell Test 119 Strobe Test 119 Turning Day Alarm On and Off 120 Fault Analysis Mode 120 Initiate A Modem Call 121 Reset Latching Outputs 121 Codepad Buzzer Tone Change 122 Send Test Report 122 Remote System 123 Operations Via Telephone 123 Remote Arming Via The Telephone 124 Alarm Link Operations 125 Alarm Link Software 126 Remote Connect 126 Remote Connect With Customer Control 126 Remote Connect Without Call Back Verification 127 Remote Connect With Call Back Verification 127 Direct Connect 128 Alarm Link Options 129 Enable Upload Download Via Alarm Link 129 Enable Alarm Link Call Back 129 Terminate Alarm Link Connection On Alarm 129 Use External Modem Modu
115. Bell 103 For FSK Format Disabled CCITT V21 Table 73 Example Programming Option Bits ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Dialler Options 157 Dialler Options 1 LOCATION 177 9 Option Description Dialler Reporting Functions Allowed Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed Use Bell 103 For FSK Format Disabled CCITT V21 Table 74 Dialler Options 1 i Remote Arming Via The Telephone Allowed Dialler Reporting Functions Allowed 1 If this option has been selected the dialler will function for all operations Upload Download via Alarm Link Software CC816 and telephone remote arming will remain operational regardless of this setting Disabled Disable All Dialler Reporting Functions If this option is not selected the communication dialler will not operate Upload Download via Alarm Link Software CC816 and telephone remote arming will remain operational regardless of this setting Remote Arming Via The Telephone Allowed 2 If this option has been selected you can remotely arm the system via a standard telephone using the Phone Controller CC911 or by pressing the button on your touch tone telephone Refer to Remote Arming Via The Telephone on page 124 for more information Forced arming is automatically assumed when this feature is being used Refer to Zone Options 2 on page 183 for more information on forced arming Whether remote functions have been enabled or disabled this will
116. Contact your telecommunications provider for more information on call forward operations Digit Required Number To Program Digit Required Number To Program 10 Refer To Digit O 1 Table 38 Telco Arm Disarm Dialling Digits Zone I Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8 MAINS Digit Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Table 39 Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 91 How To Program Telco Arming Sequence Easy Call Forward No Answer On 1 Enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 3 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Press button followed by the away button to change the telco arming sequence Three beeps will be heard If a previous call forwarding sequence has already been programmed the sequence will be displayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators Refer to Table 39 Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence on page 90 for the indicators and their meanings If there is no call forward sequence programmed a further two beeps will be heard after entering this mode These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the call forward sequence has been displayed 3 Enter stay 6 1 followed by the you wish the control panel to divert all call
117. Disarming soc fsc ssccsscescsssgtaacaetesastesdesasstedseesetsastesssubensces 66 STAY Mode Z escsssessentstiesistesessettacesstvtsrescesdfasttevacss 261 ATMS ESE 67 119 Dis rmiN g 323s eesscsscessessfeakgp sasasces ea ipsis a oeii 68 Setting ZONES en e a 95 111 Strobe Outputs sii elie E ER NRE 202 Strobe Tests sis thee Gel ie eA R EA 119 Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1 0 0 0 145 Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2 0 00 cee 148 Swinger Shutdown Count Bor Dialler ii5 3s nie ee Mees 186 FOE SiON s 205 555 sey tio ath ee E R ee 185 system Date e icc uti Mehl alien 225 System Disarmed Indicator 0 0 eee eee eeeecseeneeereeees 54 System Operations sssesseeeesseeseeesrsreesrsreeresrrersserressrsreee 62 Arming In AWAY Mode seeseeeeseeerereereerreresee 62 Arming In STAY Mode 1 oseese 64 Arming In STAY Mode 2 sseeseseeseeersereereerrrrersre 67 Disarming From AWAY Mode cece eeeeeeeeeee 63 Disarming From STAY Mode 1 0 0 0 66 Disarming From STAY Mode 2 0 eeeeeeeeeee 68 System Options 1 oe eee cee cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseensees 229 EDM Smart Lockout eee cece ceseceee cess eeeeees 229 Monitoring Of Horn Speaker 0 eee eee 229 System Options 2 eee ee ee eeseceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeensees 230 Access Denied To Be Silent eee eeeeeee 230 Codepad Fire To Be Silent eee cere 230 Codepad Medical To Be Silent 0 0 eee 230 Codepad Panic To Be Silent ee eee cere 230 System Options 35 ecc asain cies sees tele iee
118. EXT position and that no external key has been plugged onto the hand held programmer Enter Installer s Programming Mode i e 1 2 34 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the hand held programmer will display the data currently programmed in LOCATION 000 Plug the programming key onto the pins marked EXTERNAL KEY on the hand held programmer Enter command 9 6 4 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard after the programming keys data has been deleted Before removing the programming key from the hand held programmer enter command 9 6 0 followed by the button to exit Installer s Programming Mode Two beeps will be heard and the system will now return to the disarmed state Failing to exit Installer s Programming Mode before removing the programming key may result in corrupting the programming key Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 43 Command 965 Set Up Domestic Dialling Format Command 965 has been included to allow the set up of the domestic dialling format a one step operation Refer to page 132 for more information on Domestic Dialling Format After you enter Installer s Programming Mode enter command 96 5 followed by the button The command will automatically set Receiver 1 to domestic reporting and set the following locations only for Receiver 2 No other locations will be changed when command 965 has been issued All domestic telephone numbers are stored in
119. Ei 50 53 57 238 Isolating Code To Isolate ee eee ese eeeeeee 72 Isolating Standard eee eeceseceseceecesecseeeeeens 71 Isolating Allowed seeeseeesseeeeseseresrssererssesrresesre 183 Operating Information sseesseeesseeseeesesreerrssesrreresee 173 Options T oeiee e ines 173 179 Options 2 2 0 kent inna 173 Programming issie ese enoeet 173 Puls Count 5 eee ee n as 173 177 Pulse Count Handover cceccessesccceeeeeenees 177 231 Pulse Count Time c ccccccccecsessseceeeeeenees 173 178 Report Code ss iin cise tites sn scscercsgpeeicuen salen Seaseseveees 173 Reporting Information eee ee eeeeeeeee 173 184 Restore Code site sive ae aE ERE EE 190 Restore Rep rt soerieesseeene sne eeri 183 Stats Moderen i peee e Ee EAE ESEA 36 Trouble seien anei e e a a oa 189 Type Sra E E EEEk 25 173 175 ZONE BYPASS erei eieiei eee e eors 188 Zone Options 1 Delay Alarm Reporting sseeseeeesereeresrrrrerrererrrereere 179 Lockout Siren amp Dialler oo ee ceeeceeeneeceeeeeeneeee 179 SENSOL Wate herie are kenta i 180 Silent Alarni aesaet eae a ei as 180 Zone Options 2 Forced Arming sssse cspecceeesacesnssedeedhceuectonsssteotnecbep 183 Isolate In STAY Mode 1 0 0 eee ceeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeees 183 ISSUE140 310 Zone Isolation Allowed ceesceeeeeseneeceeeeeeneeeeee Zone Restore Report sceeeceesseceeeeeeseceeeeeesneeeeee Zone Reporting Information Dialer Options isir
120. Event Timers 219 LOCATION 402 403 Defaulted To 60 Seconds 3 Location Description Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Table 118 Exit Time Locations Exit time can be programmed between 0 and 255 seconds in increments of one second When arming the system in AWAY Mode the remote codepad will beep during exit time until the remaining 10 seconds where the codepad will give you one continuous beep to inform you that the end of exit time is approaching The remote codepad will always give one short beep at the end of exit time when arming in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode LOCATION 404 405 Defaulted To 00 Seconds 0 0 Location Description Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Table 119 Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode Locations Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode is the delay time used for ALL zones except 24 hour burglary and 24 hour fire zones when the system is armed in STAY Mode or STAY Mode 2 Each zone including delay zones will have the entry delay as programmed in LOCATION 404 405 i e The entry guard timer will override the delay time programmed for a delay zone If the entry guard timer has been programmed as 0 each zone will act as per its programmed zone type Delay Alarm Reporting Time LOCATION 406 407 Defaulted To 00 Seconds 0 0 Location Description Increments
121. Hz 2300 Hz Low Speed Sescoa Location 033 Transmission Format For Receiver 1 1 Contact ID 2 4 2 Express 3 FSK 300 Baud 4 Domestic Location 034 039 Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1 Location 040 055 Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 Page 144 4 No Handshake Required 5 Pager Page 145 5 Basic Pager 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 8 Reserved Page 145 Page 145 Location 056 071 Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 Page 146 Location 072 Page 148 H n sh ke Tone For Receiver 2 1 HI LO Handshake Contact ID 4 No Handshake Required andsha 2 1400 Hz TX 1900 Hz 5 Pager 3 2300 Hz Low Speed Sescoa Location 073 ye oe ea gy ee gee em ontdere pe ae gt tee Myo Sete Vy og Page 148 Transmission Format For Receiver 2 1 Contact ID 5 Basic Pager 2 4 2 Express 6 Reserved 3 FSK 300 Baud 7 Reserved 4 Domestic 8 Reserved Location 074 079 Page 148 Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2 folo olojolo Location 0800 Page 149 iol li 1 Australian DTMF 5 Digits Second 4 International DTMF Dialling Format 2 Australian Decadic 5 Reversed Decadic 3 Alternate DTMF amp Decadic AUST 6 Alternate DTMF amp Reversed Decadic PEC Mert idee Breather a reg te tye A EEA E oye gee age arnt ha Cede my ALN NG Wee Gl Page 149 Reserved Location 113 142 Page 150 Telco Arming Sequence Location 143 158 Page 151 Taleo Disarming Soe ooooooooooooodig Location
122. ISSUE140 35 36 37 38 45 46 47 49 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Mimic Zone 1 3 9 Mimic Zone 5 Mimic Zone 2 3 Mimic Zone 6 Mimic Zone 3 3 Mimic Zone 7 Mimic Zone 4 3 Mimic Zone 8 These output types will mimic the zone inputs The output will operate when the zone is unsealed and will reset when the zone has resealed They will operate regardless of the zone type chosen i e A zone Not Used can still operate a mimic output This feature operates when the system is armed or disarmed Global Chime This output will operate when any zones programmed as Chime have triggered The output will reset when the zone has resealed Refer to Zone Type on page 173 for more information Zone Not Sealed This output will operate whenever a burglary zone is unsealed Chime zones will not operate this output event type Zone Not Sealed After Exit Time This output will operate at the end of exit time if a burglary zone is unsealed The output will reset when all zones are sealed or the system has been disarmed Chime zones will not operate this output event type AC Mains 60 Hz Or 50 Hz This output will activate when the AC mains supply frequency is at 60 Hz The output will reset once the AC mains supply has returned to 50 Hz Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs 211 The following output event types are only applicable to the Solution 880 control panel when partitioned 4 o
123. ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual STAY Indicator The STAY indicator is used to display that the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 The STAY indicator will also flash in unison with the AWAY indicator when Installer s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions are used The indicator will also illuminate when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 For the different methods of arming the system in STAY Mode 1 refer to page 64 Refer to Zone Options 1 on page 173 for information on setting zones to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1 For the method of arming the system in STAY Mode 2 refer to page 67 Refer to Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 95 when using the Installer Code or Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 111 when using the Master Code Indicator Definition one System Is Armed In STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 Off System Is Not Armed In STAY Mode Flashing Zone Isolating Mode Or Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones Table 18 STAY Indicator System Disarmed This indicator will illuminate with the indicator when the system has been disarmed MAINS Indicator The MAINS indicator is used to display that the systems AC mains supply is normal or has failed When programming numbers i e Installer s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions the MAINS indicator will illuminate when you program numbers between 10 and 15 The MAINS indicator represents digit 10 plus the value of the
124. If you require to isolate a zone s prior to arming the system in AWAY Mode refer to Isolating Zones on page 70 Single button arming in AWAY Mode will report as user code number 16 How To Arm The System In AWAY Mode 1 Enter your followed by the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard and the AWAY indicator will illuminate Exit time will now commence CODE AWAY How To Arm The System In AWAY Mode 1 Hold down the Away button until two beeps are heard The AWAY indicator will illuminate and exit time will now commence Refer to Option 2 in LOCATION 429 on page 234 to enable single button arming in AWAY Mode If a zone is not sealed at the end of exit time the zone will be automatically isolated and will be constantly illuminated on the remote codepad The zone will become an active part of the system again as soon as it has resealed i e If a window is left open after exit time has expired the window will not be an active part of the system until it has closed Opening the window after exit time has expired will cause an alarm condition away Forced Arming The feature of arming the system when a zone is not sealed is known as forced arming Refer to Zone Options 2 on page 183 to enable forced arming for each zone If the AWAY indicator does not illuminate and a long beep is heard when attempting to arm the system in AWAY Mode forced arming is not permitted If this is the case you must ensure that all zones
125. J 5 2 56 5 k4 5 Gs Area 1 Has Zone Unsealed 4 Area 2 Has Zone Unsealed These two outputs will operate when a zone in their corresponding area has registered as unsealed when the area is either armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode or the area is disarmed Example Zone is allocated to Area 1 If Zone 1 becomes unsealed Output Event Type 4 10 will operate The output will reset once the zone has resealed Area 1 In Alarm 5 3 Area 2 In Alarm These two outputs will operate when a zone in their corresponding area has registered an alarm These outputs will reset once a valid user code has been entered Example Zone 1 has been allocated to Area 1 If Zone 1 has registered an alarm Output Event Type 5 2 will operate The output will reset once a valid user code allocated to operate Area 1 has been entered Area 1 Is Armed 5 7 Area 2 Is Armed These two outputs will operate when their corresponding area has been armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 The output will reset once the corresponding area is disarmed Example If area 1 has been armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 Output Event Type 5 6 will operate The output will reset once Area is disarmed Area 1 Is Disarmed 5 a Area 2 Is Disarmed These two outputs will operate when their corresponding area has been disarmed The output will reset once the corresponding area is armed Example If Area 1 has been disarmed Output Event Type 5 10 will operate The output will reset
126. K6 Zones and Two 24 Hour Zones 15 8 6K8 Location 267 3220 Page 173 Zones Zone 3 Location 281 287 pogoni Zone 6 Location 302 308 ofoofo fiaa fi Zone Location 267 273 z lojojn fraji jr Zone4 Location 288 294 pogori Zone 7 Location 309 315 tajo fo fa fraji ja E I UW E e Zone2 Location 274 280 afojofa fraja Zone 5 Location 295 301 ofojofa fraja a Zone 8 Location 316 322 pogocig Zone Zone Pulse Zone Pulse Zone Zone Report Dialler Type Count Count Time Option 1 Option 2 Code Options Zone Types There are fifteen different zone types to choose from Each zone contains eight locations Zones 1 to 6 are fully programmable whereas zones 7 and 8 may only be programmed to any 24 hour zone type Zone Type Description Zone Type Description tnstant 824 Hour Hold Up 1 Handover 24 Hour Tamper 3 Delay 2 Ta Keyswitch _ _ _ _ _ pa e E raglan Reserved 24 Hour Fire 24 Hour Medical n Chime Only Table 164 Available Zone Types ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Solution 862 Programming Sheets 287 Zone Pulse Count Settings The pulse count settings for each zone can be programmed between 0 15 Zone Pulse Count Time Zone pulse count time is the time frame or period over which the number of pulses must register 20 ms Loop Response Time 150 ms Loop Response Time Zone Pulse Count Time Zone Pulse Count Time Po O
127. LT indicator will remain illuminated and the codepad will cease its once a minute beep Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 74 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Fault Descriptions Low Battery A low battery fault will register when the battery supply voltage falls below 10 5 volts or when a dynamic battery test detects a low capacity battery This fault will clear after a successful dynamic battery test A dynamic battery test is performed every four hours once power has been connected to the control panel and also every time the system is armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 When reporting to the base station receiver the control panel will report a Battery Test Failure report Contact ID Event Code 309 to indicate the low battery fault condition Date and Time The date and time fault will register every time the control panel has been powered down This type of fault will not cause the FAULT indicator on the codepad to flash unless the Auto Arming Time on page 222 has been programmed otherwise the date and time fault will only be indicated when entering fault analysis mode This fault will clear once the date and time has been programmed Refer to Setting The Date and Time on page 114 for further information on setting the date and time Sensor Watch A sensor watch fault will register because one of the detection devices has stopped working or has failed to detect movem
128. Limited ISSUE140 32 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual To exit the Installer s Programming Mode enter command 9 60 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state Refer to Installer s Programming Commands on page 35 for further information on commands that can be performed during access of the Installer s Programming Mode When using the hand held programmer any reference in this manual made to the stay button should be considered as the button and the wa button considered as the button Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 33 Programming With The Programming Key The Programming Key CC891 is a unique device that will allow you to store or copy programming information from your control panel Once the programming key has information stored in the microprocessor the programming key may be used to easily program other existing Solut ion 844 862 880 control panels with the same programming data or be alternatively used for back up purposes of existing information Connecting a programming key which has been pre programmed directly onto the control panel in the disarmed state will automatically initiate a data transfer from the programming key to the control panel memory If you have a new programming key you should first enter the Installer s Programming Mode and program the system as required before connecting the pro
129. Location 401 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location 402 403 Exit Time Location 402 Location 403 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location 404 405 Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode Location 404 Location 405 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location 406 407 Delay Alarm Reporting Time Location 406 Location 407 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location 408 409 Sensor Watch Time Location 408 Location 409 Increments Of Days Tens Digit Increments Of Days Units Digit Location 410 Codepad Lockout Time Location 411 Siren Run Time Location 412 Siren Sound Rate Slow lt Sound gt Fast Location 413 Auto Arming Pre Alert Time Location 414 417 Auto Arming Time Location 414 Location 415 Location 416 Location 417 Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Hour Of The Day Units Digit Minute Of The Day Tens Digit Minute Of The Day Units Digit Location 418 421 Auto Disarming Time Location 418 Location 419 Location 420 Location 421 Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Hour Of The Day Units Digit Minute Of The Day Tens Digit Minute Of The Day Units Digit Location 422 Kiss Off Wait Time Location 422 Increments Of 500 ms 500 ms 8 Sec s Le Location 423 Re
130. Mode Tororo inier 64 118 In STAY Mode 2 oo c cics nce aiid ie cestens 67 119 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Single Button Operation eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 234 Via Telephone i coc 0 cesses eion eers 124 157 Audible Indicators cccccccccccessesseseeeeees 52 56 59 241 Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 wo eeeeseeeeeees 233 Auto Arming Pre Alert Timer ceeceeseeesseceeeeees 222 Auto Arming Time eee ceeeeesseceeneeceeeceeeeeeenaeeeeeeees 222 Auto Disarming Time 0 eee eee cesecsseceeeeneeeneeees 223 Automatic Stepping Of Locations eee 44 AUX Indicator repara arhe 58 240 AWAY Indicator ccccccccccccecceesssseceeececeesenseeeeeeees 50 53 AWAY Modes ies ienr aen yii 259 ATTOING sk aE CEET E eee 62 118 Disarming eiiie oe aede seen scthestasctebscesededstesssabapssteses 63 AWAY ODF se ssscsscesces fesishigestesle kivtsnssoelsteee EER 259 B Basic Pageri icc iscsi nae o ata EE 139 Basic Pager Reporting eee eeceecesecesecesecneeeeeeees 139 Battery Testigosnin antenni 259 Bell Testenn eek AM AS ee A 119 Bypass Reports cece eeeeecceeeceseceseceseeceeeseseeeeeeeees 188 C Call Back Telephone Number eee eeeeeeeees 151 Cellular Dialers sssini is 254 Code RES 5 sneis serako ias ieni 197 Cod pad sss bai ee E E E ee 259 BUZZ i i 3 23 A E ae 202 Buzzer Tone Change 0 eeeeceecesecereeeeseeeeeeeees 122 Connections When Partitioning 0 0 eee 249 CP5 Eight Zone Are
131. OCATION 040 055 2 183J96721 5500000 Digit Required Number To Program Digit Required Number To Program End Of Number 4 Second Pause Table 63 Dialling Digits Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Dialler Information 143 LOCATION 000 015 0000000000000000 When the control panel needs to transmit a report the control panel will dial this number in an attempt to contact the monitoring station or pager etc If the call is successful the relevant information will be transmitted and the dialler will return back to the stand by mode If unsuccessful the dialler will attempt two more times using the primary telephone number for receiver 1 after which the secondary telephone number for receiver will be called three times If the dialling sequence is still unsuccessful the control panel will then attempt to repeat this procedure dialling the primary telephone number and the secondary telephone number for receiver 2 if programmed This procedure will be repeated only once again i e Maximum of 12 call attempts per alarm after ten minutes if none of the first 6 attempts were successful if only the primary telephone number and secondary telephone number for receiver has been programmed If the primary telephone number and secondary telephone numbers for both receiver and receiver 2 have been programmed a maximum of 24 call attempts per alarm will be made Contact your monitoring station or pager company for th
132. On time by choosing a decimal number between 00 and 99 If an output is required to operate for 200 ms every five seconds program the time settings as follows On Time Off Time ON Time OFF Time Increments Tolerance 200 ms 19 8 ms 200 ms Min 99 Min Table 114 Pulsing Time Settings Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 216 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual One Shot Polarities The duration or On time of an output is determined by the product of the time base and the multiplier If an output is required to operate for five seconds program the time settings as follows Al EE Time Base Multiplier The On time is calculated by multiplying the time base setting 1 second by the multiplier value 05 i e 1 x 05 5 seconds On Time Increments Tolerance 200 ms 19 8 Sec s 200 ms Min 99 Min Table 115 One Shot Time Settings Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Event Timers 218 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual System Event Timers This section covers the features that involve timing Features such as entry and exit times sensor watch time siren run time and system date and time along with a host of other timers are discussed extensively in this section Programming Entry Exit Timers There are two locations to be programmed for Entry Timer 1 Entry Timer 2 Exit Time For AWAY Mode and Entry Guar
133. STAY Mode 1 If this option is not selected when the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1 the zone will activate an alarm when triggered as it normally would in AWAY Mode Refer to Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode on page 219 if you wish to program a global entry time for ALL zones except for 24 hour zone types when armed in STAY Mode 1 i e The entry guard timer will override the delay time programmed for a delay zone If the entry guard timer has been programmed as 0 each zone will act as per its programmed zone type Refer to Arming The System In STAY Mode 1 on page 64 for more information Zone Isolation Allowed If this option has been selected it will allow the system user to isolate the zone before arming the system If this option is not selected the zone can not be manually isolated When a zone has been manually isolated a zone bypass report Contact ID Event Code 570 will be sent Refer to Isolating Zones on page 70 for more information When isolating 24 hour zone types the 24 hour zone will automatically send a zone bypass report at the time the zone is selected to be isolated All non 24 hour zone types will only send a bypass report at the time the system is armed If you require the system not to report zone bypass reports program LOCATION 325 326 on page 188 as zeros Forced Arming Allowed If this option has been selected it will allow the system to be armed with the zone unsealed If this option is no
134. TAY ZONE NUMBER STAY away As each zone is selected to be isolated the corresponding ZONE indicator will begin E to flash If a mistake is made press the zone number that was incorrectly entered followed by the button This zone is now no longer selected to be isolated and the ZONE indicator will extinguish Example If you wish to manually isolate zones 1 3 and 4 the following sequence would be entered below E Sw J 1 ea 44 STAY AWAY Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 72 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Code To Isolate The method of code to isolate restricts only those user codes that have the priority level Code To Isolate set to be able to isolate zones Therefore if any user code has this priority level set the method of standard isolating will be disabled 1 Press the LSIAYJ button Enter your Cone Press the button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will begin to flash If you attempt to enter isolating mode with a user code that has not been allocated for code to isolate the system will ignore the attempt to enter the mode Enter the ZONE NUMBER required to be isolated followed by the Ta button The zone you have just selected to be isolated will now begin to flash 24 hour zones will automatically isolate as soon as the button has been pressed All other burglary zones will automatically
135. This output operates during exit time when the system has been armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 The output will reset once exit time has expired Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs 08 09 0 C2 0 E O Laj 205 Exit Warning Finished This output operates when the exit time has expired when the system has been armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 The output will reset when the system has been disarmed Kiss Off After Exit Time This output will operate after the first successful transmission to the base station receiver when exit time has expired The output will reset when the system has been disarmed Entry Warning This output will operate when either Entry Timer 1 Entry Timer 2 or Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode are operating The output will reset when the entry time expires Entry Warning Day Alarm Resetting This output combines both Entry Warning and Day Alarm Resetting so that either of these two events will activate the output If the output has been triggered by either Entry Timer 1 Entry Timer 2 or Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode the output will reset once the entry timer has expired or the system has been disarmed If a zone programmed for day alarm has triggered during the disarmed state the output will reset when the zone has resealed Day alarm may be turned on and off by holding down the 4 button Refer to Day Alarm Zones on page 168 for
136. To 55 Seconds TLocation 179 Oa Page 159 Dialler Options 3 5 Seca Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit Second 4 Change Decadic Dialling To 60 40 8 Reserved Alarm Link Options 1 Upload Download Allowed a p 2 Call Back Phone Number Required For Upload Download 4 Exit Upload Download Connection On Alarm 8 External Modem Module CC811 Required For Upload Download Location 181 184 Page 162 Installer Code fi 2 3 4 Location 185 264 EEE Page 163 User Codes Location 185 189 Location 190 194 User Code 1 f2 5 80 User Code 2 Location 195 199 Location 200 204 Location 205 209 User Code 3 User Code 4 User Code 5 Location 210 214 Location 215 219 Location 220 224 User Code 6 User Code 7 User Code 8 o 15 15 15 Location 225 229 Location 230 234 Location 235 239 User Code 9 User Code 10 User Code 11 Location 240 244 Location 245 249 Location 250 254 User Code 12 User Code 13 User Code 14 Location 255 259 Location 260 264 User Code 15 User Code 16 isisisi o User Code Priority Priority Description Priority Description eport Arm Only Os Arm Disarm Master Code Functions Arm Di Master Code Functi eee ee Open Close Report Arm Di Master Code Functi Code T Arm Di Master Code Functi Code T Table 170 User Code Priority Levels Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 296 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Location 265 Page 168 Day Alarm Zones 1 Zone 1 4
137. To The Programming Key 1 Enter Installer s Programming Mode i e 1 2 3 4 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash on the remote codepad to indicate that you have entered Installer s Programming Mode You will also notice that the remote codepad will display the data currently programmed in LOCATION 000 Plug the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the control panel found at the top of the PCB printed circuit board next to the Auxiliary Module socket Enter command 9 6 2 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard after the control panel memory has successfully been copied into the programming key If you heard a long beep after issuing this command the programming key has become corrupt and will need to be erased to clear the corrupt data Refer to Command 964 Erase Programming Key on page 42 for more information Before removing the programming key from the control panel enter command 9 6 Q followed by the button to exit Installer s Programming Mode The STAY and AWAY indicators will now extinguish on the remote codepad to indicate that the system has returned to the disarmed state Failing to exit Installer s Programming Mode before removing the programming key may result in corrupting the programming key How To Copy The Panel Memory To Programming Key Using The Hand Held Programmer 1 Before connecting the hand held pro
138. Zone pulse count handover will only operate with zone pulse count time options 8 15 Refer to Zone Pulse Count Time on page 178 for more information Any zone that registers one trigger pulse will automatically increment any other zone pulse count that has already registered at least one trigger pulse during its respective time To enable this option refer to Option 4 in LOCATION 426 on page 231 24 Hour zones do not receive any handover pulses from other zones 24 Hour zones may handover pulses to other zones Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 178 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Zone Pulse Count Time Zone pulse count time is the time frame or period over which the programmed number of pulses must register before an alarm condition is generated 20 ms Loop Response Time 150 ms Loop Response Time Option Pulse Count Time Option Pulse Count Time oo 0 5 Seconds Se 20 Seconds 1 Second 9 30 Seconds 40 Seconds a S seconds Seconds e to seconds ts 120 Secon Table 84 Zone Pulse Count Times For zone pulse count time options 0 7 have a zone loop response time of 20 ms For zone pulse count time options 8 15 have a zone loop response time of 150 ms Loop response time is the length of time a zone must be unsealed before it can register as a valid pulse Inertia sensors should use options 0 7 while PIR detectors should use options 8 15 Diii i 24 Hour zone
139. a Addressable Codepad 253 CP5 Master Partitioned 0 eee eee ese eseeereeee eee 253 Determine Area snenie arere r s 122 DIP Switches sts sch ts e E hasan 248 Codepad Duress 0 00 0 ee eeeeceesceeeecssecsseeseeeseeenes 69 192 Codepad Duress Report ceeceseeesecsseceeeereeeeeeees 192 Codepad Extinguish Mode eee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 234 Codepad Fire nueini onetsia ren eSa 69 193 230 Codepad Fire Report ssssseseeesseesesreessssrsreerrsreerrsenees 193 Codepad Fire To Be Silent eee eee eeeeeeeeeeees 230 Codepad Indicators Area Display scresssiser eriin noeros 58 239 Area ON Off si cess hosts ig tee eeror 57 239 Audible iiss eerie eel ete a eee 52 56 59 241 AUX asia tea aici GRA a i atest 58 240 AWAY scien dais Aes Gimeno ae 50 53 FAULT 3 son c iete aed ae 51 55 59 240 MAINS ica d ret oa 51 54 59 240 OFF Indicator Zone Sealed 0 eee eee cee eeeeeeee 55 ON Indicator Zone In Alarm 55 PAR TTA orreee o eaea Ea TET ERE 58 239 Programming Mode sssesseeeseeseeerrsreerrsrrereerrsrrerseen 55 STAY ee na eana a n ia 51 54 System Disarmed cseesseceeeceeseeesenseensesseesees 54 ZONE o pr paee a EE E 50 53 57 238 Zone Isolating Mode eee eee cee eeeecseeeeeeeeeeees 54 Codepad Lockout Time seseeeseeeeeseeersereereerrsreeresrrns 220 Codepad Medical esscceseceseseecsseeeeneeeees 69 193 230 Codepad Medical Report ee ee eseesecesecereeeeeees 193 Codepad Med
140. age 151 eke Diserang Soon poogogg00000000u0o Location 159 174 Page 151 Cal Back Telephone Number poooooooooo000000 Heard ye seed rut aeey kumar eg eg yng tes E eRe ens Fe gree ds nih tagien gar ge rete ra eee de ego Page 152 Ring Count 0 Panel Will Not Answer 14 Answering Machine Bypass 2 8 1 13 No Of Rings Until Panel Answers 15 Answering Machine Bypass 1 Location 1760 Page 153 1 Display FAULT Indicator When Telephone Line Fails 2 Sound Alarm When System Is Armed 4 Sound Alarm When System Is Disarmed 8 Reserved Telephone Line Fault Options ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Solution 862 Programming Sheets 285 Location 177 Page 157 H 1 Dialler Reporting Functions Allowed Dialler Options I 2 Remote Arming Via The Telephone Allowed 4 Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed 8 Use Bell 103 For FSK Format Disabled CCITT V21 Location 178 Page 158 Dialler Options 2 1 Open Close Reports Only If Previous Alarm g P 2 Open Close Reports For STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 4 Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete 8 Extend Time To Wait For Handshake From 30 Seconds To 55 Seconds Location 4790 Page 159 Dialler Options 3 ana Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit Second 4 Change Decadic Dialling To 60 40 8 Reserved H H 1 Upload Download Allowed Alarm Link Op tions 2 Call Back Phone Number Required For Upload Download 4 Exit Upload Download Connection On Alarm 8 Extern
141. al Modem Module CC811 Required For Upload Download Location 181 184 Page 162 Installer Code fr 2 3 4 Location 185 264 EEE Page 163 User Codes Location 185 189 Location 190 194 User Code 1 22 5 80 User Code 2 Location 195 199 Location 200 204 par E 209 User Code 3 User Code 4 User Code 5 15 5 15 15 2 is ns 214 Location 215 219 rafts rs 224 User Code 6 15 2 User Code 7 15 15 15 15 User Code 8 15 3 GE 225 229 Location 230 234 Bie 235 239 Radio Code 9 Radio Code 10 Radio Code 11 Location 240 244 Location 245 249 Location 250 254 Radio Code 12 Radio Code 13 75 Radio Code 14 75 Location 255 259 Location 260 264 Radio Code 15 Radio Code 16 isishi o User Code Priority Priority Description Priority Description eport Arm Only par Arm Disarm Master Code Functions Arm Di Master Code Functi Sur es Perea ke Open Close Report O Arm Di Master Code Functi Code T Arm Di Master Code Functi Code T Table 163 User Code Priority Levels Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 286 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Location 265 Page 168 Day Alarm Zones 1 Zone 1 4 Zone 3 2 Zone 2 8 Zone 4 Location 266 OO ee EE RRO T TE a Me eee Page 170 H 0 No End Of Line Resistor 9 10K EOL Resistor Value ees Pay 2 1K5 11 22K 3 2K2 12 Reserved 4 3kK3 13 Reserved 5 3K9 14 Reserved 6 4K7 15 Split EOL 3K3 6K8 Six Burglary 7 5
142. andover Allowed 8 Handover Delay To Be Sequential Location 427 System Options 4 1 Panel To Power Up Disarmed If Power Reset 2 Arm Disarm Tracking On Power Up 4 Internal Crystal To Keep Time 8 Keyswitch Interface Night Arm Station Or RE005 Installed Location 428 Consumer Options 1 1 Test Reports Only When Armed 2 Test Report After Siren Reset 4 Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 8 STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status Location 429 Consumer Options 2 1 Codepad Extinguish Mode 2 Single Button Arming Allowed AWAY STAY Mode 1 amp 2 4 Single Button Disarming Allowed STAY Mode 1 amp 2 8 Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm Location 430 Consumer Options 3 1 Codepad Fault Alarm Beeps Allowed 2 Use Digit 3 For Codepad Duress Instead Of Digit 9 4 Alarms Activate Siren amp Strobe Outputs In STAY Mode 1 amp 2 8 Reserved Location 431 Radio Input Options 1 Radio Receiver WE800 2 Latching Keyswitch Input 3 Momentary Keyswitch Input 4 Reserved Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Ls ISSUE140 302 Location 432 Partitioning Options 1 Location 433 Partitioning Options 2 Location 434 441 Zone Allocations For Area 1 Location 442 449 Zone Allocations For Area 2 Location 450 465 User Code Allocations Location 450 Areas For User 1 o Location 454 Areas For User 5 o Location 458 Areas For User 9 Location 462 A
143. anels The interface provides the 24 volts required to power the smoke detector and also provides a relay output that is used to trigger the control panel Multiple detectors may be connected to the same interface Radio Key Keyswitch Interface CC813 This interface was designed to allow simple interfacing of a momentary keyswitch or radio equipment for remote control operations to operate the control panel If the R K terminal is used a number of momentary keyswitches may be connected in parallel for multiple arm disarm locations The ON and OFF terminals can be used to directly interface to any access control system The HOME terminal will force the system to arm and disarm in STAY Mode 1 There is also a PANIC terminal that allows the customer to issue a panic alarm from a remote keyswitch or hand held radio transmitter This is handy if you require your system to be radio controlled and you would like to give your customer total control via a hand held radio remote Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 256 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Terminals and Descriptions 258 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Terminal Definitions and Descriptions Terminal Description EARTH 18V AC BATTERY BATTERY GND 12V CLK DATA STR ouT I COM comm N O 12V z4 Z3 12V GND ZI 12V ISSUE140 This terminal
144. any zone pulse count settings that have been programmed for that zone i e Zone pulse count is only relevant when the system has been armed Example An example of a day alarm set up could be the front door of a shop that has a pressure mat or electronic beam that customers activate as they enter to and from the shop As the customers walk on the pressure mat or break the electronic beam the codepad buzzer will beep Day Alarm Resetting An output that has been programmed for day alarm resetting will operate when a zone programmed for day alarm has been triggered The output will reset once the zone has resealed This will only occur when the system is disarmed Refer to Output Event Type Day Alarm Resetting on page 205 for more information Day Alarm Latching An output that has been programmed for day alarm latching will operate when a zone programmed for day alarm has been triggered The ZONE indicator and the latching output will reset when the away button has been pressed This will only occur when the system is disarmed Refer to Output Event Type Day Alarm Latching on page 205 for more information ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Information 169 Day Alarm Operation If a zone has been programmed for day alarm the zone can be isolated in the normal way so that it does not register as a day alarm zone during the disarmed state Only zones 1 4 can be used as day alarm zones The STAY in
145. arallel with the EOL resistor The function of the zones and their response times are programmable via the system programming options If split EOL has been programmed this will enable 24 hour zones or keyswitch zones to be connected in parallel to zones three and four to act as zones seven and eight These two terminals are for power to detectors and other equipment They are fuse protected by a 1 amp fuse These terminals are zones one and two Their common terminal is 12V All normally closed contacts are to be wired in series with the EOL resistor and where normally open contacts are to be wired in parallel with the EOL resistor The function of the zones and their response times are programmable via the system programming options If split EOL has been programmed this will enable 24 hour zones or keyswitch zones to be connected in parallel to zones one and two to act as zones five and six Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Terminals and Descriptions 259 Glossary Of Terms Alarm Condition Answering Machine Bypass Armed System ON Automatic Arming Automatic Disarming AWAY or AWAY Mode Codepad Day Alarm Detectors Dialler Disarmed Dual Reporting Dynamic Battery Testing EDMSAT Satellite Siren Entry Time or Entry Delay Entry Warning Is when your alarm system is armed and one of the detection devices are violated A 24 hour zone e g Smoke detector may trigger when your sy
146. artitioning aSolut ion 880 control panel Setting Up The Master Partitioned Codepad As The Main Codepad If you are using the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad as the main codepad when partitioning you need to connect the codepad to the main codepad terminals CP CP CLK and DATA All DIP switches on the back of the codepad will need to be set to the ON position Setting Up An Area I Codepad As The Main Codepad If you are not using the CP5 Master Partitioned codepad as the main codepad of the partitioned system you need to connect the Area 1 codepad to the main codepad terminals CP CP CLK and DATA In addition to setting up the Area 1 Codepad you will need to set DIP switch on the back of the codepad into the ON position and enable Option 2 in LOCATION 432 on page 243 Setting Up An Area 1 Codepad If you wish to have a separate area codepad only for Area 1 when using the CP5 Master Partitioned codepad as the main codepad you will need to connect the Area 1 codepad to the main codepad terminals CP CP and CLK with the DATA terminal to be connected to one of the programmable outputs programmed as 6 0 Area 1 Codepad Data DIP switch 1 on the back of the Area codepad will need to be in the ON position Setting Up An Area 2 Codepad If you wish to have a separate area codepad only for Area 2 when using either the CPS Master Partitioned codepad or another area codepad for Area 1 you will need to connect
147. as soon as any system fault occurs including if the AC mains supply has failed The output will reset as soon as the system fault or the AC mains supply has restored Fire Alarm Resetting This output will operate when a 24 hour fire zone is triggered The output will reset once a valid user code has been entered or when siren run time expires Fire Alarm Latching This output will operate when a 24 hour fire zone has triggered and will reset when the system has been armed or disarmed Fire Alarm Verification This feature is used on some commercial fire control panels to reduce false alarms on smoke detectors It is conceptually very similar to zone pulse count as used in some motion detectors Basically a fire zone is allotted a pulse count of 3 pulses over a period of 3 minutes If the smoke detector trips the voltage to the smoke detector is disconnected for 15 seconds and then reapplied No alarm has registered If within 3 minutes of the first trigger the unit triggers again no alarm will be registered and the voltage to the smoke detector will again be disconnected for 15 seconds and then reapplied If a third trigger is detected within 3 minutes of the first trigger i e 3 pulses in 3 minutes a fire alarm will be registered Power to the smoke detector will be maintained to facilitate unit identification via the detector memory This output should be connected to the negative side of any fire smoke detector To configure an o
148. at one page is filled per 60 calls You will be able to save 4333 sheets of paper per year and at approximately 45 per box this becomes a considerable saving As you can see using the Solution 844 862 880 control panel will save you money your customer money and will help conserve our natural resources in fact the only people who don t like this feature is Telecom Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 268 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Specifications 270 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Warranty Statement Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited warrants this product to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of three years from the date of manufacture as indicated by the date stamp and or the serial number on the product Defective units returned by the purchaser at their own expense during this period will be repaired or replaced at the option of the manufacturer The repair or replacement will be free of charge provided that the defects were not incurred during shipping or handling or the damage was not due to causes beyond the control of Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited such as lightning excessive voltage mechanical shock or damage arising out of abuse alteration or improper application of the equipment Year 2000 Compliance ISSUE140 This notice is to confirm that a
149. ate This priority level allows the user code holder to arm and disarm the system No opening or closing reports will be transmitted when this user code has been used to arm or disarm the system However a user code with this priority level will only send a closing report after a previous code that has the ability to send an opening report has disarmed the system Isolating zones will only be allowed by using the method Code To Isolate once this priority level has been set Refer to Isolating Zones on page 70 for further information Arm and Disarm Code To Isolate Open Close Reports This priority level allows the user code holder to arm and disarm the system Opening and closing reports will always be transmitted when this user code has been used to arm or disarm the system Isolating of zones will only be allowed by using the method Code To Isolate once this priority level has been set This option requires Open Close reports in LOCATION 333 334 to be enabled on page 191 for it to be effective Refer to Isolating Zones on page 70 for more information Arm and Disarm Master Code Functions This priority level allows arming and disarming of the system and the ability to carry out any of the Master Code Functions described on page 99 No opening or closing reports will be transmitted when this user code has been used to arm or disarm the system However a user code with this priority level will only send a closing report
150. ations to assign each user code holder to the areas they are required to operate Multiple user codes can be allocated to the same areas Select the required areas that the user code holder is to operate and then add the options values together from Table 155 User Code Allocations below e g If the user code is allocated to operate both Area and Area 2 program a 3 i e 1 2 3 into the required location relevant to their user code allocation If the user code is allocated only to Area 1 program their user code allocation as 1 Option Allocated Areas oo Not Allocated To An Area Allocated To Area 1 Allocated To Area 2 Allocated To Area 1 Area 2 Table 155 User Code Allocations Location 450 User Code 1 Location 454 User Code 5 Location 458 User Code 9 Location 462 User Code 13 Location 451 User Code 2 Location 455 User Code 6 Location 459 User Code 10 Location 463 User Code 14 lo Location 452 User Code 3 Location 456 User Code 7 Location 460 User Code 11 Location 464 User Code 15 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Location 453 User Code 4 Location 457 User Code 8 Location 461 User Code 12 Location 465 User Code 16 ISSUE140 248 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Setting Up and Programming Codepads For Partitioning ISSUE140 Only the CP5 Area Addressable CP500A and CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepads can be used when p
151. ator Programming Mode These two indicators will flash when the system has entered either Installer s Programming Mode or when any Master Code Functions are used Off Indicator Zone Sealed The indicator will illuminate when the system is in the disarmed state or Installer s Programming Mode has been entered and will flash when a zone becomes unsealed during the disarmed state The indicator will stop flashing when all zones are sealed On Indicator Zone In Alarm The indicator will illuminate when the system is armed in AWAY Mode and will flash when an alarm occurs The indicator will reset once a valid user code has been entered Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 56 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Audible Indicators In general the audible indications given out by the codepad are as follows Indicator Definition A Button Has Been Pressed On The Codepad Or End One Short Beep Of Exit Time When Armed In Either STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 Two Short Beeps The System Has Accepted Your Code Three Short Beeps The Requested Function Has Been Executed One L B Indicates The End Of Exit Time In AWAY Mode Or BETONE DEEP The Requested Operation Has Been Denied Or Aborted Walk Test Mode Is Currently Active Or Warning One Short Beep Every Second Before Automatic Arming Takes Place One Short Beep Every Two Telephone Monitor Mode Is Active Seconds One Short Beep Every Minute There Is A System Fau
152. automatic arming time as 25 00 hours if you only require the control panel to disarm y V1 00 V1 07 The system failed to automatically disarm if the system was not Kiss Off Wait Time LOCATION 422 3 Location Description 422 Increments Of 500 ms 500 ms 8 Sec s Table 128 Kiss Off Wait Time Location This location sets the time that the control panel will wait for acknowledgment before resending the report This applies only to Contact ID Format and 4 2 Express Formats LOCATION 423 0 Location Description Table 129 Reserved Location Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 224 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Event Timers 225 LOCATION 901 904 0000 Location Description Current Hour In 24 Hour Time Tens Digit Current Minute Tens Digit 904 Current Minute Units Digit Current Hour In 24 Hour Time Units Digit Table 130 System Time Locations The Solut ion 844 862 880 control panel has a real time 24 hour clock that needs to be set during installation This time must be set in 24 hour format HHMM i e 10 30 PM would be programmed as 2230 Every time the system has been powered down the system time will need to be reset Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 226 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual System Date LOCATION 905 910 010101 Location Description
153. aximum This group of terminals are the output interface terminals They can be configured to any combination of the functions available via the system programming options They can be used for a variety of functions with incredible flexibility All outputs have a common terminal that is positive 12 volts and each output is capable of sinking a maximum of 400 mA Output 1 is defaulted to operate a horn speaker The outputs are protected by EDM s unique Integrated Protection System IPS This makes them extremely tolerant to abuse or incorrect wiring It should be noted that each output is open collector and will not source any current but can sink a maximum of 400 mA per output These relay contacts are fully programmable as with the strobe and output 1 The relay is factory defaulted as an alarm output Sirens Running Event Type 1 15 The N O contact is the connection point for the positive side of a DC siren such as a piezo screamer The negative side of the DC siren needs to be connected to the GND terminal A link JP2 is provided on the PCB for connecting the COM terminal to either GND or 12V This link should be connected to 12V as shown in Figure 20 Solution 844 862 880 Wiring Diagram on page 262 The relay is rated at 1 Amp 30 VDC These terminals are zones three and four Their common terminal is 12V All normally closed contacts are to be wired in series with the EOL resistor and where normally open contacts are to be wired in p
154. been detected e g FAULT indicator flashing the codepad will begin to beep once every minute Pressing the away button once will cancel the once a minute beep and acknowledge the fault e g FAULT indicator on Indicator Definition a OE There Is A System Fault That Needs To Be Rectified Off The System Is Normal There Are No Faults Flashing There Is A System Fault Waiting To Be Acknowledged Table 14 FAULT Indicator Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 52 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Audible Indicators In general the audible indications given out by the codepad are as follows Indicator Definition A Button Has Been Pressed On The Codepad Or End One Short Beep Of Exit Time When Armed In Either STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 Two Short Beeps The System Has Accepted Your Code Three Short Beeps The Requested Function Has Been Executed One L B Indicates The End Of Exit Time In AWAY Mode Or REONE ASER The Requested Operation Has Been Denied Or Aborted Walk Test Mode Is Currently Active Or Warning One Short Beep Every Second Before Automatic Arming Takes Place One shore Beep Every N Telephone Monitor Mode Is Active Seconds One Short Beep Every Minute There Is A System Fault Waiting To Be Acknowledged Table 15 Audible Indications ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Codepad Indicators 53 CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad Solucion The codepad is the communications inte
155. ber has been displayed Enter all the digits for PHONE No 1 one digit at a time You will notice as each digit is entered the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate If there is more than one telephone number press the stay button followed by the 4 button after the last digit of the telephone number This will insert a break between the first telephone number and the second telephone number If there is only one phone number press the button to exit this mode Enter all the digits for PHONE No 2 one digit at a time You will notice as each digit is entered the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate After the last digit of the second telephone number press the Away button to exit this mode unless a third telephone number is required If there is a third telephone number to be programmed press the stay button followed by the 4 button to insert a break between the second telephone number and the third telephone WASTER CODE 2 Rum PHONE No 1 staY 4 4 PHONE No 2 away Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 134 ISSUE140 Example I KF Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Digit Required Number To Program Digit Required Number To Program Co ae e Followed md pO B Fottowea By 2 __ Four Second Pause Followed By 3 Followed By 4 Table 56 Domestic Dialling Digits If you wish to program two separate telephone numbers
156. ble 4 Available Zone Types on page 25 for the different zone types that may be selected Zone No Zone Type Zone No Zone Type Eae e a e 8 2 Hour Pamper Table 3 Zone Defaults For Solution 880 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Introduction 25 Zone Types There are thirteen different zone types to choose from when programming zones These thirteen different zone types are available for all Solut ion 844 862 880 control panels Refer to Zone Programming on page 173 for more information on programming zones Zone Type Description Zone Type Description PP inoser 9 20 Four Tamper a oma n feo O Ca reena OO aoaaa O D Resened a 2h owe 6 24 Hour Medical 14 Chime Only 24 Hour Panic Zone Not Used Table 4 Available Zone Types Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 26 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 28 Programming Example Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual The programming options of the control panel are stored in a non volatile EPROM This memory will hold all the relevant configuration and user specific data even during a total power loss The data retention time is as long as ten years without power therefore no reprogramming will be required after powering the control panel down The data can be changed as many times as required without the need fo
157. both Receiver and Receiver 2 have the primary telephone number and secondary telephone number programmed the maximum number of calls will total 24 providing that the event is allocated to report on both receivers The control panel will attempt to call the base station receiver up to six times using both the primary telephone number and the secondary telephone number Only three times if the primary telephone number is programmed If at this stage the control panel has failed to communicate to the base station receiver a communications fault will occur and the control panel will wait 10 minutes before attempting to report to the base station receiver for a further 6 attempts The communication fault will reset on the next successful call attempt If Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 is set up for domestic reporting the control panel will not display a fault if failed to report after the maximum of six call attempts If Option 1 in LOCATION 177 on page 157 is enabled and there are no telephone numbers programmed no fault condition will occur Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 76 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual AC Mains Failure An AC mains supply failure will automatically flash the MAINS indicator If the AC mains supply has been disconnected continuously for more than two minutes the remote codepad will beep the codepad buzzer once every minute If the control panel has been programmed to
158. button to exit this mode 4 Enter all the digits for PHONE No 2 one digit at a time You will notice as each digit is entered the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate 5 After the last digit of the second telephone number press the button to exit this mode unless a third telephone number is required If there is a third telephone number to be programmed press the button followed by the 4 button to insert a break between the second telephone number and the third telephone o s 2 Rw PHONE No 1 STAY 4 PHONE no 2 away Digit Required Number To Program Digit Required Number To Program E E E A E E Followed By 1 o 3 B Fottowea By 2 __ Four Second Pause Followed By 3 Followed By 4 Table 46 Domestic Dialling Digits ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 105 Example If you wish to program two separate telephone numbers 9672 1777 and 9672 1233 follow the sequence below and replace the telephone numbers mentioned in the manual with the telephone numbers that you wish to program Remember to substitute the default Master Code 2580 with the Master Code that has been programmed I 2580 2 A 96721777 sa 4 96721233 a How To Disable Domestic Dialling If at any time you wish to cancel domestic dialling for any reason e g You are moving house and do not wish the system to continue calling your work place or mobile phone
159. c Pager s access telephone number programmed 2 LOCATION 034 039 on page 145 requires a Subscriber ID Number programmed 3 LOCATION 032 on page 144 requires Option 5 Pager Handshake to be selected 4 LOCATION 033 on page 145 requires Option 5 Basic Pager Format to be selected How To Setup Receiver 2 For Basic Pager Reporting 1 LOCATION 040 055 on page 146 requires the Basic Pager s access telephone number programmed 2 LOCATION 074 079 on page 148 requires a Subscriber ID Number programmed 3 LOCATION 072 on page 147 requires Option 5 Pager Handshake to be selected 4 LOCATION 073 on page 148 requires Option 5 Basic Pager Format to be selected Subscriber ID Zone Status System Status Number 123 45 6 7 8 678 01200000 9000 Zone Normal 0 Alarm 1 Zone Bypassed 2 Zone Trouble 3 Disarmed 8 Armed 9 i Normal 0 Panic Duress 1 Fire Alarm 2 Medical Alarm 3 AC Normal 0 4 AC Failure 1 System Normal 0 System Fault 1 Figure 7 Basic Pager Display The example in Figure 7 Basic Pager Display shows that the transmission has come from Subscriber ID Number 678 and that Zone 2 is in alarm Zone 3 has been manually isolated the system is armed the panic zone is normal the AC is connected and there is no fault condition Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 140 Solution 844 862 8
160. chine Bypass in the secondary mode In this mode when calling the control panel allow the phone to ring for no more than 2 rings and then hang up Wait a minimum of 8 seconds before calling the control panel again The control panel will now answer on the first ring If you do not wait the 8 seconds the control panel will not answer the call Refer to Option 2 in LOCATION 177 on page 157 if you wish to enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When System Is Armed et You should set the ring count on the answering machine or facsimile machine to be higher than two rings Four or six rings would be preferred Programming a zero into this location will disable the control panel from answering an incoming call ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Dialler Information 153 Telephone Line Fault Options LOCATION 176 0 When programming this location you will notice that there are four options per location If you require options 1 2 4 or all of these options only one number needs to be programmed This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together Program a 7 if you require options 1 2 and 4 simultaneously i e 1 2 4 7 Description Operate The FAULT Indicator When Telephone Line Fails Sound Speaker Bell and Strobe When System Is Armed Sound Speaker Bell and Strobe When System Is Disarmed Table 71 Telephone Line Fault Options The Solution 844 862 880 has the ability to monitor th
161. ctronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 146 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual LOCATION 040 055 0000000000000000 When the control panel needs to transmit a report the control panel will dial this number in an attempt to contact the monitoring station or pager etc If the call is successful the relevant information will be transmitted and the dialler will return back to the stand by mode If unsuccessful the dialler will attempt two more times using the primary telephone number for receiver 1 after which the secondary telephone number for receiver will be called three times If the dialling sequence is still unsuccessful the control panel will then attempt to repeat this procedure dialling the primary telephone number and the secondary telephone number for receiver 2 if programmed This procedure will be repeated only once again i e Maximum of 12 call attempts per alarm after ten minutes if none of the first 6 attempts were successful if only the primary telephone number and secondary telephone number for receiver has been programmed If the primary telephone number and secondary telephone numbers for both receiver 1 and receiver 2 have been programmed a maximum of 24 call attempts per alarm will be made Contact your monitoring station or pager company for the relevant telephone numbers before programming these locations When Receiver 2 has been set up for domestic reporting telephone numbers programm
162. cumstances that the indicators will display i e Zone Sealed Zone Unsealed Indicator Definition 0 25 Rete pee Off Zone Is In Alarm Condition a OE N Zone Is Manually Isolated Table 22 Zone Indicators Area On Off Indicators 2 The group of four Area On Off indicators 1 4 show the status of each area i e If an indicator is illuminated that area is armed and if the indicator is not illuminated that area is disarmed If an area is armed in STAY Mode 1 the corresponding Area On Off indicator will be illuminated in conjunction with the PARTIAL indicator If the area is armed in AWAY Mode only the corresponding Area On Off Indicator will be illuminated Area On Off Indicator Definition Oooo o ow OES Area Is Armed In AWAY Mode Or STAY Mode 1 off Area Is Disarmed Table 23 Area On Off Indicators Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 58 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Area Display Indicators A group of four Area Display indicators display which area is currently being displayed i e If number is being displayed all information provided on the codepad display relates only to Area 1 If number 2 is being displayed all information provided on the codepad display relates only to Area 2 Pressing the button will toggle or move you to the next area display i e If Area 1 is currently being displayed pressing the button will toggle or move you to Area 2 Pressin
163. d 248 Setting Up An Area 1 Codepad 248 Setting Up An Area 2 Codepad 248 Codepad Connections For Partitioning 249 Optional Equipment 251 Optional Equipment 252 Terminals and Descriptions Terminal Definitions and Descriptions Glossary Of Terms Solution 844 862 880 Wiring Diagram Solution 844 862 880 Component Overlay Telecom Connection Diagrams Appendices Appendix A Telephone Anti Jamming 257 258 259 262 263 264 265 266 266 Appendix B Test Reports Only When Armed 267 267 Specifications Warranty Statement Year 2000 Compliance Specifications Software Version Number 269 270 270 271 271 Advice To Users 271 New Zealand Telepermit Notes 272 Solution 844 Programming Sheets Solution 862 Programming Sheets Solution 880 Programming Sheets Index 273 283 293 303 Introduction 18 Introduction ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Congratulations on selecting the Solution 844 862 880 control panel for your installation So that you can obtain the most from your unit we suggest that you take the time to read through this manual and familiarise yourself with the numerous outstanding operating and installation features of this system You will notice that in all aspects of planning engineering styling operation convenience and adaptability we have sought to anticipate your every possible requirement Programmi
164. d Time For STAY Mode The first location of the timer is for programming increments of 1 second The second location of the timer is for programming increments of 16 seconds By adding these two locations together will give the total time required Example If you require the entry time to expire after 18 seconds you would need to program LOCATION 398 as 2 i e 2 x 1 second 2 seconds and LOCATION 399 as 1 i e 1 x 16 seconds 16 seconds This would give you the total time of 18 seconds i e 2 16 seconds 18 seconds Entry Timer 1 LOCATION 398 399 Defaulted To 20 Seconds 41 Location Description Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Table 116 Entry Timer 1 Locations Entry time can be programmed between 0 and 255 seconds in increments of one second Entry Timer 1 is the delay time used by the zone type Delay 1 Refer to Zone Types on page 175 for more information Entry Timer 2 LOCATION 400 401 Defaulted To 40 Seconds 8 2 Location Description Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Table 117 Entry Timer 2 Locations Entry time can be programmed between 0 and 255 seconds in increments of one second Entry Timer 2 is the delay time used by the zone type Delay 2 Refer to Zone Types on page 175 for more information ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System
165. d to each user code holder Some user code holders may not be able to isolate zones Refer to User Code Priority on page 165 for further information Zones that have been manually isolated using this method will transmit a zone bypass report Contact ID Event Code 570 for each zone upon arming the system A zone bypass restore report will be transmitted when the system has been disarmed Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Operations 71 Standard Isolating Standard isolating allows all operators to be able to isolate zones Therefore no code is required to be used when isolating zones 1 Press the button twice Three beeps will be heard 2 Enter the ZONE NUMBER required to be isolated followed by the stay button The zone you just selected to be isolated will now begin to flash 24 hour zones will automatically isolate as soon as the button has been pressed All other burglary zones will automatically isolate only after the system has been armed Repeat Step 2 if more than one zone is required to be isolated until all zones that are required to be isolated have been selected 3 Press the Away button when finished selecting the zones to be isolated Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state The zones selected to be isolated when you arm the system in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 will continue to flash until the system has next been disarmed EF STAY S
166. de These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the call forward sequence has been displayed Enter stay 6 1 stay 2 and the LAWAY button Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state SESE 3 Be 2 paw 2 6 1 Em 2 m How To Disable The Telco Disarming Sequence If at any time you wish to cancel the telco disarming sequence you may enter your MASTER cone followed by 3 and the button followed by 2 and the button then the button followed by the 4 and the button to disable the telco arming sequence WASTER CODE 3 Rw 2 fom Say 4 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions EF Example I 109 How To Program Telco Arming Sequence Easy Call Forward Immediate On 1 Enter your followed by 3 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Press button followed by the Away button to change the telco arming sequence Three beeps will be heard If a previous call forwarding sequence has already been programmed the sequence will be displayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators Refer to Table 49 Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence on page 106 for the indicators and their meanings If there is no call forward sequence programmed a further two beeps will be heard after entering this mode These two beeps are normally heard a
167. de 1 amp 2 234 Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm 234 Consumer Options 3 235 Codepad Fault Alarm Beeps Allowed 235 Use Digit 3 For Codepad Duress Instead Of Digit 9 235 Alarm Activates Sirens amp Strobe In STAY Mode amp 2 235 Reserved 235 Radio Input Options 236 Radio Receiver WE800 236 Latching Keyswitch Input 236 Momentary Keyswitch Input 236 Partitioning 237 CP5 Master Partitioned LED Codepad 238 Zone Indicators 238 Area On Off Indicators 239 Area Display Indicators 239 Status Indicators 239 PARTIAL Indicator 239 AUX Indicator 240 MAINS Indicator 240 FAULT Indicator 240 Audible Indicators 241 Operating Codepads In Partitioning 242 Operating From A CP5 Area Addressable LED Codepad 242 Operating From A CP5 Master Partitioned Codepad 242 Programming 243 Partitioning Options 1 243 First To Open Last To Close Reporting 243 Area 1 Codepad Connected To Data Terminal 243 Reset Sirens From Any Area Allowed 244 Master Codepad To Display AUX Indicator When On Line 244 Partitioning Options 2 244 Lock Area 1 To Receiver 1 and Lock Area 2 To Receiver 2 244 User Codes Can Arm Disarm Both Areas At Same Time Code 0 244 Reserved 244 Reserved 244 Zone Allocations 245 Zone Allocations For Area 1 245 Zone Allocations For Area 2 245 User Code Allocations 247 Setting Up and Programming Codepads For Partitioning 248 Setting Up The Master Partitioned Codepad As The Main Codepad 248 Setting Up An Area 1 Codepad As The Main Codepa
168. dicator eee eeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 58 239 Partitioning Area Addressable Codepad Operations 242 Codepad Connections 0 cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeesecsseenee 249 Codepad Operations cece eeeeeeeeeeesecssecneeeaee 242 Master Partitioned Codepad Operations 242 Master Partitioned LED Codepad eee 238 Programming sieren cseeeseeeeeeesecesecesecaecnaeenee 243 Setting Up Area 1 Codepad eee eeeeeees 248 Setting Up Area 2 Codepad 200 eeeeeeneees 248 Setting Up Master Partitioned Codepad 248 User Code Allocations 0 cece eseecseereeeeeenees 247 Lone AMOCAU ONS cirerer Severed egies 245 Partitioning Options 1 Display AUX Indicator When Using Telephone Line tested od ficdasleaseconend ee R E e a dyad puedes 244 First To Open Last To Close Reporting 243 Main Codepad To Display Data Only For Area 243 Resetting Of Sirens From Either Area 244 Partitioning Options 2 Enable User Code 0 AWAY To Arm Disarm Both Af iere sotesne poa u 244 Lock Area 1 To Receiver 1 amp Lock Area 2 To Receiver 2er ssstotisecoethselss tenn sE Mees ststsse see tsss 244 Phone Controller ccccccsecceccecececsesssseceeeeeeees 254 260 Pluie aee To A EEEE TT 254 Point ID Codes sis ioeie eaei tesesoesticeshtetssestevestess 137 Power Up Di armed ssisssris isi io eeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeseeeseeeaes 232 Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 143 Pri
169. dicator and AC mains fail output For situations requiring an uninterrupted power source a rechargeable sealed lead acid battery can be connected In the event of an AC mains failure the power supply will switch to battery power without interrupting the load being supplied TF008 Plug Pack TF008 The TFO08 plug packs have been designed to be used with the EDM control panels and the PS100 Power Supply Module The plug pack includes built in thermal fuses that under overload or fault conditions will blow and eliminate any possible fire threat due to excessive heat build up inside the casing The TFOO8 plug pack incorporates a three wire flying lead that enables a mains earth connection to be made between the equipment and the plug pack This connection may be required for lightning protection on equipment that is connected to phone lines or for safety reasons such as earthing of metal enclosures Solution Codepad Mimic Board C820 The Solution Codepad Mimic Board CC820 has been designed to allow you to have a separate output indicator for each indicator found on the remote codepad This will be useful to remotely display system status information Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Optional Equipment 255 2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface FA101 The 2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface FA101 has been designed to allow high quality 2 wire 24 volt DC smoke detectors to be easily connected to the Solution range of control p
170. dicator can be programmed to indicate whether day alarm has been turned on or off When day alarm has been turned on the STAY indicator will flash once every three seconds Refer to Option 8 in LOCATION 428 on page 233 for more information Monitoring of zones 5 8 can be achieved by programming an output to mimic a zone Refer to Output Event Types on page 204 for more information on all available output types that can be programmed How To Turn Day Alarm On 1 Hold down the 4 button until three beeps are heard How To Turn Day Alarm Off 1 Hold Down the 4 button until two beeps are heard Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 170 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual EOL Resistor Value LOCATION 266 Resistor Value i Resistor Value 6K8 Blue Grey Black Brown 1 10K Brown Black Orange No EOL Resistor 1K Brown Black Red Split EOL 3K3 6K8 1 Resistors Required Four Burglary Zones amp Four 24 Hour Zones 1K5 Brown Green Red 2K2 Red Red Red 4 3K3 Orange Orange Black Brown 1 3K9 Orange White Red 4K7 Yellow Violet Red 5K6 Green Blue Red 10 11 12 13 14 5 1 Table 80 EOL Resistor Value The control panel has the ability to be programmed for different values of EOL End Of Line resistors This is a global parameter and will effect all four zones simultaneously It gives the ability to fit the Solut ion 844 862 880 control
171. ds to be set for the Ist January 1997 at 10 30 PM program the date and time as follows F 2580 6 Aun 0 1 0 1 9 7 2 2 3 0 away Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 24 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Solution 844 Zone Defaults The default zone settings of the control panel are listed in the table below Zones 4 may be programmed to any of the available zone types Zones 5 8 are limited to that they may only be programmed to any 24 hour or keyswitch type Refer to Table 4 Available Zone Types on page 25 for the different zone types that may be selected Zone No Zone Type Zone No Zone Type Delay 1 24 Hour Burglary Pa ie 8 2 Hor Tamper Table 1 Zone Defaults For Solution 844 Solution 862 Zone Defaults The default zone settings of the control panel are listed in the table below Zones 6 may be programmed to any of the available zone types Zones 7 and 8 are limited to that they may only be programmed to any 24 hour or keyswitch type Refer to Table 4 Available Zone Types on page 25 for the different zone types that may be selected Zone No Zone Type Zone No Zone Type pa ndover ste a Handover 2 Hour Tamper Table 2 Zone Defaults For Solution 862 Solution 880 Zone Defaults The default zone settings of the control panel are listed in the table below Zones 1 8 may be programmed to any of the available zone types Refer to Ta
172. dshake Tone is required when the control panel needs to communicate in Basic Pager Format Option Handshake Tone Option Handshake Tone HI LO Handshake 1400 Hz Lo Speed Table 64 Handshake Tones For Receiver 1 ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Dialler Information 145 Transmission Format For Receiver I LOCATION 033 1 Enter the desired transmission format here This location selects the data format that will be transmitted to the base station receiver This location also allows you to configure the control panel for domestic or basic pager formats a Transmission Format Option Transmission Format 4 2 Express Basic Pager Se S Table 65 Transmission Formats For Receiver 1 Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1 LOCATION 034 039 000000 This number is transmitted to identify the calling control panel Enter the desired Subscriber ID Number in the six locations provided For Basic Pager Format LOCATION 034 036 will be ignored and the first digit of the Subscriber ID Number required must start in LOCATION 037 When using Domestic Dialling Format the number of identification beeps will be the number that is programmed in LOCATION 039 This gives the ability to identify between 15 different control panels calling the same telephone number Example If you wish to program the Subscriber ID Number as 4729 you would program the six locations as follows 004729 Ele
173. e 2 Two Short Beeps The System Has Accepted Your Code Three Short Beeps The Requested Function Has Been Executed One L B Indicates The End Of Exit Time In AWAY Mode Or TETONS RESP The Requested Operation Has Been Denied Or Aborted Walk Test Mode Is Currently Active Or Warning One Short Beep Every Second Before Automatic Arming Takes Place One Short Beep Erery 100 Telephone Monitor Mode Is Active Seconds One Short Beep Every Minute There Is A System Fault Waiting To Be Acknowledged Table 29 Audible Indications Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 60 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Operations 62 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual System Operations ISSUE140 i Method One EF Method Two This section explains the general operations of the system The operations will explain how to arm and disarm the system in the various modes how to isolate zones initiate codepad alarms and determine any fault that may occur Arming The System In AWAY Mode Arming the system in AWAY Mode is normally performed when you leave the premises and require that all zones be activated in a ready state to detect any intrusion There are two different methods for arming the system in AWAY Mode Method one is standard and will always operate Method two is optional and needs Option 2 in LOCATION 429 to be enabled on page 234
174. e a codepad buzzer program the output event type as below O Communications Failure This event will operate when the dialler has made all possible attempts to reach the base station receiver The output will reset when the first Kiss Off is received This output event type is not applicable for domestic reporting The codepad buzzer will now operate instead of the output that has been programmed The output is no longer functional and cannot be used for any other output event type Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 204 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Output Event Types There are approximately seventy five different output event types to choose from Two numbers designate each output event type These two numbers need to be programmed into the appropriate locations of the output being used to indicate when the output should operate All reset times are in reference to polarity 1 and 8 Reset times will vary depending on the polarity used 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 EDMSAT Satellite Siren Output 1 Only This output controls all functions of an EDMSAT satellite siren SS914 The option of speaker indication beeps will not operate via the EDMSAT for remote operations No polarity is required to be programmed for this output event type System Armed This output will operate when the system is armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 The output will reset wh
175. e control panel to transmit zone alarm restore reports this location should be programmed as 14 If you do not wish to transmit zone restore reports this location should be programmed as a zero LOCATION 332 will be ignored when programming the alarm restore code and is global for all zones A zone restore report will only report to the receiving party that the zone has been allocated to e g Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 etc Zone Status Reporting Options LOCATION 332 1 Description No Report Required Receiver and Receiver 2 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails Table 94 Zone Status Reporting Options Location This location is factory default to report only to receiver 1 You can select whether the zone status reports will report on receiver 1 receiver 2 both receiver and receiver 2 receiver 2 only when receiver fails or no reporting at all When using partitioned Solution 880 control panels this location will be ignored if Option 1 Lock Area 1 to Receiver 1 amp Lock Area 2 to Receiver 2 in LOCATION 433 on page 244 has been programmed ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Reporting Information 191 Open Close Reports LOCATION 333 334 Location Description Opening Report Closing Report Table 95 Open Close Reporting Locations An Opening report Contact ID Event Code 401 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the system has been disarm
176. e eee Page 190 Zone Status Alarm Restore Code Location 38382 ee ee nn Ey pe lia a Page 190 Zone Status Reporting Options 0 No Report Required 1 Receiver 1 2 Receiver 2 4 Receiver 1 2 8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails Location 833 3834 Page 191 Open Close Reports Location 333 Opening Report p P Location 334 Closing Report 12 Location 3885 Page 191 4 H 0 No Report Required Open Close Reporting Options FS Recko 2 Receiver 2 4 Receiver 1 2 8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails Location 3386 O Page 192 Codepad Duress Report s Location 337 338 EE Page 192 Codepad Panic Report Location 339 3400 Page 193 Codepad Fire Report Location 341 3420 ee Page 193 Codepad Medical Report Location 343 Sy eee Page 194 Codepad Reporting Options 0 Ne neport Required 1 Receiver 1 2 Receiver 2 4 Receiver 1 2 8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails L ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Solution 862 Programming Sheets 289 Location 344 345 Page 194 System Status Fuse Fail Report 10 3 Location 346 3470 EEE Page 194 System Status Fuse Fail Restore Report Location 348 349 Page 195 System Status AC Fail Report 10 2 Location 350 351 EE Page 195 System Status AC Fail Restore Report 10 7 Location 352 353 EE Page 196 System Status Low Battery Report Location 354 355 00 EEE Page 197 System Status Low Battery Restore Report Loca
177. e grates 231 AC Fail In 1 Hour vse stein S 231 Handover Delay To Be Sequential 231 Ignore AC Mains Fail Indication 0 0 0 0 ee 231 Zone Pulse Count Handover ce eeeeeeeeeeeeees 231 System Options Aroen e s 232 Arm Disarm Tracking On Power Up s es 232 Enable Control Panel To Power Up Disarmed 232 Enable Radio Key Keyswitch Interface or Night Arm Station eon ieina epteestien teeta SEN 232 Internal Crystal To Keep Time eee 232 System Status AC Mains Fail Report oo cece eeeeceeeceeeeneeeeeees 195 AC Mains Fail Restore Report eee 195 Access Denied erties rere s 197 Fuse Fail Report ieor assisi sre rrii 194 Fuse Fail Restore Report eesseesseeeessereeresrsrrereeee 194 Low Battery Report eesesseseeesseeresreesrrrerreserrrrereee 196 Low Battery Restore Report eee eee eeeeeee 196 Reporting Options 0 eee ee ceeecese cee cneeeneeeeeeees 198 System Times ircre pes ieee r eren E E S 224 T Telco Arming Sequence 90 106 150 Telco Disarming Sequence eee eeeseeseceeeeeseenee 151 Telecom Connection Diagrams cece eee 264 Telephone Anti JaMming sseeeeseeeeeeeeerseresreerrerereeen 266 Telephone Arming 0 eee eeecesecesecneeneeeees 124 157 Telephone Line Fault 0 eee ceeeeseeceeeceeneeceeeeeeneeeeeees 74 Telephone Line Fault Options ee eee eee eeee 153 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Telephone Monitor Mode eee eeeeesecseeereeeeeee
178. e hand held transmitter for two seconds Two beeps will be heard on the remote codepad and the AWAY indicator will illuminate Exit time will now commence If horn speaker indication beeps have been enabled two beeps will be heard from the horn speaker If the strobe indications have been enabled the strobe will flash for 6 seconds to indicate that the system has been armed Disarming From AWAY Mode 1 Press either the BLACK or GREEN button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds Two beeps will be heard on the remote codepad and the AWAY indicator will extinguish If the horn speaker indication beeps have been enabled one beep will be heard from the horn speaker If the strobe indications have been enabled the strobe will flash for 3 seconds to indicate that the system has been disarmed Arming In STAY Mode 1 1 Press GREEN button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds Two beeps will be heard on the remote codepad and the STAY indicator will now illuminate Exit time will now commence If the horn speaker indication beeps have been enabled one two tone beep will be heard from the horn speaker If the strobe indications have been enabled the strobe will flash for 6 seconds to indicate that the system has been armed Disarming From STAY Mode 1 1 Press either the BLACK or GREEN button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds Two beeps will be heard on the remote codepad and the STAY indicator will exting
179. e output is required to be turned on 3 Press the away button again to exit this function Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish ASTER CODE 5 ave OUTPUT No AWAY AWAY If Output 2 has been programmed as 2 8 1000 in LOCATION 374 379 the Master Code holder may turn on this output following the steps outlined below 2580 5 A 1 a away Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 113 How To Turn An Output Off From The Remote Codepad 1 EF Example Enter your followed by 5 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Enter the required ouTPUT No 1 3 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the output will now turn off Repeat step 2 if more than one output is required to be turned off Press the button again to exit this function Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish msTeR cone 5 aw i Em wd If Output 2 has been programmed as 2 8 1000 in LOCATION 374 379 the Master Code holder may turn off this output following the steps outlined below EF 2580 5 Aw Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 114 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Setting The Date and Time 6 This function only needs to be used when the date and time requires to be cha
180. e relevant telephone numbers before programming these locations When Receiver 1 has been set up for domestic reporting telephone numbers wot programmed into these locations will be ignored Refer to Changing Domestic Phone f Numbers on page 88 when using the Installer Code function and Changing Domestic Phone Numbers on page 104 when using the Master Code function Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 LOCATION 016 031 0000000000000000 Refer to the Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 for programming information When Receiver 1 has been set up for domestic reporting telephone numbers programmed into these locations will be ignored Refer to Changing Domestic Phone Numbers on page 88 when using the Installer Code function and Changing Domestic Phone Numbers on page 104 when using the Master Code function Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 144 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Handshake Tone For Receiver 1 LOCATION 032 1 This location sets the type of handshake tone required for receiver 1 before data transmissions to the monitoring station will begin 1 HI LO Handshake Tone is required when the control panel requires to communicate in Contact ID Format or High Speed DTMF 2 1400 Hz Handshake Tone is required when the control panel requires to communicate in Ademco Lo Speed Format or Domestic Dialling Format 3 Reserved 4 No Handshake Tone is not recommended 5 Pager Han
181. e telephone line If the telephone line has been cut or disconnected for more than forty seconds the control panel will recognise this and the FAULT indicator will illuminate on the codepad The FAULT indicator will extinguish once the telephone line has been restored for more than forty seconds Option 2 and 4 will not operate unless option 1 has been enabled Operate The FAULT Indicator When Telephone Line Fails 1 The FAULT indicator will flash and the codepad buzzer will beep once every minute if the control panel detects that the telephone line has been disconnected Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 74 for more information Sound Speaker Bell and Strobe When The System Is Armed 2 Option 1 in this location will also need to be selected for this option to operate If the control panel detects that the telephone line has been disconnected when the system is armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 the horn speaker bell and strobe outputs will operate Sound Speaker Bell and Strobe When The System Is Disarmed 4 Option 1 in this location will also need to be selected for this option to operate If the control panel detects that the telephone line has been disconnected when the system is disarmed the horn speaker bell and strobe outputs will operate Reserved 8 n If Options 1 2 and 4 have been added together the horn speaker bell strobe and EDMSAT outputs will operate when the system is armed or disarmed Electronics
182. econds The indicators will illuminate when there is an alarm except a silent alarm when a button is pressed on the codepad when the AC mains fail beeps or if the entry timer has been activated Single Button Arming Allowed AWAY STAY Mode 1 amp 2 2 If this option has been selected the hold down functions for arming in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 will be functional Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 118 for more information Single Button Disarming Allowed STAY Mode 1 amp 2 4 This option will only operate when Option 2 in this location has also been selected This option will allow hold down functions for disarming from STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 118 for more information Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm 8 This option allows the memory of alarm events to be cleared from the remote codepad when the system has been disarmed If this option has not been selected the system will need to be armed and disarmed again to clear alarm memory from the remote codepad ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System and Consumer Options 235 Consumer Options 3 LOCATION 430 5 Description Codepad Fault Alarm Beeps Allowed Use Digit 3 For Codepad Duress Instead Of Digit 9 Alarms Activate Sirens amp Strobe In STAY Mode 1 amp 2 8 Reserved Table 141 Consumer Options 3 Codepad Fault Alarm Beeps Allowed l If this option has been enabled the codepad
183. ed from AWAY Mode A Closing report Contact ID Event Code 401 is transmitted at the end of exit time when the system has been armed in AWAY Mode If an expanded format has been selected this code will be used as the expansion code and the user number that armed or disarmed the system will follow in the same transmission Refer to Option 2 in LOCATION 178 on page 158 for programming Open Close reports in STAY Mode To program Open Close reports only after a previous alarm refer to Option 1 in LOCATION 178 on page 158 If you do not require Open Close reports program LOCATION 333 334 with zero Open Close Reporting Options LOCATION 335 1 Description No Report Required Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails Table 96 Open Close Reporting Options Location This location is factory default to report only to receiver 1 You can select whether the open close reports will report on receiver 1 receiver 2 both receiver 1 and receiver 2 receiver 2 only when receiver 1 fails or no reporting at all Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 192 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Codepad Duress Report LOCATION 336 6 Location Description 336 Codepad Duress Report Table 97 Codepad Duress Report Location A Duress report Contact ID Event Code 121 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the 9 button is added to the end of any valid
184. ed into these locations will be ignored Refer to Changing Domestic Phone Numbers on page 88 when using the Installer Code function and Changing Domestic Phone Numbers on page 104 when using the Master Code function Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 LOCATION 056 071 0000000000000000 Refer to the Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 on page 146 for more information When Receiver 2 has been set up for domestic reporting telephone numbers programmed into these locations will be ignored Refer to Changing Domestic Phone Numbers on page 88 when using the Installer Code function and Changing Domestic Phone Numbers on page 104 when using the Master Code function ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Dialler Information 147 Handshake Tone For Receiver 2 LOCATION 072 1 This location sets the type of handshake tone required for Receiver 2 before data transmissions to the monitoring station will begin 1 HI LO Handshake Tone is required when the control panel requires to communicate in Contact ID Format or High Speed DTMF 2 1400 Hz Handshake Tone is required when the control panel requires to communicate in Ademco Lo Speed Format or Domestic Dialling Format 3 Reserved 4 No Handshake Tone is not recommended 5 Pager Handshake Tone is required when the control panel needs to communicate in Basic Pager Format Option Handshake Tone Option Handshake Tone HI LO Handshake Contact ID Format N
185. edirect all calls to your mobile phone pocket pager or answering service Contact your telecommunications provider for more information on Call Forward operations Digit Required Number To Program Digit Required Number To Program Table 69 Telco Arm Disarm Dialling Digits Telco Arming Call Forward Immediate On To turn Call Forward Immediate On DL Phone Number you want calls to go to Example If you wish to immediately forward all incoming calls to the telephone number 96721055 upon arming the system in AWAY Mode you would program the following 121967214552 00000000000000 0000 Telco Arming Call Forward No Answer On To turn Call Forward No Answer On 61 Phone Number you want calls to go to Example If you wish to forward all incoming calls to the telephone number 96721055 upon arming the system in AWAY Mode when there is no answer you would program the following 16196721 552J00000000000000 0000 ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Dialler Information 151 Telco Disarming Sequence LOCATION 143 158 Example Example 0000000000000000 These locations allow you to automatically deactivate call diversion on your telephone when you disarm the system from AWAY Mode Digit Required Number To Program Digit Required Number To Program 3 3 11 eo o a h a eoo o ooo o Oo o Trek M _ k Table 70 Telco Arm Disarm Dialling Digits Telco Arming
186. ee eeeeeeeeeeeees 31 253 Hand Held Radio Remote Control ceeees 260 Hand Held Transmitters ccccccccccccceceseseseseseseeees 252 Handover EE AE EEEE 175 IDEE D A ET 260 Delay To Be Sequential osesseseeeeseeeeseeereseeereee 231 Handshake Extend Time To Wait cccccccccccccceseesseseseeees 158 Handshake Tone For Receiver 1 ccccececeseeeeeees 144 Handshake Tone For Receiver 2 ccccceseseseseseeees 147 Hold Down Function Arm In AWAY Mode ccceeeccsccccceceessesscessesseeeees 118 Arm In STAY Mode 1 ccceeeeccceccceeeesssseceeeeeeeenees 118 Arm In STAY Mode 2 0 ccccecceccccceesessseeeeeeeeeenees 119 Bell Pestascict sii ais a eet hee ea 119 Codepad Buzzer Tone Change 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeee 122 Fault Analysis Mode cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 120 Horn Speaker Test 0 eee ceeeeeeeeeeseeeecsseesseenee 119 Initiate Modem Call ccccccccccccccceseseseseseseseseeees 121 Reset Latching Outputs cece eeeeeceseeeeeeeee 121 Send Test Report 0 0 ee eee cesecssecseecseeeneeeeeeeeees 122 Strobe Test o diessceacuieeesseed a E ENES E e were ees 119 Turning Day Alarm On Off eee eee eee eee 120 Horn Speaker ies ccsciscouscesecien seb vhs divehous neteecoeneerseameeriens 74 Monitor tei echcccieiest cates tice cbisveleee EE 229 T KE choos ili ivebevcrebcwessutee EE suekeneseuass 119 I Installer Code ccccccccccccccccccccccececscececeesseseseeseeeees 162 Install
187. eeeeeeees 253 Hand Held Dialler Tester 00 00 eee eeeeeceneeeeeeeeees 254 Hand Held Programmer ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 253 Hand Held Transmitters 304 MhZ eeeeeees 252 Night Arm Station eee ee poene spi eese 254 Phone Controller setier penean riena 254 Programming Key s esseessesseseersereresreeresrerreereseereese 253 PS100 Power Supply Module 0 0 0 eee 254 Radio Key Keyswitch Interface eee eee 255 Solution Codepad Mimic Boatd eee 254 PROO8 Plug Pack ssc ssccscc ecsessscstestecasecassssceascebdetesteess 254 Output E ER EE ests 202 OUUPUL 2 EET 202 Output Event Type sssrini sssri i aas 204 AG Fad EPEE TOAT 206 AC Mains 60 Hz or 50 HZ 210 Alarm When In AWAY Mod e eesceereeeseeeeee 208 Alarm When In STAY Mode ceeceeseeeneeeneeeeee 207 Any Areas Armed oriee eisene ainai a a 211 Any Areas Disarmed ceeceesceceeeeeeneeceeeeeeneeeeee 211 Area 1 Codepad Data Terminal ee 212 Area Has Zone Unsealed eeeeeeseeceereeeneeeee 211 Area 1 In Alarm 0 cee eeseceseceeseeceseceeeeeceseeeeneeeeees 211 Area Is Armed eee eeeceseeeeseeceseeeeeeeeceseeeeneeoeee 211 Area 1 Is Disarmed eeeceeeeesseceeeeeeneceeneeenseeeeee 211 Area 2 Codepad Data Terminal eee 212 Area 2 Has Zone Unsealed eeeeeceesseceereeeneeeeee 211 Area 2 In Alarm ceeeeeseccsseceeseeceseceenceceseeeeeeeeeees 211 Area 2 Is Armed cee eesecceseceeseecesseceeececeseeeeneeceee 21
188. eets 299 Location 344 345 Page 194 System Status Fuse Fail Report 10 3 Location 346 3470 EEE Page 194 System Status Fuse Fail Restore Report Location 348 349 Page 195 System Status AC Fail Report 10 2 Location 350 351 Page 195 System Status AC Fail Restore Report 10 7 Location 352 353 EE Page 196 System Status Low Battery Report Location 354 355 000 EE Page 197 System Status Low Battery Restore Report Location 356 358 EEE Page 197 System Status Access Denied Location 356 Code Retries y Location 357 Reporting Code Tens Digit 617112 Location 358 Reporting Code Units Digit Location 359 EEE Page 198 0 No Report Required System Status Reporting Options Teese 2 Receiver 2 4 Receiver 1 2 8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails ocatign 360 368 T A pio umG turning E UC Uy tyra myrrh nanpiripngnigiiT an pay Page 198 Test Reporting Time Location 360 Actual Hour Of The Day Tens Digit P g Location 361 Actual Hour Of The Day Units Digit Location 362 Actual Minute Of The Day Tens Digit Location 363 Actual Minute Of The Day Units Digit Location 364 Test Report Code Tens Digit Location 365 Test Report Code Units Digit fo ofojo 7 1 o Location 366 Repeat Interval In Days Location 3867 ea ee ee Page 199 Test Reporting Dialler Options 0 Ne Repor negurEG 1 Receiver 1 2 Receiver 2 4 Receiver 1 2 8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails Location 368 397 Page 202 Ou
189. el when the system is disarmed A zero programmed into this location will allow defaulting of the control panel If 15 has been programmed into this location defaulting of the control panel will not be permitted and the Installer Code MUST be used for further programming of the control panel If the Installer Code is not known the control panel will need to be returned to your EDM Distributor for exchange A nominal fee applies for this service Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited does not recommend the use of this feature If the option is required to disable the option of being able to default the control panel a special procedure has been implemented to eliminate the possibility of accidentally setting this option The default button on the PCB must be held down while programming this location How To Prevent Manual Defaulting Of The Control Panel 1 Enter Installer s Programming Mode i e 1 2 3 4 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the data currently programmed in LOCATION 000 will be displayed via the hand held programmer or remote codepad If you are using a remote codepad the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash to indicate that Installer s Programming Mode has been accessed 2 From the hand held programmer or remote codepad go to LOCATION 900 e g 90 0 followed by the button 3 Hold down and continue to hold down the DEFAULT button The default button will be located
190. eld radio transmitters can be used to arm and disarm your system or cause a panic alarm Lockout dialler means that the dialler will only activate once per zone per arming cycle Lockout siren means that the sirens will only activate once per zone per arming cycle Is a numerical code used for arming and disarming the system as well as allowing access to all functions that are programmable through the codepad Is a secure location where a digital receiver monitors numerous alarm systems and deciphers their alarm transmission reports so that the operator can advise the appropriate authorities to take immediate action This is a type of alarm raised by you to indicate to the monitoring station that there is an emergency situation at your premises Is a device used for arming your system via the telephone line It is also used to acknowledge domestic alarm reports The Solut ion 880 control panel may be set up to transform your single control panel and split the system into two separate controllable areas Partitioning is extremely useful when you wish to secure sheds dual occupancy dwellings granny flats shops and offices A radio user code that is used to arm and disarm the system remotely via hand held transmitters in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 Remote panic alarms are also allowed Refers to a zones status If a zone is sealed the detection devices are not violated and the zone indicator will be extinguished i e a reed switch is closed
191. eld transmitters can remotely arm and disarm the system in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 and activate remote panic alarms However the 4 channel hand held transmitter has the added ability to operate the control panel s programmable outputs allowing you to activate a garage door or outside lights etc Before any hand held radio transmitter can operate the control panel you will need to teach the control panel the transmitters radio code Refer to Changing Or Deleting Remote Radio User Codes on page 79 for more information Indications Upon Remote Radio Transmitter Operations When using either the 2 channel or 4 channel hand held transmitters to operate the system audible and or visual indications can be provided via the horn speakers or the strobe This will allow you to operate the system from outside the premises with confidence Only the installer can program the feature of audible and or visual indication beeps Refer to Option 4 Allow Strobe Indications For Radio Arm Disarm and Option 8 Allow Horn Speaker Beeps For Radio Arm Disarm in LOCATION 424 on page 229 for more information No Of Beeps System Status System Disarmed System Armed In AWAY Mode System Armed In STAY Mode 1 Beep Table 31 Horn Speaker Indication Beeps For Remote Operations Strobe Duration System Status 3 Seconds System Disarmed System Armed In AWAY Mode System Armed In STAY Mode 1 Table 32 Strobe Indications For Remote Operations Rem
192. ellite Siren Service Mode 9 Ce 7 DE Turning Telephone Monitor Mode On Off Walk Test Mode 97 Event Memory Recall Mode 8 Ce ieee oo Table 35 Installer Code Functions Reserved Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions Example F 87 Set The Number Of Days Until The First Test Report If you require the first test to report Contact ID Event Code 602 the day after you are installing the control panel and you have programmed the repeat interval between each test report for every 7 days you will need to set when the first test report will occur If the first test report is not set using this Installer Code Function the first test report will be sent to the base station receiver in the number of days programmed in the repeat interval Refer to LOCATION 360 366 on page 199 for setting the test report time and repeat interval How To Set The First Test Report 1 Enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 1 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter the No oF Days to wait 1 15 days until the first test report is required 3 Press the button when finished Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish The system will now return to the disarmed state RSTALER CODE 1 Ww Re OF AVS fawn Each time you enter Installer s Programming Mode after you have set when the fir
193. emember to substitute the default Master Code 2580 with the Master Code that has been programmed E 2580 1 0m 2 4627 mw ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 101 How To Delete A User Code 1 Enter your followed by 1 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter the USER NUMBER 1 8 that you wish to delete followed by the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding ZONE indicator will illuminate Refer to Table 44 Codepad Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers on page 101 3 Press the LSTA button to delete the user code Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish If you wish to delete any further user codes repeat this procedure as many times as required F pes 1 ara USER NUMBER AWAY STAY When deleting user codes this function will automatically terminate if a button is not hide f pressed within sixty seconds or by pressing the LA AY button One long beep indicates an incorrect user number has been selected ve Zone I Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8 vanes Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Table 44 Codepad Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers Example If you wish to delete user code number 3 follow the steps outlined below and remember to substitute the default Mas
194. emory To Control Panel Using Hand Held Programmer 1 Before connecting the hand held programmer onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position and that no external key has been plugged onto the hand held programmer 2 Enter Installer s Programming Mode i e 1 2 3 4 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the hand held programmer will display the data currently programmed in LOCATION 000 3 Plug the programming key onto the pins marked EXTERNAL KEY on the hand held programmer 4 Enter command 9 6 3 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard after the programming key s data has successfully been copied into to the control panel If you heard a long beep after issuing this command the programming key has become corrupt and will need to be erased to clear the corrupt data Refer to Command 964 Erase Programming Key on page 42 for more information 5 Before removing the programming key from the hand held programmer enter command 9 6 0 followed by the button to exit Installer s Programming Mode Two beeps will be heard and the system will now return to the disarmed state Failing to exit Installer s Programming Mode before removing the programming key may result in corrupting the programming key Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 42 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Command 964 Erase P
195. en reconnected after the system has been powered down If this option is not selected the system will always power up armed in AWAY Mode Arm Disarm Tracking On Power Up 2 If enabled the control panel will keep its current armed status in non volatile memory If for any reason the control panel is restarted due to a power failure the control panel will return to the armed or disarmed status that the control panel was in before the power failed Example If the system was disarmed prior to the system being powered down when the system is powered back up the system will return to the disarmed state Internal Crystal To Keep Time 4 If this option has been selected it will force the control panel not to use the mains frequency as a time base to keep time The control panel will use the internal crystal XTAL to keep track of time This option is useful in countries that do not have a constant mains frequency Keyswitch Interface Night Arm Station Or RE005 Installed 8 This option must be selected when using the Radio Key Keyswitch Interface CC813 2 Channel Radio Interface RE005 or the Night Arm Station CP105 This option allows the control panel to be operated using either of these three accessories User Code 16 will be used when reporting open close reports via any of these accessories Using a Solution 880 control panel that has been partitioned the Night Arm Station will not operate the system ISSUE140 Electronics Design
196. en the system has been disarmed System Disarmed This output will operate when the system is in the disarmed state The output will reset as soon as the system becomes armed Armed In STAY Mode This output will operate when the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 The output will reset when the system is disarmed Armed In AWAY Mode This output will operate when the system has been armed in AWAY Mode The output will reset when the system is disarmed Auto Arm Pre Arming Alert Time This output will operate during the time period before the control panel will automatically arm in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 Once the control panel has automatically armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 the output will reset To program the pre arming alert time refer to LOCATION 413 on page 222 Exit Warning With All Zones Sealed Or Entry Warning This output will operate during exit time when the control panel has been armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 if all zones are sealed This output event type will reset once exit time has expired The next time this output event type will operate will be during entry time and will reset once entry time has expired or the system has been disarmed This output event type will also operate if a zone has triggered when the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 only if the Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode has been programmed in LOCATION 404 405 on page 219 Exit Warning
197. enes 58 239 Zone Indicators ssrin as rakirin is 57 238 Medical Alarm iranere e ue re anera a a 69 Modem Call nee EE ii ER S 121 Modem Module cece eeseeseeescesecesecesecssesseesneeees 129 Monitoring Station 0 eee ee ceeecese cee cess ceeeeeeeeeeeees 260 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Index N New Zealand Telepermit Notes ccesscesseeeneeeees 272 Night Arm Station eee eee cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 232 254 O OFF Indicator Zone Sealed 0 0 eee ceeeeeeneeceeeeeeneeeeeees 55 ON Indicator Zone In Alarm eee eeeeesseceeeeeeteceenees 55 Open Close Reports 0 0 eee eee eseereeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaeeaes 191 TS TAY Modes ccssic ite i elie hed 158 Only If Previous Alarm Has Occurred 0 158 Reporting Options ee ee eeeesecese cee cneeceeeteeeees 191 Operating Remote Outputs Via Transmitter 0 83 Option Bits sic tiv usere eerten e ia E hl Gate ses 34 Optional Equipment 2 Channel Radio Interface ee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeee 252 2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface ee eeeeeeee 255 304 Mhz RF Receiver 00 eee ceeeceeseecsseeeeeeeesseeeeees 252 Alarm Link Software eiceeeeesseceereeesseceesreeeneeeeee 253 Cellular Dialers nmi neie eea 254 CP5 Eight Zone Area Addressable 0 eee 253 CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad ee eee 253 CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad uu eee 253 CP5 Master Partitioned Codepad eee 253 EDMSAT Satellite Siren 0 ee ee ceeeeess
198. ent for the time period programmed whilst the system is disarmed The sensor watch fault will clear after the registered zone has been unsealed and resealed again To find out which zone has registered the sensor watch fault hold down the 5 button whilst in fault analysis mode to display the zone that has registered the sensor watch fault Refer to Sensor Watch Time on page 220 for setting sensor watch time and Zone Options 1 on page 179 for setting zones to be monitored for sensor watch When reporting to the base station receiver a Self Test Fail report Contact ID Event Code 307 will be used to indicate the sensor watch fault Horn Speaker Monitor A horn speaker monitor fault will register when the horn speaker becomes disconnected from the control panel This fault will clear when the horn speaker has been reconnected Refer to LOCATION 424 on page 229 to enable monitoring of the horn speaker Telephone Line Fault A telephone line fault will register when the telephone line has been disconnected from the control panel for more than 40 seconds This fault can only occur if Option 1 in LOCATION 176 on page 153 has been selected The fault will clear once the telephone line has been reconnected for more than 40 seconds F Fault An E fault will register when the control panel detects an internal checksum error The control panel will need to be powered down and defaulted to clear this fault Electronics Design and Man
199. er it is possible to store 4 or more different telephone numbers for domestic dialling If both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 have been set up for domestic reporting format you would still have 48 data locations and both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 would use the same domestic telephone numbers The ability to program separate domestic telephone numbers for Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 is not available for domestic dialling format Refer to Setting Up and Programming Domestic Reporting on page 133 for more information Domestic Dialling Function When the control panel has activated into alarm condition it will commence dialling the first telephone number programmed If a busy or engaged tone has been detected the control panel will hang up and commence dialling the second telephone number if one is programmed However the first call will be counted as one unsuccessful dialling attempt If the second telephone number is also busy or an engaged tone is detected the control panel will hang up and commence dialling the third telephone number if one is programmed or return to the first telephone number If a busy tone is not detected the control panel will assume that the telephone has been answered and will begin sending its transmission The transmission sequence consists of an identification beep followed by a siren tone and a long pause The transmission sequence will repeat itself until the control panel receives an acknowledgment tone during the
200. er Code Function Change Telco Arm Disarm Sequence 90 106 Changing Domestic Phone Numberts 0004 88 Event Memory Recall oo eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 98 Satellite Siren Service Mode 96 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Set First Test Report ccs ese cseeereeeeeeeeeeees 87 Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones eee eee 95 111 Telephone Monitor Mode eceeceeeeeseeeseeseeereeeees 97 Walk Test Moderens epeei a 97 Installer s Programming Commands 958 Enable Disable Zone Status 0 0 0 eee 36 959 Test Programming Key eee cece eee ereeeeee 37 960 Exit Installer s Programming Mode 39 961 Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default 39 962 Copy Panel Memory To Programming Key 40 963 Copy From Programming Key To Panel 41 964 Erase Programming Key sssr 42 965 Set Up Domestic Dialling 00 43 966 Automatic Stepping Of Locations 00 0 44 999 Display Panel Type Software Version Number aE aa estes chest a co EEE T tev abt tasaste dy Eia 46 Internal Crystal To Keep Time 232 TintrO duction vss3 sscesses sfesscausstscessestesiact stesaseesdstesbdeabtegens 18 Invalid Code si 3 essc sie ot siesscstssessecteteast ots 197 220 230 Isolate In STAY Mode 10 ceeceeeeseecseeeeeeeeeeees 183 Isolating AllOWed 0 eee eeeeceeeceeeceseecnsecaeeeseeeeeeeeeees 183 Isolating ZONES stireria ressonen iero Teses eroi aa a ess stes
201. esign and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 196 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual System Status Low Battery Report LOCATION 352 353 1 Location Description System Status Low Battery Reporting Code Tens Digit System Status Low Battery Reporting Code Units Digit Table 106 System Status Low Battery Report Locations A Battery Test Failure report Contact ID Event Code 309 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the systems battery voltage falls below 10 5 volts or when a dynamic battery test detects a low capacity battery The control panel continually monitors the battery voltage Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 74 for more information A dynamic battery test is performed every time the system has been armed as well as every four hours from power up of the control panel cate If a Low Battery report is not required program LOCATION 352 353 with a zero Outputs 1 4 will NOT operate whilst the control panel detects a low battery System Status Low Battery Restore Report LOCATION 354 355 6 Location Description System Status Low Battery Restore Report Tens Digit System Status Low Battery Restore Report Units Digit Table 107 System Status Low Battery Restore Report Locations A Low Battery restore report will be transmitted if the back up battery has been restored the next time the system has been armed or when the next dynamic bat
202. etailed description on each fault type How To Determine The Type Of Fault 1 Hold the D button down until two beeps are heard The STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash in unison with the FAULT indicator One or more ZONE indicators 1 8 will illuminate to indicate the type of fault that has occurred How To Exit Fault Analysis Mode 1 To exit fault analysis mode press the button The STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish and return you to the disarmed state AWAY Zone Indicator Fault Description 4 Hon Speaker Disoomneaed Oe ee 8 o O Table 53 Fault Indicators Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 121 Initiate A Modem Call Holding the 6 button down until two beeps are heard will force the control panel to dial the call back telephone number programmed in LOCATION 159 174 on page 151 in an attempt to connect to the installer s remote computer The remote computer will be required to be running the Alarm Link Software CC816 and will need to be set to Waiting For An Incoming Call If no call back telephone number has been programmed holding down the 6 button will have no effect Reset Latching Outputs Holding the 7 button down until two beeps are heard will reset any programmable output that has been programmed to remain on once it has been activated The output will need to be programmed with a latching polarity Refer to Output Polarity on page 2
203. event Resetting a 24 hour alarm in the disarmed state is indicated by one beep only After the last event three beeps will be heard to indicate the end of playback The replay of event memory can be terminated at any time by pressing the AWAY button If the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 the STAY indicator will display during the event memory playback There is no differentiation between arming the system in STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 If the control panel has been powered down the memory of all events will be lost Reserved Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 99 Master Code Functions Master Code Functions are designed to allow those users that have the appropriate priority level to perform certain functions of a supervisory level These functions can only be carried out when the system is in the disarmed state The default Master Code is 2 5 8 O and is known as User Code 1 It is possible for the system to have multiple Master Codes Refer to User Code Priority on page 165 for more information To enter the required Master Code function enter the followed by the required FUNCTION digit and the button All available Master Code functions are listed in Table 43 Master Code Functions outlined below WASTER CODE FUNCTION Function Description Page 0 Arm Or Disarm Both Areas At The Same Time 99 Changing and Deleting User Codes Radio Codes 100 102
204. fault has been detected e g FAULT indicator flashing the codepad will begin to beep once every minute Pressing the Away button once will cancel the once a minute beep and acknowledge the fault e g FAULT indicator on Indicator Definition a OE There Is A System Fault That Needs To Be Rectified Off The System Is Normal There Are No Faults Flashing There Is A System Fault Waiting To Be Acknowledged Table 149 FAULT Indicator Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Partitioning 241 Audible Indicators In general the audible indications given out by the codepad are as follows Indicator Definition A Button Has Been Pressed On The Codepad Or End One Short Beep Of Exit Time When Armed In Either STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 Two Short Beeps The System Has Accepted Your Code Three Short Beeps The Requested Function Has Been Executed One L B Indicates The End Of Exit Time In AWAY Mode Or AOE SEEP The Requested Operation Has Been Denied Or Aborted Walk Test Mode Is Currently Active Or Warning One Short Beep Every Second Before Automatic Arming Takes Place Oneshort Beep Every ano Telephone Monitor Mode Is Active Seconds One Short Beep Every Minute There Is A System Fault Waiting To Be Acknowledged Table 150 Audible Indications Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 242 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Operating Codepads In Partitioning ISSUE140 Example Ope
205. ffective An opening report will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the system has been disarmed after an alarm has occurred When the system has been armed a closing report will be transmitted An opening or closing report will not report again until the system has registered another alarm condition E If the system is disarmed when an alarm occurs only a closing report will be transmitted when the system is next armed Open Close Reports For STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 2 If open and close reports are required when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 this option will need to be selected This option requires Open Close reports in LOCATION 333 334 to be enabled on page 191 for it to be effective Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete 4 If this option has been selected the EDMSAT horn speaker bell and strobe outputs will not activate until the base station receiver has sent a kiss off back to the control panel after the message has been transmitted If multiple messages are transmitted the sirens will activate after the last kiss off has been sent However the EDMSAT horn speaker bell and strobe outputs will activate as soon as a codepad panic codepad fire and codepad medical alarms have been activated Extend Time To Wait For Handshake From 30 55 Seconds 8 The control panel after dialling the monitoring station will wait approximately 30 seconds for receipt of a valid handshake tone T
206. for this method to operate LOCATION 159 174 on page 151 should be programmed as zeros Option 1 in LOCATION 180 on page 129 160 will need to be enabled and Option 2 needs to be disabled The control panel will now allow a connection of the first call without calling the remote computer back to make contact Method Two Method two allows you to program a call back telephone number so that the customer can still initiate a modem call when required but when calling the control panel via the computer from any remote location the control panel does not call back the remote computer to establish a link LOCATION 159 174 on page 151 should have the call back telephone number programmed if required Option 1 in LOCATION 180 on page 129 160 will need to be enabled and Option 2 needs to be disabled The control panel will now allow a connection of the first call without calling the remote computer back to make contact but still allow the customer to initiate a modem call by holding down the 6 button when required Remote Connect With Call Back Verification Remote connect with call back verification offers the highest degree of data security by incorporating a two level security check The first is the Installer Code combined with the Subscriber ID Number needs to match that of the control panel Secondly the control panel will call back the programmed call back telephone number to establish the valid connection The Call Back Telep
207. fter the last digit of the call forward sequence has been displayed Enter stay 1 2 1 followed by the you wish the control panel to divert all calls to followed by stay 2 and the button Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state aww 1 foo E1 2 1 e Sax ow If you wish to automatically divert all incoming calls to another telephone number e g 9672 1777 when the system is armed in AWAY Mode follow the example sequence below and replace the telephone number mentioned in the manual with the telephone number that you wish to divert all calls to Remember to substitute the default Master Code 2580 with the Master Code that has been programmed 2580 3 AW m a ee EF How To Disable The Telco Arming Sequence If at any time you wish to cancel the telco arming sequence you may enter your MASTER CODE followed by 3 and the away button followed by 1 and the button then the stay button followed by the 4 and the button WASTER CODE e 1 fom E4 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 110 ISSUE140 EF Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual How To Program The Telco Disarming Sequence Easy Call Forward Immediate Off 1 Enter your MASTER Cone followed by 3 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Press button 2 followed by the away button to change
208. g functions Simply wait for a pause in the tones and follow step 2 to remotely arm the system 3 After releasing the button on the phone controller or the button on the touch tone telephone two beeps will be heard to indicate that the system has armed in AWAY Mode 4 Hang up the telephone and the system will remain armed If the control panel does not answer the call this means that the system may already be armed remote functions have not been enabled or the ring count has been set to zero Refer to Option 2 in LOCATION 177 on page 157 to enable remote arming via the telephone and LOCATION 175 on page 152 to set the number of rings before the control panel will answer Where both remote arming and Upload Download via the Installer s remote computer have been selected the control panel will answer the call expecting the remote computer This is easily noticed as the modem negotiating tones will be heard rather than the remote arming jingle If you attempt to arm a Solution 880 control panel that has been partitioned both areas will arm in AWAY Mode Arming individual areas is not available using this method Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Alarm Link Operations 126 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Alarm Link Software ISSUE140 The Solution 844 862 880 control panel can be remotely programmed or controlled via an IBM or compatible personal computer via the Alarm Link Software CC816
209. g the button a second time will toggle you back to display information for Area 1 Area Display Indicators Definition a OES Indicates Current Area Being Displayed Off Indicates Current Area Not Being Displayed Table 24 Area Display Indicators Status Indicators A group of four indicators display the following PARTIAL Indicator The PARTIAL indicator is used to display that the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 The PARTIAL indicator will also flash in unison with the AUX indicator when Installer s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions are used For the different methods of arming the system in STAY Mode 1 refer to page 64 Refer to Zone Options on page 173 for information on setting zones to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1 Indicator Definition a OES System Is Armed In STAY Mode 1 Off System Is Not Armed In STAY Mode 1 Table 25 Partial Indicator AUX Indicator If Option 8 in LOCATION 432 on page 243 has been enabled the AUX indicator will be used to display when the control panel is using the telephone line The AUX indicator will also flash in unison with the PARTIAL indicator when Installer s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions are used Indicator Definition a ee System Is Armed In STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 Off System Is Not Armed In STAY Mode Flashing Zone Isolating Mode Or Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones Table 26 AUX Indicator Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Lim
210. ge 195 Zone Pulse Count Handover 4 If this option has been selected any zone pulse count readings will handover and accumulate to any zone that is triggered during the same arming cycle Zone pulse count handover will only operate with zone pulse count options 8 15 Refer to Zone Pulse Count on page 177 and Zone Pulse Count Time on page 178 for more information ati o 24 hour zones do not receive any handover pulses from other zones 24 hour zones can handover pulses to other zones Handover Delay To Be Sequential 8 If this option has been selected handover delay will be sequential i e In numerical order from lowest to highest If the sequence is broken before the entry time expires an alarm will occur If this option has not been selected handover delay will follow the entry path provided that a delay zone has been triggered first Refer to Handover Zone on page 175 for more information Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 232 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual System Options 4 LOCATION 427 0 Option Description Panel To Power Up Disarmed If Power Reset Internal Crystal To Keep Time Keyswitch Interface Night Arm Station Or RE005 Installed Table 138 System Options 4 Arm Disarm Tracking On Power Up Panel To Power Up Disarmed If Power Reset If this option has been selected the control panel will power up in the disarmed state once the battery and AC mains have be
211. gn and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 222 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Auto Arming Pre Alert Timer LOCATION 413 1 Location Description 413 Increments Of 5 Minutes 0 75 Minutes Table 125 Auto Arming Pre Alert Timer Location This location sets the time period that will warn you before the control panel will automatically arm in AWAY Mode The codepad will beep once every second until the pre alert timer has expired after this time the system will automatically arm itself in AWAY Mode If you require the system to automatically arm in STAY Mode 1 enable Option 4 in LOCATION 428 on page 233 Once the control panel has automatically armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 exit time will commence If a valid user code is entered during the pre alert time the auto arming time as programmed in LOCATION 414 417 will extend by one hour If you require a programmable output to operate during the auto arming pre alert time refer to Output Event Type Auto Arm Pre Arming Alert Time on page 204 Auto Arming Time LOCATION 414 417 0000 Location Description Actual Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Actual Hour Of The Day Units Digit Table 126 Auto Arming Time Locations These locations are used to program the actual time of the day that the system will automatically arm itself in AWAY Mode This time must be set in 24 hour format i e 10 30 PM would be programmed as 2230 Refer to Option 4 in
212. grammer onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position and that no external key has been plugged onto the hand held programmer Enter Installer s Programming Mode i e 1 2 3 4 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the hand held programmer will display the data currently programmed in LOCATION 000 Plug the programming key onto the pins marked EXTERNAL KEY on the hand held programmer Enter command 9 6 2 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard after the control panel memory has successfully been copied into the programming key If you heard a long beep after issuing this command the programming key has become corrupt and will need to be erased to clear the corrupt data Refer to Command 964 Erase Programming Key on page 42 for more information Before removing the programming key from the hand held programmer enter command 9 6 0 followed by the button to exit Installer s Programming Mode Two beeps will be heard and the system will now return to the disarmed state Failing to exit Installer s Programming Mode before removing the programming key may result in corrupting the programming key Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 41 Command 963 Copy From Programming Key To Control Panel This command is used to copy data from the programming key to the control panel Only the Programming Key CC891 ma
213. gramming key to the control panel To connect the programming key locate the socket marked PROGRAMMING KEY found at the top of the PCB printed circuit board next to the Auxiliary Module socket Observe the triangular markings on the printed circuit board and line them up with the markings on the programming key To copy the control panel s data into the programming key access Installer s Programming Mode e g 12 34 followed by the button and enter Installer s Programming Command 9 6 2 followed by the button Refer to Command 962 Copy Control Panel Memory To Programming Key on page 40 for further information To exit the Installer s Programming Mode enter command 9 60 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state Before removing the programming key wait two seconds for the activity LED to return to its normal state The programming key will now become your standard data pattern for future programming of your control panels It should be noted that when entering the Installer s Programming Mode inserting a programming key and then changing any location will cause a simultaneous update of not only the programming keys data but also the control panels data Therefore you are not able to change data in the programming key without the same location being changed in the control panels memory Connecting a Programming Key CC891 to the control panel when the programming keys
214. h to the JP3 terminals D and GND to remotely arm and disarm the system in AWAY Mode ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Partitioning 238 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual The Solut ion 880 control panel includes a feature called partitioning which can effectively transform your single control panel and split the system into two separate controllable areas Normally arming and disarming the system would turn the entire system on or off However when the Solution 880 control panel has been partitioned you may arm or disarm an individual area without affecting the other area Partitioning is extremely useful when you wish to secure sheds dual occupancy dwellings granny flats shops and offices When partitioning only the CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad and the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad can be used CP5 Master Partitioned LED Codepad This codepad is only used on the Solution 880 control panel when partitioned The Master Partitioned LED codepad will allow the user to operate both areas individually from the same codepad without the need to operate individual areas from separate codepads Solution 4 237 Zones 3 it 2 3 4 Area On Off B F B gt p f 2 Area Display The codepad is the communications interface between you and your alarm system The codepad allows you to issue commands and offers both visual and audible indications
215. have no effect on remote arming via the telephone Refer to Ring Count on page 152 for programming the number of rings before the control panel will answer an incoming call Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed 4 This option needs to be selected if the answering machine bypass feature is required to operate only when the system has been armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 When the system is disarmed the control panel will not answer any incoming calls This option is beneficial in high telephone traffic installations where the control panel could answer an incoming call Refer to Ring Count on page 152 to program answering machine bypass Use Bell 103 For FSK Format Disabled CCITT V21 8 If this option is enabled the control panel will use the transmission frequency BELL 103 at 300 baud If this option is disabled the control panel will use the transmission frequency CCITT V21 at 300 baud Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 158 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Dialler Options 2 LOCATION 178 0 Description Open Close Reports Only If Previous Alarm Open Close Reports For STAY Mode and STAY Mode 2 Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete Extend Time To Wait For Handshake From 30 To 55 Seconds Table 75 Dialler Options 2 Open Close Reports Only If Previous Alarm This option requires Open Close reports in LOCATION 333 334 to be enabled on page 191 for it to be e
216. he Installer s Programming Mode has been entered To issue the command required enter the corresponding numerical code followed by the button Command Description Page a eecenmee ee aise ia Oe Poe This Command Displays The Control Panel s Software Version Number Or 46 Control Panel Type Table 7 Installer s Programming Commands Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 36 ISSUE140 Example Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Command 958 Enable Disable Zone Status Mode This function enables and disables the zone status display mode when using the hand held programmer The hand held programmer will display the zones on the seven segment display from left to right If there is a dash illuminated on the display of the hand held programmer the corresponding zone is unsealed and if the display is blank the zone is sealed The third or centre display shows either the number 4 or the number 8 The number 4 constantly illuminated indicates that zones 4 are being displayed The number 8 constantly illuminated indicates that zones 5 8 are being displayed Pressing the button will toggle the display between the zones This feature will prove to be very useful during installation as the hand held programmer allows you to view the status of the zones directly at the control panel saving you time and money How To Enable Zone Status Mode 1 Enter Installers Programming Mode i e
217. he handshake tone indicates to the control panel that it has reached the monitoring station and can now transmit its messages Enabling this option will extend the wait time from 30 seconds to 55 seconds ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Dialler Options 159 Dialler Options 3 LOCATION 179 0 Description Set DTMF Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit Second Reserved Change Decadic Dialling To 60 40 8 Reserved Table 76 Dialler Options 3 Set DTMF Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit Second If this option is not selected the dialling format Australian DTMF dials at the rate of 5 digits per second i e 100 ms tone 100 ms pause 100 ms tone 100 ms pause If this option has been selected the dialling format Australian DTMF dials at the rate of 1 digit per second i e 500 ms tone 500 ms pause Reserved Change Decadic Dialling To 60 40 4 Some countries have different requirements for decadic dialling Setting this option will change the dialling characteristics from 65 35 Australian Standard to 60 40 This option should only be set when the control panel is used in a country that requires decadic dialling as 60 40 This option has no effect when using DTMF tone dialling Reserved Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 160 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Alarm Link Options LOCATION 180 3 Description Upload Download Allowed Call Back Phone Number Required
218. heard after entering this mode These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the last phone number has been displayed 2 Enter all the digits for PHONE No 1 one digit at a time You will notice as each digit is entered the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate 3 If there is more than one telephone number press the stay button followed by the 4 button after the last digit of the telephone number This will insert a break between the first telephone number and the second telephone number If there is only one phone number press the button to exit this mode 4 Enter all the digits for PHONE No 2 one digit at a time You will notice as each digit is entered the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate 5 After the last digit of the second telephone number press the button to exit this mode unless a third telephone number is required If there is a third telephone number to be programmed press the button followed by the 4 button to insert a break between the second telephone number and the third telephone E 2 Rw PHONE No 1 STAY 4 PHONE No 2 away Digit Required Number To Program Digit Required Number To Program a9 Refer To Digit O pos 3 ou gt Frottowea By 1 o oa Fottowe By 2 pe 6 Brek Fotlowed By 4 Table 36 Domestic Dialling Digits ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 89 Example If
219. her programming changes required may also be made otherwise the factory default settings will be used Refer to Test Reporting Time on page 199 for more information on programming test reports Enter Installer s Command 9 6 O followed by the AWAY button to exit Installer s Programming Mode Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish The system has now returned to the disarmed state and is now ready for use Refer to Installer s Programming Commands on page 35 for more information Use the Master Code to set the date and time Refer to How To Set The New Date and Time on page 23 for more information Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Introduction 23 How To Set The New Date and Time 1 Enter your followed by 6 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 1 2 Enter the day month year hour and minute using the DD MM YY HH MM format i e DD Day of the month MM Month of the year YY Current year HH Hour of the day MM Minute of the day Please note that when programming the hour of the day you will need to use 24 00 hour format 3 Press the button when finished Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish If a long beep is heard an error was made when entering the date and time ASTER CODE 6 Ruan DD MM Y Y HH MM aww Example If the date and time nee
220. holder to add change or delete any of the system user codes When using a Solution 880 control panel that has been partitioned user codes cannot be added changed or deleted by the Master Code holder unless they the user code have been allocated to an area or the same area as the Master Code Refer to User Code Allocations on page 247 for more information How To Add Or Change A User Code 1 Enter your MASTER Cone followed by 1 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter the USER NUMBER 1 8 that you wish to change followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding ZONE indicator will illuminate Refer to Table 44 Codepad Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers on page 101 3 Enter the digits required for the New cone followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish If you wish to change any further user codes repeat this procedure as many times as required e SRo 1 aw USER NUMBER AWAY NEW CODE away When adding or changing user codes this function will automatically terminate if a ee button is not pressed within sixty seconds or by pressing the button One long ues beep indicates the code entered already exists or an incorrect user number has been selected Example If you require to program user code number 2 as 4627 follow the steps outlined below and r
221. hone Number is the telephone line that the modem and computer has been connected to LOCATION 159 174 on page 151 must be programmed with the Call Back Telephone Number and both Option 1 and Option 2 in LOCATION 180 on page 129 160 will need to be enabled Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 128 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Direct Connect The direct connect feature has been incorporated giving the installer a simple method for programming the Solut ion 844 862 880 control panel at the office or on site visits using a portable computer There is no need for telephone lines or modems that makes programming of the control panel completed easily in minutes All that is required is the Direct Link Cable CC808 connected to the correct serial port on your IBM or compatible computer and the other end to the auxiliary module socket on the control panel When using the direct connect method of connecting to the control panel Option 1 in LOCATION 180 on page 129 160 does not require to be enabled The direct connect method of programming or operating the control panel will operate regardless of this option being set Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Alarm Link Operations 129 Alarm Link Options LOCATION 180 3 Description Enable Upload Download Via Alarm Link Enable Alarm Link Call Back Terminate Alarm Link Connection On Alarm 8 Use External M
222. ia na R onto S TiN 218 Entry Warming eei ea a a E S cette 259 EOL Resistor Valterra 170 Erase Programming Key cssccesscecsseceeeeceeeeeeneecees 42 Event Memory Recall Mode ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 98 116 Exit Installer s Programming Mode eee 39 Exit TUM ss en se re ene E E Gating 219 260 External Equipment esesseessseeesseeeerssrsresrrsreeressrsrees 260 ISSUE140 306 F Fault AC Mains Failure Ea EEE eas 76 Beeps irean annee e a e aari 235 Communication Failure ccccccccccceccseseseseseseeeeees 75 Date and Time sninen erne e eee eie 74 E2 Falhon anna a A a a aas 74 Fuse Fail a ecko Son o ENa Ta ER TSE SaaS 75 Horn Speaker esiin ticket ude oss 74 LOW Battery an eena Gill aor tele hene 74 SEnSOL Watchin n e a i eei 74 Telephone Line Fault eee ceeceesseceeneeeeteeeeeeers 74 Fault Analysis Mode eeeceeeeceeecreeeeeeeeeeeeeerees 73 Determine Types secs ssceceeysseeesepsspessedsteetsceseeprecoepeots 120 EKA obs EES PEE TEE E EEEE ERTE 120 FAULT Indicator cccceesscseceeeeeeees 51 55 59 240 Features Solution 404 0 hE ee e E 19 Solution 40O rres nne eie aet a iien 20 Solution 408 resisa eei iet oe ineas 21 Fire Alarmi et onae irena ana aee ieties 69 Forced Arming 62 65 67 183 260 Puse PAra a nna a e ae 75 G Glossary Of TermS eesessesseseeeersererrsrrersserresresreeresse 259 H Hand Held Dialler Tester eeeeeeeeeseeesesererererereren 254 Hand Held Programmer e
223. ical To Be Silent 000 eee 230 Codepad Panic on aa 69 192 230 Codepad Panic Report ssessseseeeseseeerssreeresrrrreereserens 192 Codepad Panic To Be Silent eee eee eeeeeeeeees 230 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Index Codepad Reporting Options 0 0 eee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeee 194 Codepads CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad eee eee 53 CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad eee ee eee 50 CP5 Master Partitioned Codepad eee 238 Command 958 Enable Disable Zone Status 36 Command 959 Test Programming Key eee 37 Command 960 Exit Installer s Programming Mode 39 Command 961 Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Detaultiecnon5 Mei ie Ses a i 39 Command 962 Copy Control Panel Memory To Programming Key 0 cece eeeecseesceeeeeeeceseesseeeeeenes 40 Command 963 Copy From Programming Key To Control Panelne nisi ie te ieseee bende eek 41 Command 964 Erase Programming Key 0 42 Command 965 Set Up Domestic Dialling 000000 43 Command 966 Enable Disable Automatic Stepping 44 Command 999 Display Panel Type Software Version46 Communication Failure eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeerees 75 Component Overlay occ eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaee 263 Connections Of Split EOL Using N O Contacts 172 Consumer Options 1 0 0 ee ee eeeeseceseceeeneeeeee 233 234 Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 nosses 233 Enable STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status EE E E s
224. icators Refer to Table 39 Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence on page 90 for the indicators and their meanings If no telco disarming sequence has been programmed a further two beeps will be heard after entering this mode These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the call forward sequence has been displayed 3 Enter stay 2 61 stay 2 and the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state TERE 3 2 pu 2 6 1 Sm 2 m How To Disable The Telco Disarming Sequence If at any time you wish to cancel the telco disarming sequence you may enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 3 and the button followed by 2 and the AWAY YJ button then the button followed by the 4 and the button ome E Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 93 How To Program Telco Arming Sequence Easy Call Forward Immediate On 1 Enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 3 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Press button followed by the away button to change the telco arming sequence Three beeps will be heard If a previous call forwarding sequence has already been programmed the sequence will be displayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators Refer to Table 39 Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence on page 90 for
225. ign and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 119 Arm The System In STAY Mode 2 Holding the O button down until two beeps are heard will arm the system in STAY Mode 2 Option 2 in LOCATION 429 on page 234 will need to be enabled for this function to operate If there has not been an alarm during the armed cycle holding the O button down a second time will disarm the system from STAY Mode 2 If you require single button disarming from STAY Mode 2 using this hold down function Option 4 in LOCATION 429 on page 234 will need to be enabled If an alarm has occurred or entry warning has been triggered a valid user code will need to be used to disarm the system Refer to Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones using the Installer Code function on page 95 or Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones using the Master Code function on page 111 for more information STAY Mode 2 is not available to Solution 880 control panels that have been partitioned Horn Speaker Test Holding the T button down until two beeps are heard will sound the horn speaker for a two second burst No other sounding device will sound in this mode Bell Test Holding the 2 button down until two beeps are heard will sound the internal screamers for a two second burst No other sounding device will sound in this mode If an EDMSAT SS914 has been connected to the control panel this function will test both the horn speaker and the strobe connected to the satellite siren for two second
226. ill extinguish The system has now returned to the disarmed state RSTALLERCODE 7 Raw Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 98 ISSUE140 Example Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Event Memory Recall Mode This function allows you to playback the last forty events that have occurred to the system The event memory recall mode reports all alarms and arming disarming of the system in the AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 This function helps with trouble shooting system faults The events are displayed via the codepad indicators How To Enter The Event Memory Recall Mode 1 Enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 8 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard The events will be played back via the codepad indicators in reverse chronological order RSTALER CODE wm If the events were as follows Event No Event Description System Armed In AWAY Mode Alarm In Zone 3 Alarm In Zone 4 System Disarmed Table 41 Event Memory Recall Example Events The event memory playback will report as follows Event No Codepad Indicator Event Description 4 All Indicators Off Except MAINS System Disarmed Zone 4 AWAY Indicator Illuminates Alarm In Zone 4 Zone 3 AWAY Indicator Illuminates Alarm In Zone 3 AWAY Indicator Illuminates System Armed In AWAY Mode Table 42 Event Memory Recall Example Event Playback A beep and an illuminated indicator indicate each
227. illuminated zone indicator e g If you program a twelve the MAINS indicator and zone 2 will illuminate Indicator Definition Flashing AC Mains Failure Table 19 MAINS Indicator Zone Isolating Mode This indicator will illuminate and flash every 3 seconds when you attempt to manually isolate zones or when the installer or Master Code holder programs zones to be automatically isolated for STAY Mode 2 Refer to Isolating Zones on page 70 for information on how to manually isolate zones Refer to Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 95 when using the Installer Code or Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 111 when using to Master Code to program zones to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Codepad Indicators A h Flashing 55 FAULT Indicator The FAULT indicator is used to display that the system has detected a system fault Refer to Fault Analysis Mode on page 73 for more information on system faults Every time a new system fault has been detected e g FAULT indicator flashing the codepad will begin to beep once every minute Pressing the Away button once will cancel the once a minute beep and acknowledge the fault e g FAULT indicator on Indicator Definition Oooo o ee There Is A System Fault That Needs To Be Rectified Off The System Is Normal There Are No Faults Flashing There Is A System Fault Waiting To Be Acknowledged Table 20 FAULT Indic
228. ime base and a multiplier Refer to Timing Of Outputs on page 215 for further information How Often To Operate For Is determined by a time base and a multiplier Refer to Timing Of Outputs on page 215 for further information Output Defaults Location 368 373 Location 374 379 Location 380 385 owt poloo ome prola sm eoii Default For Horn Default For Default For Strobe Speaker Fire Alarm Verification Reset In 8 Hrs Location 386 391 Location 392 397 Boy fasa fofofo codwm ofisa ajojn Default For Default For Entry Exit Sirens Running Warning Day Alarm O LL Event Type Polarity Time Base Time Multiplier Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs Example 203 Redirecting Outputs To The Codepad Buzzer Multiple output event types can be directed to the codepad buzzer so that it may be used to indicate any number of events This is achieved by selecting an output and programming it for the required output event type When you are satisfied that the output is functioning correctly change the first digit of the output event type i e The tens digit by adding the value 8 30 Communications Failure This event will operate when the dialler has made all possible attempts to reach the base station receiver The output will reset when the first Kiss Off is received This output event type is not applicable for domestic reporting To redirect the above output event type to operat
229. ion 281 287 fofoa fiafia Zone Location 267 273 2 lofofa fraji fi Zone4 Location 288 294 olofofa fraji fi Zone2 Location 274 280 fofoa fraja fi Zone 5 Location 295 301 rafo foa fiza fi Zone 6 Location 302 308 Zone 7 Location 309 315 rajo jofafiejijif RCO CoD eon ooo ie eS ee ee a a E Zone Zone Pulse Zone Pulse Zone Zone Report Dialler Type Count Count Time Option 1 Option 2 Code Options Zone 8 Location 316 322 Zone Types There are fifteen different zone types to choose from Each zone contains eight locations Zones 1 to 4 are fully programmable whereas zones 5 to 8 may only be programmed to any 24 hour zone type Zone Type Description Zone Type Description PO Inne 8 24 Hour HoldUp Handover SSS 92 Hour Tamper a S Dya 0o Reserve ooo S E 4 Reseved 12 24HowBuwglary 6 24Hour Medic 14 ChimeOny Table 157 Available Zone Types ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Solution 844 Programming Sheets 277 Zone Pulse Count Settings The pulse count settings for each zone can be programmed between 0 15 Zone Pulse Count Time Zone pulse count time is the time frame or period over which the number of pulses must register 20 ms Loop Response Time 150 ms Loop Response Time Zone Pulse Count Time Zone Pulse Count Time 0 0 5 Second 8 20 Seconds a Second 30 Seconds 40 Seconds 3 3Secons H 50Sec
230. it A E S t en yngery gery warryes rg Wg Fei Page 226 Location 905 Day Of The Month Tens Digit Location 906 Day Of The Month Units Digit Location 907 Month Of The Year Tens Digit Location 908 Month Of The Year Units Digit Location 909 Year Tens Digit loli folifo a Location 910 Year Units Digit Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Index 304 2 2 Channel Hand Held Transmitter Operations Arming In AWAY Mode cece eee eeeereeeeeeeeees 81 Arming In STAY Mode 1 00 eeeeeeeseeeees 81 Disarming From AWAY Mode ssec 81 Disarming From STAY Mode 1 o e 81 Panic Al arin 2 03 3 0ccbeRvssterceccssceaneeeivsccoesenaecsscaaey 81 2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface 00 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeee 255 24 Hour ZONE 3 csc cssesdensivve seeds a a 261 4 4 2 Reporting Format cece cee ceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 138 4 Channel Hand Held Transmitter Operations Arming In AWAY Mode eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeerees 82 Arming In STAY Mode 1 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeees 82 Disarming From AWAY Mode s es 82 Disarming From STAY Mode 1 nsee 82 Panic Al arin nerenin a 82 Turning Remote Output 1 Off oe 83 Turning Remote Output 1 On eee 83 Turning Remote Output 2 Off oer 83 Turning Remote Output 2 On eens 83 A AC Mains Fail In 1 Hout s3 c8 nsec nunc iitanin diac 231 Ignore Fail Indication 20 0 0 eee eeceeeeeeeseeneeenes 231 Report ierte sees stuseett E aa steeper etoes 195 Restore Report anseia ieee 195 AG Mains Failure saicn iatetinctiearaieried
231. itch Location On Back Of Codepad PCB below for the location of the DIP switches on the back of the codepad DIP Switches R22 R Area 1 S1 on Area 2 S2 on Area 3 S14 S2 on Area 4 53 on L gt T an YR Ze Te O 00 ON 6 ag 123 T 9 He LE EDMS1 2E R11 R12 Blk Red eee Figure 12 DIP Switch Location On Back Of Codepad PCB Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs 213 Output Polarity There are fifteen different polarities to choose from Each polarity is designated by a number This number needs to be programmed into the appropriate location of the output being used to indicate how the output should operate Option Polarity Option Polarity Normally Open Going Low fe aera Normally Low Going Open Normally Open Pulsing Low 9 Normally Low Pulsing Open Normally Open One Shot Low Normally Low One Shot Open 4 Normally Open One Shot Low Retiggen 11 Normally Low One Shot Open Retigg 6 Normally Open One Shot Low Alam 13 Normally Low One Shot Open Alarm Table 112 Event Type Polarities Output Not Used 0 If an output is not required for use the polarity should be programmed as zero Normally Open Going Low This polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs The output will switch back to open circuit when the event has re
232. ited Codepad Indicators 59 MAINS Indicator The MAINS indicator is used to display that the systems AC mains supply is normal or has failed When programming numbers i e Installer s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions the MAINS indicator will illuminate when you program numbers between 10 and 15 The MAINS indicator represents digit 10 plus the value of the illuminated zone indicator e g If you program a twelve the MAINS indicator and zone 2 will illuminate Indicator Definition Flashing AC Mains Failure Table 27 MAINS Indicator FAULT Indicator The FAULT indicator is used to display that the system has detected a system fault Refer to Fault Analysis Mode on page 73 for more information on system faults Every time a new system fault has been detected e g FAULT indicator flashing the codepad will begin to beep once every minute Pressing the away button once will cancel the once a minute beep and acknowledge the fault e g FAULT indicator on Indicator Definition On There Is A System Fault That Needs To Be Rectified The System Is Normal There Are No Faults Flashing There Is A System Fault Waiting To Be Acknowledged Table 28 FAULT Indicator Audible Indicators In general the audible indications given out by the codepad are as follows Indicator Definition A Button Has Been Pressed On The Codepad Or End One Short Beep Of Exit Time When Armed In Either STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mod
233. ity LED is constantly illuminated or pulsing rapidly How To Test The Programming Key 1 Enter Installer s Programming Mode i e 1 2 3 4 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash on the remote codepad to indicate that you have entered Installer s Programming Mode You will also notice that the remote codepad will display the data currently programmed in LOCATION 000 Plug the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the control panel found at the top of the PCB printed circuit board next to the Auxiliary Module socket Enter command 9 5 Q followed by the button Two beeps will be heard after the programming key has successfully been tested If you heard a long beep after issuing this command the programming key has become corrupt and will need to be erased to clear the corrupt data Refer to Command 964 Erase Programming Key on page 42 for more information Before removing the programming key from the control panel enter command 9 6 0 followed by the button to exit the Installer s Programming Mode Two beeps will be heard The STAY and AWAY indicators will now extinguish on the remote codepad and the system will return to the disarmed state Failing to exit Installer s Programming Mode before removing the programming key may result in corrupting the data in the programming key Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140
234. l operate regardless of Option 2 in LOCATION 426 on page 231 being set Low Battery This output will operate when a dynamic battery test detects that the battery has failed or the battery voltage has fallen below 10 5 volts The dynamic battery test is performed every four hours from when the system has been powered up or every time the system has been armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 This output will reset only after a dynamic battery test reports the backup battery has restored Horn Speaker Monitor Fail If Option 2 Enable Monitoring Of Horn Speaker in LOCATION 424 on page 229 has been selected this output will operate when the horn speaker has been disconnected The output will reset when the horn speaker has been reconnected Sensor Watch Alarm This output will operate when the sensor watch count has been reached Refer to Zone Options on page 179 for more information on programming zones for sensor watch Refer to LOCATION 408 409 on page 220 for setting how many days before a zone can register as a faulty sensor watch zone Codepad Medical Alarm This output will operate when a codepad medical alarm has been activated by pressing the 7 and QY buttons simultaneously on the remote codepad This output will reset once a valid user code has been entered at the remote codepad Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs 19 1 Go 1 ou 1 C 1 25 20 21 22
235. larm Reporting 179 Silent Alarm 180 Sensor Watch 180 Keyswitch Zone Options 181 Latching Arm and Disarm In AWAY Mode 181 Latching Arm In AWAY Mode 181 Latching Disarm From AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 181 Latching Arm and Disarm In STAY Mode 1 181 Latching Arm In STAY Mode 1 181 Latching Disarm From STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 181 Momentary Arm and Disarm In AWAY Mode 182 Momentary Arm In AWAY Mode 182 Momentary Disarm From AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 182 Momentary Arm and Disarm In STAY Mode 1 182 Momentary Arm In STAY Mode 1 182 Momentary Disarm From STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 182 Zone Options 2 183 Isolate In STAY Mode 1 183 Zone Isolation Allowed 183 Forced Arming Allowed 183 Zone Restore Report 183 Zone Reporting Information 184 Zone Report Code 184 Zone Dialler Options 184 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren 185 Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler 186 System Reporting Information 187 Reporting Information 188 Zone Status Bypass Reports 188 Zone Status Trouble Reports 189 Zone Status Sensor Watch Reports 190 Zone Status Alarm Restore Code 190 Zone Status Reporting Options 190 Open Close Reports 191 Open Close Reporting Options 191 Codepad Duress Report 192 Codepad Panic Report 192 Codepad Fire Report 193 Codepad Medical Report 193 Codepad Reporting Options 194 System Status Fuse Fail Report 194 System Status Fuse Fail Restore Report 194 System Status AC Fail Report 195 System Status
236. le CC811 For Alarm Link Operations 129 Domestic Dialling Domestic Dialling Format Domestic Dialling Function 131 A 7 132 Acknowledge Domestic Dialling 132 Setting Up and Programming Domestic Reporting 133 Disable Domestic Dialling 134 Dialler Reporting Formats Transmission Formats Contact ID Format 135 136 Point ID Codes 137 4 2 Reporting Format 138 Basic Pager Reporting Format 139 Basic Pager Display Information Subscriber ID Number 140 Zone Status System Status Dialler Information Dialler Information Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 Handshake Tone For Receiver 1 Transmission Format For Receiver 1 Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1 Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 Handshake Tone For Receiver 2 Transmission Format For Receiver 2 Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2 Dialling Format Reserved Telco Arming Sequence Telco Arming Call Forward Immediate On Telco Arming Call Forward No Answer On Telco Disarming Sequence Telco Arming Call Forward Immediate Off Telco Arming Call Forward No Answer Off Call Back Telephone Number Ring Count Answering Machine Bypass Telephone Line Fault Options Operate The FAULT Indicator Whe
237. lectronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Solution 880 Programming Sheets 297 Zone Pulse Count Settings The pulse count settings for each zone can be programmed between 0 15 Zone Pulse Count Time Zone pulse count time is the time frame or period over which the number of pulses must register 20 ms Loop Response Time 150 ms Loop Response Time Zone Pulse Count Time Zone Pulse Count Time 0 SSecond Seconds f Second 8 Seconds i O 2 2 Seconds Seconds 4 Seconds Seconds O me ee ea ae 1 2 5 90 Seconds 10 Seconds 120 Seconds 7 15 Seconds 200 Seconds Table 172 Zone Pulse Count Time Options Zone Options 1 Zone Options 2 Option Description j Description 4 Silent Alarm 8 Sensor Watch Table 173 Zone Options 1 Table 174 Zone Options 2 Zone Dialler Options Option Description 0 No Report Required 1 2 Table 175 Zone Dialler Options Zone Descriptions Use this table as a reference to indicate what each zone is connected to Description Description Table 176 Zone Descriptions Wiring Diagram For Keyswitch Zone amp Figure 24 Wiring Diagram For Keyswitch Zone sone M9 EOL KEY SWITCH MOMENTARY TOGGLE Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 298 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Location 323 Page 185 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren Location 32400 en Page 186 Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler 6
238. licable when the control panel has been partitioned If this option has been enabled any valid user code from either Area or Area 2 will be able to reset the horn speaker strobe bell or EDMSAT outputs from operating This option does not allow a user code allocated from one area to disarm another area Master Codepad To Display AUX Indicator When On Line 8 If this option has been enabled the AUX indicator on the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad will illuminate when the control panel has seized the telephone line to transmit a report The AUX indicator will extinguish once the telephone line has been released Partitioning Options 2 LOCATION 433 0 Description Lock Area 1 To Receiver 1 and Lock Area 2 To Receiver 2 User Codes Can Arm Disarm Both Areas At Same Time Code 0 Table 152 Partitioning Options 2 Lock Area 1 To Receiver 1 and Lock Area 2 To Receiver 2 1 If this option has been selected it will automatically set all reports for Area 1 to Receiver 1 and all reports on Area 2 to Receiver 2 If this option has not been selected all reporting will need to be manually programmed to report on Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 for both areas User Codes Can Arm Disarm Both Areas At Same Time Code 0 2 If this option ahs been selected it will allow any user allocated to both areas to arm or disarm both areas at the same time without the need to enter the code at each area codepad Refer to Arm or Disarm Both
239. ll Solution 844 862 880 control panels are not susceptible to or can be corrupted by the Year 2000 Millennium Bug To date all Solut ion products that incorporate time keeping functions employ a rotating 100 year calendar This means that the Solut ion products do not use the century in any time keeping algorithms only the year within the century Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Specifications Specifications Temperature Range Humidity Power Source Stand By Current Current Draw In Alarm Condition Current Draw With No Alarm and Codepad Fitted Back Up Battery Dimensions Weight Supplier Code New Zealand Telepermit Malaysia Approval Number 271 0 45 Degrees Celsius 10 95 TF008 Plug Pack 240 Volt 18 Volt AC 1 3 Amp 65 mA 115 mA 105 mA Ah 12 Volt DC Rechargeable Sealed Lead Acid Battery 306 mm x 262 mm x 84 mm Packed In Carton 2 5 Kg N771 PTC 211 98 083 Solution 880 PTC 211 98 084 Solution 862 PTC 211 98 085 Solution 844 Pending Software Version Number LOCATION 999 1 00 When using the Hand Held Programmer CC814 you have the ability to display the software version number of the control panel Refer to Command 999 Display Panel Type Or Software Version Number on page 46 for more information Advice To Users The Austel permit that has been issued for this product is subject to the following conditions The S
240. lofoja fraji jr one 6 Location 302 308 one 7 Location 309 31 Zone 8 Location 316 322 DOOGDDD RCO ooo ooo Tid uo od do og Zone Zone Pulse Zone Pulse Zone Zone Report Dialler Type Count Count Time Option 1 Option 2 Code Options Zone 3 Location 281 287 pogoni N N N oa amp Zones 6 may be programmed as any zone type whereas zones 7 and 8 may only be programmed to any 24 hour zone type Solution 880 Zones Defaults LOCATION 267 322 X 3 oO rc fe O S DS o gt N N N wo Zone 2 Location 274 280 afofofijiafi Lofotoj fiaj one 4 Location 288 294 Zone 5 Location 295 301 DODO folofofi fraji fi Zone 6 Location 302 308 one 7 Location 309 31 Zone 8 Location 316 322 DODDDO0 Re OOOGDO0 ofofofa frata Tid uo od odo og Zone Zone Pulse Zone Pulse Zone Zone Report Dialler Type Count Count Time Option 1 Option 2 Code Options Zone 3 Location 281 287 fofoa fraja fi N N oa Zones 8 may be programmed as any zone type ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Information 175 Zone Types There are sixteen different zone types to choose from Refer to the table below for the different zone types available Zone Type Description Zone Type Description Handover 9 24 Hour Tamper 24 Hour Medical 24 Hour Panic Table 82 Zone Types 24 Hour Fire Chime Only Zone Not Used ier a Instant Zone
241. lt Waiting To Be Acknowledged Table 21 Audible Indications ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Codepad Indicators 57 CP5 Master Partitioned LED Codepad 5 This codepad is only used on the Solution 880 control panel when Solution partitioned The Master Partitioned LED codepad will allow the user to 1 3 4 5 6 operate both areas individually from the same codepad without the need to gt operate individual areas from separate codepads m 7 8 m 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 The codepad is the communications interface between you and your alarm Area On Off Area Display f system The codepad allows you to issue commands and offers both visual ma a and audible indications that guide you through the general operation AUX MAINS FAULT PARTIAL 8 a The codepad incorporates numerous indicators There are ZONE indicators that are used to show the condition of each zone and four others for general status The following is a list of situations and the relevant indications that will be seen Figure 3 CP5 Master Partitioned LED Ref Partitioni 237 fi infi Codepad CP500P efer to Partitioning on page or more information The indicators on the CP5 Master Partitioned LED codepad are configured in to four groups Following is a description of what the indicators mean Zone Indicators 1 The ZONE indicators are used to display the status of the zones The following table lists the various cir
242. lution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Changing Domestic Phone Numbers 2 When the system has been set up for domestic dialling this function allows the Master Code holder to view and program the required telephone numbers that the system will call in the event of an alarm For a more detailed description refer to Domestic Dialling on page 131 for further information How To Change Domestic Phone Numbers 1 Enter your MASTER cone followed by 2 andthe Away button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash If there are telephone numbers already programmed they will be displayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators Refer to Table 47 Codepad Indicators When Changing Domestic Telephone Numbers on page 105 for the indicators and their meanings If there are no telephone numbers programmed a further two beeps will be heard after entering this mode These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the last phone number has been displayed 2 Enter all the digits for PHONE No 1 one digit at a time You will notice as each digit is entered the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate 3 If there is more than one telephone number press the stay button followed by the 4 button after the last digit of the telephone number This will insert a break between the first telephone number and the second telephone number If there is only one phone number press the
243. m the system in AWAY Mode Option 2 in LOCATION 429 on page 234 will need to be enabled for this hold down function to operate This hold down function will not operate on Solution 880 control panels when partitioned using the CP5 Master Partitioned codepad CP500P Holding the button down until two beeps are heard on a CP5 Area Addressable codepad CP500A will arm the corresponding area in AWAY Mode Arm The System In STAY Mode 1 Holding the button down until two beeps are heard will arm the system in STAY Mode 1 Option 2 in LOCATION 429 on page 234 will need to be enabled for this hold down function to operate If there has not been an alarm during the armed cycle holding the button down a second time will disarm the system from STAY Mode 1 If you require single button disarming from STAY Mode 1 using this hold down function Option 4 in LOCATION 429 on page 234 will need to be enabled If an alarm has occurred or entry warning has triggered a valid user code will need to be used to disarm the system Refer to Zone Options 2 on page 173 for information on programming each zone to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1 This hold down function will not operate on Solution 880 control panels when partitioned using the CP5 Master Partitioned codepad CP500P Holding the button down until two beeps are heard on a CP5 Area Addressable codepad CP500A will arm the corresponding area in STAY Mode 1 Electronics Des
244. mary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 146 Programming ss sis ss0vessesge sssnsseedscssapessedesebsbtstssasosessoeseese 28 Automatic Stepping Of Locations ee 44 Codepad Indicators iieii iho isses serosa 29 Entry EXit Tiemi Sisirin ierse oerni siorse 218 Installer s Programming Commands eee 35 Option Bits nnn n 34 156 228 Telephone Numbers cseseseseseseeseseressressreesreesesees 142 Via Hand Held Programmet eee eeeeeeeeeees 31 Via Programming Key seseseesseesseeerssreeseserrresesreer 33 Via Remote Codepad cece eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeereeerens 29 Programming Key cece cseeeeeeeeeeeereeseensees 33 253 Copy From Programming Key To Panel 0 41 Copy Panel Memory To Programming Key 40 Erase E iets A eee eo a i eee 42 OStis8 0 Mh EE ee et titan eden dal ees BE 37 Programming Sheets Sol tion 404 ois ee ee seeeseeseeseecneecensensenssenssensers 273 Solution 406 soos cece ie eee a cee ee 283 Solution 408 oo eee cece cesecesecsseceeceeeeeeeseensees 293 PS100 Power Supply Module eee eee eee 254 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Q Quick Starte iti ieee ian eae eee 22 R Radio Input Options 0 0 0 ee ee eee ceeeecreeeeeeeeeeeeees 236 Latching Keyswitch Input eee eee eeeee rere 236 Momentary Keyswitch Input eee eee 236 Radio RECEIVED sesers sssessa sees riisist sieis 236 Radio Key Keyswitch Interface 0 0 0 23
245. me parameters vary the Off time of the pulse Normally Low One Shot Open This one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs The output will switch back to zero volts when the time parameter has expired This one shot time setting will always run its full duration and cannot be manually reset Normally Low One Shot Open With Retrigger This one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs Every time the event occurs it will restart the one shot timer The output will switch back to zero volts once the one shot time has expired Normally Low One Shot Open With Reset This one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs The output will switch back to zero volts when the one shot time has expired or when the event has returned to normal This means the one shot timer can be shortened regardless of the time setting Normally Low One Shot Open With Alarm This one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs The output will switch back to zero volts when the one shot time has expired when the event has returned to normal or when the system has been disarmed This means that the one shot timer can be shortened regardless of the time setting Normally Low Latching Open This polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event
246. me the Installer Code is used access into Installer s Programming Mode will be made Installer Code functions are available to allow the installer to carry out various functions during the disarmed state without the need to remember the customers Master Code Refer to Installer Code Functions on page 86 for more information Refer to Programming With The Remote Codepad on page 29 for more information on programming the system once Installer s Programming Mode has been accessed ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited User Codes 163 LOCATION 185 264 The purpose of user codes is to arm and disarm the system as well as perform other specific functions as described in Master Code Functions on page 99 User codes 1 8 can be any length between one to four digits long Each user code may have a different priority level or multiple user codes may have the same priority level The priority level controls the behaviour of the code allowing it to arm only arm and disarm or be a Master Code holder etc The priority level of each user code is programmed in the last location of each user code and can only be programmed by the installer The Master Code holder does not have any ability to change the priority level of any user code g User Code Priority There are a total of 16 user codes available that can be changed or deleted at any time by a Master Code holder however user codes 9 16 can only be remote radio use
247. memory is blank will corrupt the control panel s memory unless the Installer s Programming Mode has been entered first If this occurs then the control panel will need to be returned to Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited where a service fee will be charged to unlock the control panel s memory Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 34 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Programming Option Bits When programming these locations you will notice that there are four alternatives per location You may select one two three or all of these alternatives for each location however only one number is required to be programmed This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together Example If at LOCATION 177 you want options 1 2 and 4 add the numbers together and the total is the number to be programmed In this example the number to be programmed is 7 i e 1 2 4 7 Option Description Enabled Allow Dialler Reporting Functions Disabled Disable All Dialler Reporting Functions Enable Remote Arming Via The Telephone Enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed Enabled Use Bell 103 For FSK Format Disabled CCITT V21 Format Table 6 Example Programming Option Bits ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 35 Installer s Programming Commands There are ten different commands that can be used to perform various functions once t
248. message will then be transmitted to the base station receiver If an alarm occurs that does not need to report to the base station receiver the session will not be terminated If this option has not been selected and an alarm has registered the Alarm Link software will prompt the operator with a Terminate or Continue message External Modem Module C811 Required For Upload Download this option has been selected the control panel will use the external plug in Modem Module If this option has b lected th l panel will h 1 plug in Modem Modul CC811 for remote programming operations via the Alarm Link Software CC816 This option should only be enabled where the telephone line is susceptible to noise ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited User Codes 162 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Access Codes This section describes the access codes that are used to assign privileges and access functions for user code holders of the system Two types of user codes exist within the system the Installer Code and User Codes Each of these codes allow specific access and operation of the varied functions of the control panel Installer Code LOCATION 181 184 1234 This code is used to access the Installer s Programming Mode and can be between one to four digits long However after the control panel has been powered up the Installer Code can disarm the system if it is the first code used The next ti
249. method for dialling telephone numbers is entered here Options 3 and 6 will alternate the dialling sequence between DTMF and Decadic if the call to the base station receiver was unsuccessful Caution should be exercised when selecting the dialling method Only use the Australian method if the control panel is to be connected to the Australian Telecommunications Network The International DTMF dialling option should only be used in those countries that allow both the caller and the receiver to terminate the phone call Using the incorrect format will disable EDM s patent Telephone Anti Jamming feature Option Dialling Format Option Dialling Format 1 Australian DTMF International DTMF 5 Digits Second Touch Tone Reversed Decadic Ea Australian Decadic a 10 Minus 1 Alternating DTMF Alternate DTMF amp Australian Decadic amp Reversed Decadic Table 68 Dialling Formats The alternating sequence is as follows DTMF Decadic DTMF Decadic DTMF Decadic LOCATION 081 112 OODDD0000000000000000000000000000 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 150 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Telco Arming Sequence LOCATION 113 142 ODODDD0D0000000000000000000000000 These locations allow you to automatically activate call diversion on your telephone when you arm the system in AWAY Mode Upon activating the Telco Arming Sequence when arming the system in AWAY Mode the control panel will r
250. n STAY Mode 1 Method one is standard and will always operate Method two is optional and needs Option 2 in LOCATION 429 to be enabled on page 234 Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode When arming the system in STAY Mode 1 an optional entry timer called Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode may be used to delay the sirens strobe and bell outputs if a zone that has not been automatically isolated has triggered into alarm condition Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode is the delay time used for all zones except 24 hour zones when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 If the Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode has been programmed and a zone that has not been automatically isolated has triggered the codepad will beep twice a second until the Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode has expired or the system has been disarmed If the alarm condition has not been reset before Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode expires the strobe bell and siren outputs will activate into alarm Single button arming in STAY Mode 1 will report as user code number 16 How To Arm The System In STAY Mode 1 1 Enter your followed by the stay button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will illuminate Exit time will now commence Any zones that have been programmed to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1 will begin to flash until exit time expires At the end of exit time the ZONE indicators will extinguish and the codepad will give one short beep CODE ST
251. n STAY Mode 2 hold down the O button until two beeps are heard Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 118 or Arming The System In STAY Mode 2 on page 67 for more information How To Set STAY Mode 2 Zones 1 Example Enter your followed by 4 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will begin to flash Enter the ZONE NUMBER that you wish to automatically isolate followed by the stay button The corresponding ZONE indicator will begin to flash to display that you have selected the zone to be automatically isolated every time you arm the system in STAY Mode 2 If more than one zone is required to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2 repeat step 2 until all zones required have been selected Press the button to exit this function Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state The zones that were selected to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2 and the STAY indicator will extinguish WASTER CODE 4 Rua GONE NOMBER Star er As each zone has been selected to be isolated the corresponding ZONE indicator will begin to flash If a mistake has been made press the zone number that was incorrectly entered followed by the stay button This zone is now no longer programmed to be isolated and the ZONE indicator will extinguish This function will not operate on Solution 880 control panels that have been partitioned If you wish to select zones
252. n Telephone Line Fails Sound Speaker Bell and Strobe When The System Is Armed Sound Speaker Bell and Strobe When The System Is Disarmed Reserved Ring Burst Time Dialler Options Programming Option Bits Dialler Options 1 Dialler Reporting Functions Allowed Disabled Disable All Dialler Reporting Functions Remote Arming Via The Telephone Allowed Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed Use Bell 103 For FSK Format Disabled CCITT V21 Dialler Options 2 Open Close Reports Only If Previous Alarm Open Close Reports For STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete Extend Time To Wait For Handshake From 30 55 Seconds 158 Dialler Options 3 159 Set DTMF Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit Second 159 Reserved 159 Change Decadic Dialling To 60 40 159 Reserved 159 Alarm Link Options 160 Upload Download Allowed 160 Call Back Phone Number Required For Upload Download 160 Terminate Upload Download On Alarm 160 External Modem Module CC811 Required For Upload Download 160 User Codes 161 Access Codes 162 Installer Code 162 User Codes 163 Solution 844 862 User Codes 164 Solution 880 User Codes 164 User Code Priority 165 Arm and Disarm 165 Arm Only 165 Arm and Disarm Open Close Rep
253. n has been selected the system will only disarm from STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 when using the latching keyswitch input Arming the system in STAY Mode 1 STAY Mode 2 or arming and disarming the system in AWAY Mode will not be permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 182 ISSUE140 10 12 13 14 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Momentary Arm and Disarm In AWAY Mode If this option has been selected the system will either arm or disarm from AWAY Mode when using the momentary keyswitch input Momentary Arm In AWAY Mode If this option has been selected the system will arm in AWAY Mode when using the momentary keyswitch input Disarming the system will not be permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected Momentary Disarm From AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 If this option has been selected the system will disarm from either AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 when using the momentary keyswitch input Arming the system will not be permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected Momentary Arm and Disarm In STAY Mode 1 If this option has been selected the system will arm or disarm in STAY Mode 1 when using the momentary keyswitch input Arming and disarming the system in AWAY Mode will not be permitted via the keyswitch zone if this option has been selected Momentary Arm In STAY Mode
254. ncrements Of Days Units Digit Location 410 Codepad Lockout Time Location 411 Siren Run Time Location 412 Siren Sound Rate Slow lt Sound gt Fast Location 413 Auto Arming Pre Alert Time Location 414 417 Auto Arming Time Location 414 Location 415 Location 416 Location 417 Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Hour Of The Day Units Digit Minute Of The Day Tens Digit Minute Of The Day Units Digit Location 418 421 Auto Disarming Time Location 418 Location 419 Location 420 Location 421 Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Hour Of The Day Units Digit Minute Of The Day Tens Digit Minute Of The Day Units Digit Location 422 Kiss Off Wait Time Location 422 Increments Of 500 ms 500 ms 8 Sec s Le Location 423 Reserved ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited p w Q Oo N N wo Solution 880 Programming Sheets Location 424 System Options 1 1 Enable EDM Smart Lockout 2 Enable Monitoring Of Horn Speaker 4 Allow Strobe Indications For Radio Arm Disarm 8 Allow Horn Speaker Beeps For Radio Arm Disarm 301 Page 229 L Location 425 System Options 2 1 Enable Codepad Panic To Be Silent 2 Enable Codepad Fire To Be Silent 4 Enable Codepad Medical To Be Silent 8 Enable Access Denied To Be Silent Location 426 System Options 3 1 AC Fail In 1 Hour Disabled After 2 Minutes 2 Ignore AC Mains Fail Indication 4 Pulse Count H
255. ndicators Showing Relative Remote User Numbers on page 80 3 Press the LSTAYJ button to delete the user code Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish If you wish to delete any further remote radio user codes repeat this procedure as many times as required WASTER CODE 1 ave USER NUMBER AWAY STAY When deleting remote radio user codes this function will automatically terminate if a button is not pressed within sixty seconds or by pressing the Away button One long beep indicates the an incorrect user number has been selected User Zone Zone2 Zone3 Zone4 Zone5 Zone6 Zone7 Zone8 MAINS No Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator i ae a a Sa a z R pu fy ft ft tf S dai wf ee ee ee ee sf Oe f J J aj J Co dva S e ee i g Wn A e 0 i Table 33 Codepad Indicators Showing Relative Remote User Numbers Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Remote Radio Transmitter Operations 81 Figure 5 2 Button Hand Held Transmitter REO12 2 Channel Radio Remote Hand Held Transmitter Operations All operations via the 2 button radio remote hand held transmitter are fixed once the control panel has been taught the hand held transmitters code Therefore there is no programming required for each button of the transmitter Arming In AWAY Mode 1 Press the BLACK button on th
256. ndshake Required 1 2 1400 Hz TX 1900 Hz 5 Pager 3 Reserved Location 033 0 TUONO Page 145 Transmission Format For Receiver I 1 Contact ID 5 Basic Pager 2 4 2 Express 6 Reserved 3 FSK 300 Baud 7 Reserved 4 Domestic 8 Reserved Locdiono sA Ose I rc Ge ey Geen Maer TO a Yi E E Page 145 Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1 folo olojolo Locaion oao S055 0 Vege kt ee oe eae be ee ee es eg ee ee ee ee gl Page 145 Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 fo o o ojolo olojofojojo ojo o Location 056 071 Page 146 Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 2 Location 072 Page 148 H n sh ke Tone For Receiver 2 1 HI LO Handshake Contact ID 4 No Handshake Required andsha 2 1400 Hz TX 1900 Hz 5 Pager 3 2300 Hz Low Speed Sescoa Location OI ee te eG gy 8 8 Gee ve ema fet E os Wyo ew tece Nao ey Page 148 Transmission Format For Receiver 2 1 Contact ID 5 Basic Pager 2 4 2 Express 6 Reserved 3 FSK 300 Baud 7 Reserved 4 Domestic 8 Reserved Location 074 079 lt lt lt Page 148 Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2 folo olojolo Location 080 Page 149 iol li 1 Australian DTMF 5 Digits Second 4 International DTMF Dialling Format 2 Australian Decadic 5 Reversed Decadic 3 Alternate DTMF amp Decadic AUST 6 Alternate DTMF amp Reversed Decadic Location 081 112 00 Page 149 Reserved Location 113 1420 Page 150 Telco Arming Sequence Location 143 158 NN P
257. need to be selected Refer to LOCATION 414 417 on page 222 to program the time that the control panel will automatically arm itself and LOCATION 413 on page 222 to set the auto arming pre alert time When using this option with a partitioned Solution 880 control panel both areas will automatically arm in STAY Mode 1 STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status 8 If this option has been selected the STAY indicator will be used to display when day alarm has been enabled The STAY indicator will flash once every 3 seconds while day alarm is active Refer to LOCATION 265 on page 168 for programming zones to operate for day alarm operation Day alarm can be turned on and off by holding down the A button for 2 seconds Three beeps indicate day alarm is turned on and two beeps indicate day alarm is turned off Refer to Day Alarm Operation on page 169 for more information Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 234 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Consumer Options 2 LOCATION 429 2 Description Codepad Display Extinguish After 60 Seconds Single Button Arming Allowed AWAY STAY Mode 1 amp 2 Single Button Disarming Allowed STAY Mode 1 amp 2 Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm Table 140 Consumer Options 2 Codepad Display Extinguish After 60 Seconds 1 If this option has been selected all indicators on the remote codepad display will extinguish if a button is not pressed for 60 s
258. ng simplicity and speed have been some of the major considerations and we believe that our objectives in this area have been more than satisfied This installation manual will explain all aspects of programming the Solution 844 862 880 control panel from factory default to final commissioning All system parameters and options are detailed however suitability is left up to the individual Every control panel can be tailored to meet all requirements quickly and easily The programming simplicity will make your installation quick accurate and rewarding each and every time The Solution range of control panels are very popular amongst thousands of people throughout many countries of the world all who have various levels of technical aptitude and ability We have tried to aim this installation manual to all levels of readers As the Solut ion control panels continue to be improved over the years they have become very powerful Some of its early first time users have advanced to true power users and we need to address their needs too while maintaining the simplicity of the manual and the product Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Introduction Solution 844 Features The Solution Following is a list of the main features that the control panel will provide gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt
259. ng station to receive zone alarm reports from previously locked out zones during siren run time Refer to Zone Options 1 on page 179 for information on programming zones for lockout dialler and lockout siren Refer to Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler on page 186 to program the number of times the zone can report before being locked out Horn Speaker Monitor 2 If this option has been selected the control panel will detect when the horn speaker has been disconnected from the speaker terminals The FAULT indicator will illuminate when the horn speaker has been disconnected and will extinguish when the horn speaker has been reconnected If an output is required to operate when the horn speaker has been disconnected refer to Output Event Type Horn Speaker Monitor Fail on page 206 for more information Strobe Indications For Radio Arm Disarm 4 This option will allow the strobe to indicate when the system is armed and disarmed when remotely operating the system via the Solution Wireless On Off Interface WE800 No Of Seconds System Status System Disarmed System Armed In AWAY Mode System Armed In STAY Mode 1 Table 134 Strobe Indications For Remote Operations Horn Speaker Beeps For Radio Arm Disarm 8 This option will allow the horn speaker to indicate when the system is armed and disarmed when remotely operating the system via the Solution Wireless On Off Interface WE800 No Of Beeps System Status System Disarmed S
260. nged or the system has been powered down If the date and time has not been set using this function the date and time fault will only display when the Auto Arming Time in LOCATION 414 417 on page 222 has been programmed or when you enter Fault Analysis Mode by holding down the 5 button How To Set The New Date and Time 1 Enter your MASTER Cone followed by 6 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash ML 2 Enter the day month year hour and minute using the DD MM YY HH MM format i e DD Day of the month MM Month of the year YY Current year HH Hour of the day MM Minute of the day Please note that when programming the hour of the day you will need to use 24 00 hour format 3 Press the AWAY button when finished Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish If a long beep is heard an error was made when entering the date and time 7 WASTERCODE 6 ww DD MM Y Y HH MM awww Example If the date and time needs to be set for the 1st January 1997 at 10 30 PM program the date and time as follows cs 2580 6 Aw O 1 0 1 9 2 2 3 0 awww ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 115 Walk Test Mode 7 Walk test mode allows you to test detection devices to ensure that they are functioning correctly Before activating walk test mode isolate any zones that
261. ns 1 on page 179 to program zones for lockout dialler Only alarms triggered from zone inputs will increment the swinger shutdown counter This means alarms such as codepad panic code retries and any other system alarms will not effect the swinger shutdown count While the sirens are operating the counter for the dialler is only incremented by the first zone that causes the alarm Any other zones that are triggered during siren time will not effect the counter While the dialler is on line its counter is only incremented by the first zone that causes the alarm Any other zones that are triggered while the dialler is on line will not effect the counter When the swinger shutdown count As programmed in LOCATION 324 has been reached all zones that have been triggered will be locked out according to their individual lockout settings If Lockout Dialler has been enabled for any zone the last restore signal will not be i transmitted until the system or area If partitioned has been disarmed The Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler is global to both Area 1 and Area 2 when using aSolution 880 control panel that has been partitioned Example All eight zones have been programmed for lockout dialler with a swinger shutdown count of 6 If zone 1 triggers an alarm the swinger shutdown count will decrement by one at the time the control panel makes the call to a swinger shutdown count of 5 If zone 1 re triggers the dialler the swinger shutdo
262. o Handshake ES 1400 Hz Lo Speed Table 66 Handshake Tones For Receiver 2 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 148 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Transmission Format For Receiver 2 LOCATION 073 1 Enter the desired transmission format here This location selects the data format that will be transmitted to the base station receiver This location also allows you to configure the control panel for domestic or basic pager formats Option Transmission Format Option Transmission Format Pa come a Domestic Table 67 Transmission Formats For Receiver 2 Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2 LOCATION 074 079 000000 This number is transmitted to identify the calling control panel Enter the desired Subscriber ID Number in the six locations provided For Basic Pager Format LOCATION 074 076 will be ignored and the first digit of the Subscriber ID Number required must start in LOCATION 077 When using Domestic Dialling Format the number of identification beeps will be the number that is programmed in LOCATION 079 This gives the ability to identify between 15 different control panels calling the same telephone number Example If you wish to program the Subscriber ID Number as 4729 you would program the six locations as follows 004729 ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Dialler Information 149 Dialling Format LOCATION 080 1 The
263. o irp riore s hesap annie a Zone Report Codeer sker ana o Zone Restore Code ksr sinere Zone Status Bypass Reports e a n enii n Reporting OptionS seeseesesesrsseesssreerrsrerresesreesesrene Sensor Watch Repotts ce eeeecesecesecesecseeeees Trouble Reports ane nsore Zone Types 24 Hour Burglary Zone eescescecsseceeeeeeeneeeeeees ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual 24 Hour Fire Zone sser eiten oeroet keikei ier s 176 24 Hour Hold Up Zone ssseseesseesesreereereerserrsreerese 176 24 Hour Medical ccccccecccesesesesesesssesesessssssseseeees 176 24 Hour Panic Zone ccccececesesesesesesesesesesesesesesees 176 24 Hour Tamper serren enee neperi 176 CHIME ZONE escedhesocioecacsss cedidcucesteacncedteotadoretienesdeetne 177 Delay U Zones ee ree se estes nee captors ooneciance tests 175 Delay 2 ZONE a pn p tech opti aee teens 175 Handover Zonen vessie nen a deai 175 Instant ZONE gessien ineei aeei a 175 Keyswitch Zone sebaene ehesten erek 176 Zone Not Used n a en 177 LOVES E E EE O E AET ENS 261 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Index 311 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 25 Huntingwood Drive A C N 002 907 271 Huntingwood NSW 2148 Australia Phone 612 9672 1777 Facsimile 612 9672 1717 email edm edm com au
264. obe Operating ee ee ee sercis 207 System Armed iinit ess eei rsi 204 System Dis rm d siiis neisi riren 204 Telephone Line Fail ee eee eeeceeereeeeeeeees 206 Zone Not Sealed ossessi 210 Zone Not Sealed After Exit Time 210 Output Polarity Normally Low Going Open eee eeeeeeeeee 214 Normally Low Latching Open eee eee 214 Normally Low One Shot Open eee 214 Normally Low One Shot Open With Alarm 214 Normally Low One Shot Open With Reset 214 Normally Low One Shot Open With Retrigger 214 Normally Low Pulsing Open eee 214 Normally Open Going Low ee eeeeeeeeeeeee 213 Normally Open Latching Low eee 214 Normally Open One Shot Low eee ee eeeeeees 213 Normally Open One Shot Low With Alarm 214 Normally Open One Shot Low With Reset 213 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 308 Normally Open One Shot Low With Retrigger 213 Normally Open Pulsing Low eee eee 213 Output Not Used oe ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeaes 213 COELI DNE LP AN EEEE ETO EE 202 One Shot Polarities 20 0 0 ee ee eeeeseceseceeeeneeeneeenes 216 Polarity ceevesdecaasiessccispespevoh aeevienss feestorpeeteenpepodann 213 Pulsing Pol tities oci eteerinen esner pe 215 Redirecting Output To Codepad Buzzet 203 TIME erae pe A ES EE E o 215 Turning On O Ee eoep e ne arpe in 112 P Palee Re ee 260 Panic Alarms iio ashanti aiden teed eee 69 PARTIAL In
265. ode Operation Upload Download Programmable Dynamic Battery Testing Entry and Exit Warning Beeper Remote Arming Answering Machine Bypass AC Fail and System Fault Indicators Monitored Siren Output Strobe Output Relay Output Separate Fire Alarm Sound EDMSAT Satellite Siren Compatible Zone Lockout Sensor Watch Day Alarm Event Memory Recall Walk Test Mode Delayed Reporting Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 22 Quick Start Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual The following steps will allow you to use the Solut ion 844 862 880 control panel with the factory default values The default values allow the control panel to communicate in the Contact ID format If you are not familiar to programming the Solut ion range of control panels we suggest that you first read information contained in the programming section beginning on page 28 1 ISSUE140 After all wiring has been completed connect the AC plug pack to the control panel Both the MAINS and AWAY indicators will illuminate The MAINS indicator will display to indicate that the AC mains supply has been connected The AWAY indicator displays that the system is now armed in the AWAY Mode If any 24 hour zones are unsealed at the time the system is powered up the siren strobe and bell outputs will activate into alarm and the corresponding zone indicator will flash Enter the default Master Code 2 5 8 O followed by the Away
266. odem Module CC811 For Alarm Link Operations Table 55 Alarm Link Options Enable Upload Download Via Alarm Link This option will need to be selected if you require to use the Alarm Link Software CC816 to remotely program the control panel The control panel will not respond to the Alarm Link Software if this option is not selected Refer to Alarm Link Software on page 126 for more information Enable Alarm Link Call Back 2 If this option has been selected and a call back telephone number has been programmed the remote programming computer must be connected to the telephone line that has been programmed in the call back telephone number locations Refer to LOCATION 159 174 on page 151 for more information If this option is not selected it will allow the installer to connect to their customers control panel from any remote location when attempting upload download operations without the need to wait for the control panel to call back to the remote computer but still allows the ability for the customer to initiate the modem call from the codepad when requested by holding down the 6 button Refer to Alarm Link Software on page 126 for more information 4 Terminate Alarm Link Connection On Alarm If the control panel is communicating with a remote computer via Alarm Link Software CC816 and an alarm has registered the Alarm Link session will be terminated and the relevant alarm message will then be transmitted to the base
267. of 3 If zone 1 triggers an alarm the swinger shutdown count will decrement by one after the end of siren run time to a swinger shutdown count of 2 After the siren run time has reset from the previous alarm zone 2 triggers an alarm and reactivates the sirens After the sirens have reset the swinger shutdown count has decremented again from 2 to 1 If zone 3 also triggers an alarm after the sirens have reset from zone 2 the swinger shutdown count has decremented from 1 to 0 therefore locking out all three zones from sounding the sirens again until the system has been reset However at this point in time the swinger shutdown count for sirens has again a lockout count of 3 and the process of swinger shutdown for the remaining zones begin again until all zones have been locked out aaa The Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren is global to both Area 1 and Area 2 when using a Solution 880 control panel that has been partitioned Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 186 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler LOCATION 324 6 Location Description 324 Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler 0 15 Table 90 Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler Location This location determines the number of times the dialler can be triggered before any lockout options will take effect A minimum of one zone must be programmed for lockout dialler for this location to be effective Refer to Zone Optio
268. olution 844 862 880 Control Panel may only be powered by an EDM TF008 Plug Pack Approval Number Q92128 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 272 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual New Zealand Telepermit Notes The grant of a telepermit for a device in no way indicates Telecom acceptance of responsibility for the correct operation of that device under all operating conditions This equipment shall not be used in any manner that could constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers Immediately disconnect this equipment should it become physically damaged and arrange for its disposal or repair The transmit level from this device is set at a fixed level and because of this there may be circumstances where the performance is less than optimal Before reporting such occurrences as faults please check the line with a standard telepermitted telephone and do not report a fault if the telephone performance is satisfactory This device is equipped with pulse dialling while the Telecom standard is DTMF tone dialling There is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialling Use of dialling when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition Should such problems occur the user should NOT contact the Telecom Faults Service This equipment is set up to carry out
269. on page 168 for programming zones to operate for day alarm Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 206 ISSUE140 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Day Alarm Enabled This output will operate as soon as day alarm has been enabled The output will reset when day alarm has been turned off Day alarm can be turned on and off by holding down the 4 button Three beeps indicates that day alarm has been turned on two beeps indicates that day alarm has been turned off Refer to Day Alarm Zones on page 168 for programming zones to operate for day alarm Telephone Line Fail This output will operate when the in built telephone line fault module detects that the telephone line has been disconnected for a period of approximately 40 seconds The output will reset once the telephone line has been restored continuously for more than 40 seconds This output will not operate unless Option 1 in LOCATION 176 on page 153 has been enabled Kiss Off Received This output will operate after the control panel has successfully transmitted to the receiving party Fuse Fail This output will operate when either the 1 Amp codepad fuse or the 1 Amp accessories fuse fails The output will reset once the faulty fuse has been replaced AC Fail This output will operate as soon as the AC mains has failed The output will reset as soon as the AC mains has restored This output wil
270. once Area 1 is disarmed Any Areas Armed This output will operate when either Area 1 or Area 2 has become armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 The output will reset when both areas are disarmed Any Areas Disarmed This output will operate when either Area 1 or Area 2 has become disarmed The output will reset when both areas are armed in either AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 212 ISSUE140 60 61 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Area 1 Codepad Data Terminal This output type is used to connect the data terminal of the Area 1 codepad when you are using the Master Partitioned codepad as the main codepad Set DIP switch 1 in the ON position for the Area 1 codepad to operate correctly Refer to Figure 12 DIP Switch Location On Back Of Codepad PCB below for the location of the DIP switches on the pack of the codepad If you are not using a Master Partitioned as the main codepad connect the data cable from the Area codepad to the DATA terminal on the control panel and enable Option 2 in LOCATION 432 on page 243 Refer to Codepad Connections For Partitioning on page 249 for further information on connecting codepads when the system has been partitioned Area 2 Codepad Data Terminal This output type is used to connect the data terminal of the Area 2 codepad Set DIP Switch 2 to the ON position for the Area 2 codepad to operate correctly Refer to Figure 12 DIP Sw
271. onds Output 2 will now turn on Turning Output 2 OFF 1 Press the AUX button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds Output 2 will now turn off All reset times of the remote DOOR and AUX buttons are in reference to polarity 1 and 8 Reset times will vary depending on the polarity used Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 84 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 86 System Functions ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual This section explains the more advanced features that are required for testing and regular maintenance of the system Features such as Installer Code Functions Master Code Functions and Hold Down Functions are covered in this section Installer Code Functions Installer Code Functions are designed to allow the installer to perform various system tests without the need to know a Master Code To enter the required Installer Code function enter the INSTALLER CODE followed by the required FUNCTION digit and the button All available Installer Code functions are listed in Table 35 Installer Code Functions outlined below NSTALLER CODE FUNCTION Away These functions can only be carried out when the system is in the disarmed state Function Description Page a oO 3 Change Telco Arm Disarm Sequence Sd 4 J setting STAY Mode Zones o s EDMSAT St
272. onds 4 11 4 Seconds 12 60 Seconds 90 Seconds 6 10 Seconds 14 120 Seconds 15 Seconds 200 Seconds Table 158 Zone Pulse Count Time Options Zone Options 1 Zone Options 2 Option Description Option Description 4 Silent Alarm _ 4 Forced Arming Allowed 8 Sensor Watch 8 Enable Zone Restore Report Table 159 Zone Options 1 Table 160 Zone Options 2 Zone Dialler Options Option Description 0 No Report Required Receiver 4 Receiverl 2 00 8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver I Fais Table 161 Zone Dialler Options Zone Descriptions Use this table as a reference to indicate what each zone is connected to Description Description Table 162 Zone Descriptions Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 278 Location 323 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Location 324 Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler Location 325 326 Zone Status Bypass Reports Location 327 328 Zone Status Trouble Reports Location 329 330 Zone Status Sensor Watch Reports Location 325 Zone Bypass Report Location 326 Zone Bypass Restore Report Location 327 Zone Trouble Report Location 328 Zone Trouble Restore Report Location 329 Sensor Watch Report Location 330 Sensor Watch Restore Report Location 331 Zone Status Alarm Restore Code Location 332 Zone Status Reporting Options 0 No Report Required 1 Receiver 1
273. onics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 290 Location 398 399 Entry Timer 1 Location 398 Location 399 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Page 218 Location 400 401 Entry Timer 2 Location 400 Location 401 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location 402 403 Exit Time Location 402 Location 403 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location 404 405 Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode Location 404 Location 405 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location 406 407 Delay Alarm Reporting Time Location 406 Location 407 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location 408 409 Sensor Watch Time Location 408 Location 409 Increments Of Days Tens Digit Increments Of Days Units Digit Location 410 Codepad Lockout Time Location 411 Siren Run Time Location 412 Siren Sound Rate Slow lt Sound gt Fast Location 413 Auto Arming Pre Alert Time Location 414 417 Auto Arming Time Location 414 Location 415 Location 416 Location 417 Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Hour Of The Day Units Digit Minute Of The Day Tens Digit Minute Of The Day Units Digit Location 418 421 Auto
274. ontrol panel has now been successfully defaulted back to the factory default settings How To Default The Control Panel Via Default Button 1 Disconnect the AC mains supply and the backup battery from the control panel 2 Hold down and continue to hold down the DEFAULT button The default button is located at the top of the PCB next to the PROGRAMMING KEY connecting socket 3 Reconnect the AC mains supply to the control panel 4 After reconnecting the AC mains supply wait for 3 5 seconds before releasing the DEFAULT button 5 Disarm the system using the default Master Code e g Enter 2580 followed by the button The control panel has now been successfully defaulted back to the factory default settings If you hear the dialler seize relay RL2 click four times while attempting to default the control panel this would indicate that the feature of defaulting the control panel has been disabled in LOCATION 900 on page 47 The conirol panel will need to be returned to Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited for exchange where a service fee will be charged to unlock the conirol panel s memory if the Installer Code is not known Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Codepad Indicators 50 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad Solution The codepad is the communications interface between you and your alarm system The codepad allows you to issue commands and offe
275. oon as the button is pressed positioning you at the next location ready for programming If the decimal point is not illuminated on the hand held programmer the automatic stepping of locations is disabled and programming the next location will need to be manually selected by pressing the button As you can see from the examples below auto step mode can be very useful when programming successive locations When programming via the remote codepad there are no visual indications to display if automatic stepping of locations has been enabled How To Enable Automatic Stepping Of Locations 1 Enter Installer s Programming Mode i e 1 2 3 4 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard If you are using the remote codepad the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash to indicate that you have entered Installer s Programming Mode You will also notice that the remote codepad will display the data currently programmed in LOCATION 000 2 Enter command 9 6 6 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard How To Disable Automatic Stepping Of Locations 1 Enter command 9 6 6 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard Auto Step Enabled To enter the Primary Telephone Number 02 pause 9672 1055 with auto step enabled i e Decimal point illuminated when using the hand held programmer Press O followed by the button This will position you at LOCATION 000 being the start of the Primary Telephone Numbe
276. or a detector has noted an intrusion A numerical code that is used to arm and disarm the system in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 A monitored input used to trigger an alarm condition A zone may be set up only to activate an alarm when the system is armed or to operate irrespective of the system being armed or disarmed A monitored input where tamper switches and emergency switches may be connected If at any time whether your system is armed or disarmed one of these switches is violated an alarm condition will be generated Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 262 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Solution 844 862 880 Wiring Diagram 605 Plug 1 Green Internal Phone Line 5 Yellow Internal Phone Line 2 Black Telecom Line Street 6 Red Telecom Line Street 3 amp 4 Not Used LINK BETWEEN 12V AND COMM HORN YELLOW STROBE PPEAKER GREEN RED CODEPAD Black a I a lt m ral gt YELLOW ON C Za YELLOW is GREEN 18VAC 1 3A ql Plug Pack TF008 Figure 20 Solution 844 862 880 Wiring Diagram ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Terminals and Descriptions 263 Solution 844 862 880 Component Overlay OUT Internal Phone Line OUT Internal Phone Line Socket For IN Telecom Line Street Termination For Telecom Lead IN Telecom Line Street Phone Line Connection v v lt Battery Input
277. or a detector is on stand by waiting for an intrusion Sensor watch gives the control panel the ability to recognise that detection devices may have stopped working This is a feature that monitors the operation of a zone over a programmed time period When programming your system it is possible to have an individual zone for silent alarm This means that when the zone is violated your alarm system will communicate with the monitoring station without sounding the sirens This can only be programmed by your installer Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Terminals and Descriptions 261 Term Description STAY Mode 1 STAY Mode 2 Telco Arming Sequence Telco Disarm Sequence Unsealed User Code Zones 24 Hour Zone Is a condition that automatically isolates certain zones when your system is armed in STAY Mode 1 These zones can only be programmed by your installer Is a condition that automatically isolates certain zones when your system is armed in STAY Mode 2 These zones are programmed by the Master Code holder Telco arming is a feature that automatically diverts your telephone number to another telephone when the system is armed in AWAY Mode same as using call forwarding Telco disarm automatically un diverts your telephone upon disarming your system Refers to zone status If a zone is unsealed the detection devices are violated and the zone indicator will be illuminated i e a reed switch is open
278. ore signal when it has resealed The trouble code parameter is used as the expansion digit in 4 2 Format It has no effect on Contact ID Format as a Sensor Trouble report will always be reported on event code 380 If Sensor Trouble reports are not required program LOCATION 327 328 with a zero Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 190 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Zone Status Sensor Watch Reports LOCATION 329 330 45 Location Description Sensor Watch Report Sensor Watch Restore Report Table 93 Zone Status Sensor Watch Report Locations A Self Test Failure report Contact ID Event Code 307 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when a zone has not been triggered during the Sensor Watch Time programmed in LOCATION 408 409 on page 220 This report will continue to be transmitted according to the frequency of the sensor watch time until the fault has been rectified To clear the fault and stop any further reporting the zone that registered the fault must be unsealed and resealed again Refer to LOCATION 408 409 on page 220 to set the number of days a zone may remain sealed before registering as a fault Refer to Zone Options 1 on page 179 to program zones to be monitored by the sensor watch feature If Self Test Failure reports are not required program LOCATION 329 330 with a zero Zone Status Alarm Restore Code LOCATION 331 If you wish th
279. orts 165 Arm Only Closing Reports 165 Arm and Disarm Code To Isolate 166 Arm and Disarm Code To Isolate Open Close Reports 166 Arm and Disarm Master Code Functions 166 Arm and Disarm Master Code Functions Open Close Reports 166 Arm and Disarm Master Code Functions Code To Isolate 166 Arm and Disarm Master Code Functions Code To Isolate Open Close Reports 166 Zone Information 167 Day Alarm Zones 168 Day Alarm Resetting 168 Day Alarm Latching 168 Day Alarm Operation 169 EOL Resistor Value 170 Connections Of Split EOL Resistors Using N C Contacts 171 Connections Of Split EOL Resistors Using N O Contacts 172 Zone Programming 173 Zone Operating Information 173 Zone Options 173 Zone Reporting Information 173 Solution 844 Zones Defaults 174 Solution 862 Zones Defaults 174 Solution 880 Zones Defaults 174 Zone Types 175 Instant Zone 175 Handover Zone 175 Delay 1 Zone 175 Delay 2 Zone 175 Reserved 175 Reserved 176 24 Hour Medical 176 24 Hour Panic 176 24 Hour Hold Up 176 24 Hour Tamper 176 Reserved 176 Keyswitch Zone 176 24 Hour Burglary Zone 176 24 Hour Fire Zone 176 Chime Zone 177 Zone Not Used 177 Zone Pulse Count 177 Zone Pulse Count Handover 177 Zone Pulse Count Time 178 Zone Options 1 179 Lockout Siren amp Lockout Dialler 179 Delay A
280. ote Radio User Code Priority Levels The radio remote hand held transmitters may only be programmed to operate as user codes 9 16 Priority levels can be allocated to each radio remote hand held transmitter allowing the transmitter to only arm the system arm and disarm the system etc Refer to User Code Priority on page 165 for more information Before any hand held radio transmitter can operate the control panel you will need to teach the control panel the transmitters radio code Refer to Changing Or Deleting Remote Radio User Codes on page 79 for more information Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Remote Radio Transmitter Operations 79 Changing Or Deleting Remote Radio User Codes Up to eight remote radio hand held transmitters User Codes 9 16 may be used to operate the system Before the control panel will accept any of the signals from any radio remote hand held transmitter the control panel must learn the code of the transmitter You may substitute the Master Code with the Installer Code if required to perform the function of changing or deleting remote radio user codes How To Add Or Change A Remote Radio User Code 1 Enter your MASTER CODE followed by 1 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Z Enter the USER NUMBER 9 16 that you wish to add or change followed by the away button Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding code
281. ow commence If horn speaker indication beeps have been enabled two beeps will be heard from the horn speaker If the strobe indications have been enabled the strobe will flash for 6 seconds to indicate that the system has been armed Disarming From AWAY Mode 1 Press either the AWAY or STAY button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds Two beeps will be heard on the remote codepad and the AWAY indicator will extinguish If the horn speaker indication beeps have been enabled one beep will be heard from the horn speaker If the strobe indications have been enabled the strobe will flash for 3 seconds to indicate that the system has been disarmed Arming In STAY Mode 1 1 Press STAY button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds Two beeps will be heard on the remote codepad and the STAY indicator will now illuminate Exit time will now commence If the horn speaker indication beeps have been enabled one two tone beep will be heard from the horn speaker If the strobe indications have been enabled the strobe will flash for 6 seconds to indicate that the system has been armed Disarming From STAY Mode 1 1 Press either the AWAY or STAY button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds Two beeps will be heard on the remote codepad and the STAY indicator will extinguish If the horn speaker indication beeps have been enabled one beep will be heard from the horn speaker If the strobe indications have been enabled
282. pad indicators will illuminate Refer to Table 33 Codepad Indicators Showing Relative Remote User Numbers on page 80 3 Now press any of the buttons on the hand held transmitter to allow the control panel to learn the hand held transmitters ID code Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish If you wish to add or change any further remote radio user codes repeat this procedure as many times as required 1 any USER NUMBER AWAY TRANSMIT When adding or changing remote radio user codes this function will automatically terminate if a button is not pressed within sixty seconds or by pressing the button One long beep indicates the code entered already exists or an incorrect user number has been selected Radio remote user codes must be allocated to one or more areas when operating a Solution 880 control panel that has been partitioned Refer to User Code Allocations on page 247 for more information Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 80 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual How To Delete A Remote Radio User Code 1 Enter your followed by 1 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter the USER NuMBER 9 16 that you wish to delete followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding ZONE indicator will illuminate Refer to Table 33 Codepad I
283. panel into an existing installation without having to change the EOL resistors This feature also increases the security of the system as there are eleven possible EOL resistor values that can be used This makes it extremely difficult for anyone to tamper with the system If split EOL resistors have been selected the control panel will look for four burglary zones 1 4 consisting of 3K3 EOL resistors and four 24 hour zones 5 8 consisting of 6K8 resistors connected in parallel The zone 1 terminal on the PCB becomes the terminal for zones 1 and 5 Caution should be exercised when using split EOL resistors to create four burglary poe zones and four 24 hour zones This configuration is only suitable for normally closed contacts If normally open contacts are used as is the case with most types of smoke f detectors a short circuit on one zone will trigger both zones connected in parallel If you require N O contacts when using split EOL resistors refer Connections Of Split EOL Resistors Using N O Contacts on page 172 for information on how to connect N O contacts ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Information 171 Connections Of Split EOL Resistors Using N C Contacts ZONE 6 6K8 ZONE 3 3K3 Figure 8 Connections Of Split EOL Resistors For 8 Zones Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 172 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Connections Of Split EOL Resistors
284. perate with the Solut ion range of control panels This codepad provides indications for up to 8 zones This codepad cannot be used with the Solution 880 control panel when partitioned CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad CP508L This codepad is designed to operate with the Solut ion range of control panels with a fixed icon display This codepad provides indications for up to 8 zones This codepad cannot be used with the Solut ion 880 control panel when partitioned CP5 Eight Zone Area Addressable Codepad CP500A This codepad is designed to operate with the Solut ion 880 control panels when partitioned These codepads have DIP switches on the back of the codepad to select which area in partitioning that the codepad belongs to Refer to Setting Up and Programming Codepads For Partitioning on page 248 and Codepad Connections For Partitioning on page 249 for more information CP5 Master Partitioned Codepad CP500P This codepad is designed to operate with the Solut ion 880 control panels when partitioned These codepads allow the entire system to be operated from the single codepad allowing the user to toggle between separate areas by pressing the Away button This means that there is no need to have separate CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepads for each area Refer to Setting Up and Programming Codepads For Partitioning on page 248 and Codepad Connections For Partitioning on page 249 for more information Electronics Design and Manufacturing P
285. programming zones to operate for day alarm Exit Warning Entry Warning Day Alarm Resetting This output combines exit warning entry warning and day alarm so that any of these three events will activate the output This output will activate once the system has been armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 irrespective of any zones being sealed or unsealed until exit time expires The next time the output will activate will be during entry time and will reset once entry time has expired or the system has been disarmed This output will also operate when the Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode is timing If a zone programmed for day alarm has triggered during the disarmed state the output will reset when the zone has resealed Day alarm may be turned on and off by holding down the 4 button Refer to Day Alarm Zones on page 168 for programming zones to operate for day alarm Day Alarm Resetting This output will operate when a zone programmed for day alarm has been triggered The output will reset when the day alarm zone has resealed Day alarm may be turned on and off by holding down the 4 button Refer to Day Alarm Zones on page 168 for programming zones to operate for day alarm Day Alarm Latching This output will operate when a zone programmed for day alarm has been triggered AWAY The output will reset when the button has been pressed Day alarm may be turned on and off by holding down the 4 button Refer to Day Alarm Zones
286. r For Receiver 1 ojJ 2 p3 94 6 7 2 1 foJl4 5 5 0 X Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 45 Example Auto Step Disabled To enter the Primary Telephone Number 02 pause 9672 1055 with auto step disabled i e Decimal point extinguished when using the hand held programmer Press O followed by the button This will position you at LOCATION 000 being the start of the Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 oj 2 4 f3J 9 H 6 7 424 4 14 oJ 5 5 0 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 46 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Command 999 Display Panel Type Or Software Version Number When using this command via the remote codepad the codepad will display the panel version of the control panel As there are three different control panel s using the same PCB it is difficult to know which control panel the PCB has been set up to be The codepad will display a 4 6 or 8 depending on the software of the control panel Refer to the Table 9 Control Panel Type below for more information Indicator Control Panel Type Table 9 Control Panel Type When using this command via the hand held programmer the hand held programmer will display the software version number of the control panel How To Display The Control Panel Type Or Software Version Number 1
287. r a sensor watch fault if not triggered during the disarmed state within 3 days This feature would be useful in a situation where someone has moved objects in the view of the detector blocking out the detector from picking up movement Codepad Lockout Time LOCATION 410 0 Location Description 410 Increments Of 1 Minute 0 15 Minutes Table 122 Codepad Lockout Time Locations All codepads will be locked out for the specified time programmed if an invalid code has been entered more times than allowed by the code retry attempts programmed in LOCATION 356 on page 197 If the Codepad Lockout Time is programmed as zero no codepad lockout will occur ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Event Timers 221 LOCATION 411 Defaulted To 5 Minutes 5 Location Description 411 Increments Of 1 Minute 0 15 Table 123 Siren Run Time Location The siren run time determines how long the horn speaker will activate during an alarm condition The siren run time can be programmed between 0 15 minutes 1 minute Siren Sound Rate LOCATION 412 7 Location Description 412 Siren Sound Rate 0 SLOWEST 15 FASTEST Table 124 Siren Sound Rate Location The siren sound rate varies the frequency of the siren tone Programming the siren sound rate as a zero is the slowest and fifteen is the fastest The siren sound rate does not change the frequency rate for the fire alarm tone Electronics Desi
288. r any additional specialised equipment This memory is laid out in numerous locations each of which holds the data for a specific function 15 is the maximum value that can be programmed into any location In general the entire programming sequence will consist of nominating the required location number and then enter or change the current data You will repeat this procedure until all the data has been programmed to suit your requirements The factory default settings have been selected for reporting to the monitoring station in the Contact ID Format The Installers Code only gives access to the Installer s Programming Mode and does NOT arm and disarm the system Installer s Programming Mode can not be entered when the system is armed or at any time during siren run time Programming of the Solution 844 862 880 control panel can be carried out via any of the following three methods e Remote Codepad e Hand Held Programmer CC8 14 e Alarm Link Upload Download Software CC8 16 Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 LOCATION 000 015 ISSUE140 0000000000000000 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 29 Programming With The Remote Codepad Example When programming the control panel via the remote codepad the system must be in the disarmed state with no alarm memory present To access the Installer s Programming Mode enter the four digit INSTALLER CODE followed by the away bu
289. r codes Refer to Remote Radio Transmitter Operations on page 78 for more information Multiple Master Codes can be programmed Refer to Master Code Functions on page 99 for more information on adding deleting or changing user codes j The priority level for each user code can only be programmed or altered by the installer User Code 16 will report when any of the following methods for arming and disarming are used 1 Arm and disarm via remote radio control equipment connected to the optional Radio Key Keyswitch Interface CC8 13 2 Arm and disarm the system via Alarm Link Software CC816 3 Arm the system remotely over the telephone 4 Single button arming in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 5 Single button disarming from STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 6 Automatic arming in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 7 Automatic disarming from AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 164 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Solution 844 862 User Codes The Solution 844 862 has the ability to have up to eight programmable user codes User Codes 1 8 to operate the system Refer to System Operations on page 62 for information on the different methods of arming and disarming the system User codes 9 16 have been included to allow those systems that require radio remote control via hand held remote transmitters Refer to Remote Radio Transmitter Operations on page 78
290. ransmitted at the end of exit time for any zone that has been manually isolated 24 hour zones will send a Zone Bypass report at the time the zone has been selected to be isolated A Zone Bypass Restore report will be transmitted when the system has been disarmed All bypassed zones are automatically cleared when the system has been disarmed The bypass code parameter is used as the expansion digit in 4 2 Formats It has no effect on Contact ID Format as a zone bypass will always be reported on event code 570 ml If Zone Bypass reports are not required program LOCATION 325 326 with a zero ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Reporting Information 189 Zone Status Trouble Reports LOCATION 327 328 23 Location Description Zone Trouble Report Zone Trouble Restore Report Table 92 Zone Status Trouble Report Locations A zone is in trouble when it is unsealed at the end of exit time A Sensor Trouble report Contact ID Event Code 380 will be transmitted to indicate that one or more zones have been automatically isolated by the system 24 hour zones that are unsealed at the end of exit time will not transmit a Sensor Trouble report as the restore for that zone is still outstanding A Sensor Trouble restore report will be transmitted for burglary zones when the zone reseals or when the system is next disarmed which ever happens first A 24 hour zone will only transmit a rest
291. rating From A CP5 Area Addressable LED Codepad When operating a CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad in a system that has been partitioned the display and operations are exactly the same as the CP5 Eight Zone LED codepad except that the commands issued from the codepad only effects the area that the codepad is allocated to Refer to System Operations on page 62 for more information on operating the system If the codepad is allocated to Area 2 only user codes that have been allocated to Area 2 can operate the codepad If user codes only have access to Area 1 entering their code at the Area 2 codepad will not operate Area or Area 2 If you wish to determine which codepad you are currently operating hold down the 8 button to determine which area that the codepad is allocated to i e If Zone 1 illuminates the codepad is allocated to Area 1 if Zone 2 illuminates the codepad is allocated to Area 2 Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 118 for more information Operating From A CP5 Master Partitioned Codepad When operating a CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad in a system that has been partitioned all operations are the same as the CP5 Area Addressable codepad with one exception All operations are only related to the Area Display that is being indicated on the codepad at the time i e If the Area Display illuminates number 2 the codepad is displaying information only for Area 2 Therefore all operations will only effect Area 2
292. reas For User 13 Location 748 749 Ring Burst Count Location 900 Disable Factory Default Location 901 904 System Time Location 905 910 System Date ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Page 243 1 First To Open Last To Close Reporting 2 Area 1 Codepad Connected To Data Terminal 4 Reset Sirens From Any Area Allowed 8 Master Codepad To Display AUX Indicator When On Line Page 244 1 Lock Area 1 To Receiver 1 and Lock Area 2 To Receiver 2 2 User Codes Allowed To Arm Disarm Both areas At Same Time code 0 4 Reserved 8 Reserved SS A Hh TNS ANG HENS NG ENTRIES ee Page 245 pAgerve prey a ng ong ng eng Ag Negev agen et a Yap Page 245 A ae le aa le ale le ie ls as Page 247 Location 451 Location 452 Location 453 Areas For User 2 0 Areas For User 3 0 Areas For User 4 o Location 455 Location 456 Location 457 Areas For User 6 0 Areas For User 7 0 Areas For User 8 0 Location 459 Location 460 Location 461 Areas For User 10 o Areas For User 11 o Areas For User 12 Location 463 Location 464 Location 465 Areas For User u o Areas For User 15 o Areas For User 16 Location 748 Increments Of 5 ms Location 749 Increments Of 80 ms 0 Defaulting Enabled 15 Defaulting Disabled Location 901 Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Location 902 Hour Of The Day Units Digit Location 903 Minute Of The Day Tens Digit ofolo fo Location 904 Minute Of The Day Units Dig
293. regardless of whether the system is in Installer s Programming Mode or normal operating mode The first five indicators are used to display the progressive steps for a transmission to the base station receiver Zone Indicator Dialling Event Telephone Line Seized Dialling Phone Number C a Daa 1s Being Transmited Table 40 Telephone Monitor Mode Indications How To Turn Telephone Monitor Mode On 1 Enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard How To Turn Telephone Monitor Mode Off 1 Enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by and the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard RSALERCODE 6 A Walk Test Mode Walk test mode allows you to test detection devices to ensure that they are functioning correctly Before activating walk test mode isolate any zones that are not required for testing Refer to Isolating Zones on page 70 for further information How To Enter Walk Test Mode 1 Enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 7 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash The codepad will beep once every second while the system is in walk test mode 25 Unseal and seal the zones to be tested The codepad will sound one long beep and the horn speaker will sound one short beep every time a zone is sealed or unsealed 3 Press the button to exit this function Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators w
294. reports to Receiver and the second dialler reports to Receiver 2 Each dialler has the ability to be programmed with two separate telephone numbers handshake tone reporting format type and Subscriber ID Number Dialler 1 could be set up to report in Domestic Dialling Format and reports to Receiver 1 Dialler 2 could be set up to report to a base station receiver in Contact ID Format only when Dialler 1 was unsuccessful How To Program A Telephone Number When programming the telephone number if a 0 is required it must be programmed as a 10 Each location in the primary secondary and call back telephone numbers hold one digit of the telephone number To tell the dialler when the end of the telephone number has been reached a O must be inserted at the end of the telephone number Therefore the dialling sequence will be terminated when a zero appears To program the telephone number 9672 1055 as the Primary Telephone Number for Receiver 1 you would program the following LOCATION 000 015 9672125500000000 Programming A Four Second Pause In The Telephone Number To enter a four second pause in the dialling sequence you would need to program the value 13 This may be necessary when the dialler is communicating through an old slower telephone exchange or where a PABX system is in place To program the telephone number 02 pause 9672 1055 as the Primary Telephone Number for Receiver 2 you would program the following L
295. rface between you and your alarm 12345 system The codepad allows you to issue commands and offers both visual 678 and audible indications that guide you through the general operation The codepad incorporates numerous indicators There are ZONE indicators _ that are used to show the condition of each zone and seven others for general f l y status The following is a list of situations and the relevant indications that will be seen Figure 2 CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad CP508L 123 k Zone Indicators The ZONE indicators are used to display the status of the zones The following table lists the various circumstances that the indicators will display i e Zone Sealed Zone Unsealed Indicator Definition 0 25 tee os Off Zone Is In Alarm Condition Flashing Slow 1 Sec On 1 Sec Off Zone Is Manually Isolated Table 16 Zone Indicators AWAY Indicator The AWAY indicator is used to display that the system is armed in AWAY Mode The indicator will also illuminate when the system is armed in AWAY Mode The AWAY indicator will also flash in unison with the STAY indicator when Installer s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions are used Refer to page 62 for more information on the different methods on arming the system in AWAY Mode Indicator Definition Off System Is Not Armed In AWAY Mode Table 17 AWAY Indicator Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 54 Flashing
296. rogramming Key This command erases all data from the programming key Only the Programming Key CC891 may be used with the Solut ion 844 862 880 control panel How To Erase The Programming Key 1 Enter Installer s Programming Mode i e 1 2 3 4 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash on the remote codepad to indicate that you have entered Installer s Programming Mode You will also notice that the remote codepad will display the data currently programmed in LOCATION 000 Connect the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the control panel found at the top of the PCB printed circuit board next to the Auxiliary Module socket Enter command 9 6 4 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard after the programming keys data has been deleted Before removing the programming key from the control panel enter command 9 6 0 followed by the button to exit Installer s Programming Mode The STAY and AWAY indicators will now extinguish on the remote codepad and the system will return to the disarmed state Failing to exit Installer s Programming Mode before removing the programming key may result in corrupting the programming key How To Erase The Programming Key Using The Hand Held Programmer 1 Before connecting the hand held programmer onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the
297. rs both visual and audible indications that guide you through the general operation The codepad incorporates numerous indicators There are ZONE indicators that are used to show the condition of each zone and four others for general status The following is a list of situations and the relevant indications that will be seen STAY MAINS FAULT AWAY Figure 1 CP5 Eight Zone Codepad CP508 Zone Indicators The ZONE indicators are used to display the status of the zones The following table lists the various circumstances that the indicators will display i e Zone Sealed Zone Unsealed Indicator Definition Flashing Fast Ji 0 25 Sec On 0 25 Sec Off Zone Is In Alarm Condition Flashing Slow 1 Sec On 1 Sec Off Zone Is Manually Isolated Table 10 Zone Indicators AWAY Indicator The AWAY indicator is used to display that the system is armed in AWAY Mode The AWAY indicator will also flash in unison with the STAY indicator when Installer s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions are used Refer to page 62 for more information on the different methods on arming the system in AWAY Mode Indicator Definition Off System Is Not Armed In AWAY Mode Table 11 AWAY Indicator ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Codepad Indicators 51 STAY Indicator The STAY indicator is used to display that the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 The STAY indicator will also flash in uni
298. s Strobe Test Holding the 3 button down will operate the strobe No other device will operate in this mode If an EDMSAT SS914 has been connected to the control panel this function will also test the strobe on the satellite siren How To Turn Strobe Test ON 1 Hold down the 3 button until three beeps are heard The strobe will begin to flash How To Turn Strobe Test OFF 1 Hold down the 3 button until two beeps are heard The strobe will stop flashing Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 120 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Turning Day Alarm On and Off Holding the 4 button down will turn day alarm on or off If the STAY indicator is required to indicate the status of day alarm operation enabled disabled refer to Option 8 in LOCATION 428 on page 233 for further information The STAY indicator when enabled will flash once every 3 seconds to display when day alarm is active How To Turn Day Alarm ON 1 Hold down the 4 button until three beeps are heard Day alarm has now been turned on How To Turn Day Alarm OFF 1 Hold down the 4 button until two beeps are heard Day alarm has now been turned off Fault Analysis Mode There are various system faults that can be detected by the control panel When any of these faults are present the FAULT indicator will begin to flash and the codepad will beep once every minute Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 74 for a more d
299. s 97 Telephone Numbers Changing Domestic Phone Numbets 004 88 Terminal Definitions and Descriptions 00 00 258 Fest RE POTS os s ccbess it sscsses cies oes sett atraer o aE 122 After Siren Resets irea aaa 233 Dialler Options ssri sinio sisersrs t aaee sis roito 199 Only When Armed 00 cece eeeeseeseeeeeees 233 267 Repeat Intervals sp ees er ern eE s 199 Reporting TIME sieren ee ea eini E 199 Set First Test Report censrsisisra ntesiet 87 TRO08 Plug Pack woo rarae 254 Transmission Format For Receiver 1 eeeeeeeee 145 Transmission Format For Receiver 2 cesceeeeee 148 Trouble Reports eee cseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeereesseesseenaes 189 U Unsealed deore riein ON 261 User Code Function Arm Disarm Both Areas At Same Time 117 User OO R ETE EE E E tia eid 163 261 Adding Or Changing ceececeeeccesreeeneeeeee 100 102 Allocations When Partitioning seseeseeeseeeeeeeeseeee 247 Dele tin 8 ss reia AEE a aa 101 103 Priority Leye lr na ieena aa haett 165 WwW Walk Test Mode cccccccccccecsesssssseeeececeesenseaeees 97 115 Warranty Statement 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeseenteensees 270 Wiring Diagram ee eceeeeeeceseceseeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 262 Z Zone Allocations arn nioa e e 245 Defaults 22s aa hee eee 24 174 Dialler Options 00 0 ee cece ceseeeseesseenees 173 184 EOL Resistor Value esceecceessecceseceeneeceteeeeneeees 170 ING Cators is secede an
300. s do not receive any handover pulses from other zones 24 Hour zones may i handover pulses to other zones ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Information Example 179 Zone Options 1 When programming this location you will notice that there are four options per location You may select one two three or all four of these options however only one number needs to be programmed This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together Program a seven 7 if you require options 1 2 and 4 simultaneously i e 1 2 4 7 Option Description Lockout Siren Lockout Dialler Delay Alarm Reporting 4 Silent Alarm 8 sensor Watch Table 85 Zone Options 1 Lockout Siren amp Lockout Dialler Lockout means one activation per arming cycle i e A zone programmed for Lockout can only cause the sirens or dialler to operate once When the system is next armed the zone can cause the sirens and dialler to operate once more Restore signals will be transmitted when the system has been disarmed The Solution 844 862 880 control panel performs lockout different to most other control panels in that only the first zone to trigger an alarm condition will be locked out All other zones that are triggered during the same siren run time will reset when the sirens reset This prevents an intruder from triggering all zones then waiting for the sirens to stop before re entering the premises All
301. s to followed by stay 2 and the button Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state lt a RSTALERCODE 3 my 1 aww E 61 ESE Feb a Example If you wish to automatically divert all unanswered incoming calls to another telephone number e g 9672 1777 when the system is armed in AWAY Mode follow the example sequence below and replace the telephone number mentioned in the manual with the telephone number that you wish to divert all calls to F 1234 35 1 ae How To Disable The Telco Arming Sequence If at any time you wish to cancel the telco arming sequence you may enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 3 and the button followed by 1 and the AWAY YJ button then the stay button followed by the 4 and the button o o RSMERCODE 3 Rm 1 Sy 4 Gow Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 92 ISSUE140 EF I Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual How To Program The Telco Disarming Sequence Easy Call Forward No Answer Off 1 Enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 3 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Press button 2 followed by the Away button to change the telco disarming sequence Three beeps will be heard If a previous telco disarming sequence has already been programmed the sequence will be displayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad ind
302. s will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Press button 2 followed by the Away button to change the telco disarming sequence Three beeps will be heard If a previous telco disarming sequence has already been programmed the sequence will be displayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators Refer to Table 39 Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence on page 90 for the indicators and their meanings If no telco disarming sequence has been programmed a further two beeps will be heard after entering this mode These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the call forward sequence has been displayed Enter stay 2 1 stay 2 and the LAWAY button Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state TERE 3 2 pu Em2 2 1 E2 ow How To Disable The Telco Disarming Sequence If at any time you wish to cancel the telco disarming sequence you may enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 3 and the button followed by 2 and the AWAY YJ button then the button followed by the 4 and the button ome E Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 7 Example ir 95 Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones This function allows the installer to select which zones are to be automatically isolated when the system is armed in STAY Mode 2 Every time the system is armed in STAY Mode 2 the zones selected using
303. scription Codepad Fire Reporting Code Units Digit Codepad Fire Reporting Code Tens Digit Table 99 Codepad Fire Report Locations A Fire Alarm report Contact ID Event Code 110 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the 4 and 6 buttons are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm Refer to Option 2 in LOCATION 425 on page 230 if you require codepad fire to be silent A distinct fire sound is emitted through the horn speaker to indicate this type of alarm condition The fire sound is different to the burglary sound i Restore reports are not transmitted for this event If a Fire report is not required program LOCATION 339 340 with a zero Codepad Medical Report LOCATION 341 342 7 Location Description Codepad Medical Reporting Code Tens Digit Codepad Medical Reporting Code Units Digit Table 100 Codepad Medical Report Locations A Medical report Contact ID Event Code 100 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the 7 and Q buttons are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm Refer to Option 4 in LOCATION 425 on page 230 if you require codepad medical to be silent Restore reports are not transmitted for this event If a Medical report is not required program LOCATION 341 342 with a zero Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 194 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Codepad Reporting Options LOCATION
304. served ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited p w Q o N N wo Solution 844 Programming Sheets Location 424 System Options 1 Location 425 System Options 2 Location 426 System Options 3 Location 427 System Options 4 Location 428 Consumer Options 1 Location 429 Consumer Options 2 Location 430 Consumer Options 3 Location 431 Radio Input Options Location 748 749 Ring Burst Count Location 900 Disable Factory Default Location 901 904 System Time Location 905 910 System Date Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited 281 Page 229 1 EDM Smart Lockout Allowed 2 Horn Speaker Monitor 4 Strobe Indications For Radio Arm Disarm 8 Horn Speaker Beeps For Radio Arm Disarm L Page 230 1 Codepad Panic To Be Silent 2 Codepad Fire To Be Silent 4 Codepad Medical To Be Silent o 8 Access Denied Code Retries To Be Silent Page 231 1 AC Fail In 1 Hour Disabled After 2 Minutes 2 Ignore AC Fail 4 Pulse Count Handover Allowed 8 8 Handover Delay To Be Sequential Page 232 1 Panel To Power Up Disarmed If Power Reset 2 Arm Disarm Tracking On Power Up 4 Internal Crystal To Keep Time 8 Keyswitch Interface Night Arm Station Or RE005 Installed 1 Test Reports Only When Armed 2 Test Report After Siren Reset 4 Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 8 STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status 1 Codepad Display Extinguish After 6
305. son with the AWAY indicator when Installer s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions are used For the different methods of arming the system in STAY Mode 1 refer to page 64 Refer to Zone Options 1 on page 173 for information on setting zones to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1 For the method of arming the system in STAY Mode 2 refer to page 67 Refer to Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 95 when using the Installer Code or Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 111 when using the Master Code Indicator Definition a OES System Is Armed In STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 Off System Is Not Armed In STAY Mode Flashing Zone Isolating Mode Or Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones Table 12 STAY Indicator MAINS Indicator The MAINS indicator is used to display that the systems AC mains supply is normal or has failed When programming numbers i e Installer s Programming Mode or Master Code Functions the MAINS indicator will illuminate when you program numbers between 10 and 15 The MAINS indicator represents digit 10 plus the value of the illuminated zone indicator e g If you program a twelve the MAINS indicator and zone 2 will illuminate Indicator Definition Flashing AC Mains Failure Table 13 MAINS Indicator FAULT Indicator The FAULT indicator is used to display that the system has detected a system fault Refer to Fault Analysis Mode on page 73 for more information on system faults Every time a new system fault has
306. sseo B20 Seconds O O O i Pat Second SSS 930 Seconds SSSCS Y 4 4 Seconds 12 60 Seconds 90 Seconds 6 10 Seconds 14 120 Seconds 15 Seconds 200 Seconds Table 165 Zone Pulse Count Time Options Zone Options 1 Zone Options 2 Description Option Description Lockout Siren Lockout Dialler 4 Forced Arming Allowed 8 Enable Zone Restore Report Table 166 Zone Options 1 Table 167 Zone Options 2 Zone Dialler Options Option Description 0 No Report Required Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails 1 Recei Table 168 Zone Dialler Options Zone Descriptions Use this table as a reference to indicate what each zone is connected to Zone Description Zone Description 1 5 2 6 E o a o d EA e a Table 169 Zone Descriptions Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 288 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Location 323 Page 185 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren Location 32400 en Page 186 Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler 6 Location 325 326 Page 188 Zone Status Bypass Reports Location 325 Zone Bypass Report yp P Location 326 Zone Bypass Restore Report Location 327 328 ee Page 189 Zone Status Trouble Reports Location 327 Zone Trouble Report P Location 328 Zone Trouble Restore Report 213 Location 329 330 ak ee ar ee pe gp ee ee ee pe Page 190 Zone Status Sensor Watch Reports Location 329 Sensor Watch Hepo P Location 330 Sensor Watch Restore Report 4 5 bans ee
307. st test report will occur the first test report time will default back to the repeat interval time between each test report as set in LOCATION 366 Test reports will not report if the Subscriber ID Number is 0000 The number of days decrements by one at 2400 hours as set in LOCATION 901 904 on page 225 If you programmed the repeat interval in the test reports for every seven days but wish to have the first test report to begin in two days time follow the sequence outlined below 1234 1 2 au Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 88 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Changing Domestic Phone Numbers 2 When the system has been set up for domestic dialling this function allows the installer to view and program the required telephone numbers that the system will call in the event of an alarm For a more detailed description refer to Domestic Dialling on page 131 for further information How To Change Domestic Phone Numbers 1 Enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 2 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash If there are telephone numbers already programmed they will be displayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators Refer to Table 37 Codepad Indicators When Changing Telephone Numbers on page 89 for the indicators and their meanings If there are no telephone numbers programmed a further two beeps will be
308. stem is armed or disarmed Answering machine bypass has been incorporated so that it is possible to make a connection with the control panel for remote arming or remote programming operations when there is an answering machine or facsimile machine on the same telephone line When the system is in a state ready to accept alarms Automatic arming allows the system to automatically arm at the same time each day in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 Automatic disarming allows the system to automatically disarm at the same time each day in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 This is the button on your codepad used to execute any given command Is the mode used to arm your system when you leave your premises The codepad allows you to perform all functions such as arming disarming and programming of your alarm system Day alarm allows a combination of zones to be monitored while the system is in the disarmed state Are devices connected to your alarm system used to cause an alarm condition Some common forms of detection devices are passive infrared smoke photo electric beams reed switches and vibration sensors Is a device that is used for communicating to a monitoring station mobile phone or pocket pager etc Is when your system is in a state that will not accept alarms except for 24 hour zones Dual reporting allows your control panel to transmit alarm signals in two different reporting formats EG The control panel may transmit to a monitoring s
309. stored Time parameters are not applicable to this polarity Normally Open Pulsing Low 2 This polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to pulsing zero volts when the event occurs The output will switch back to open circuit when the event has restored Time parameters vary the On time of the pulse Normally Open One Shot Low 3 This one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs The output will switch back to open circuit when the time parameter setting has expired This one shot time setting will always run its full duration and cannot be manually reset Normally Open One Shot Low With Retrigger 4 This one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs Every time the event occurs it will restart the one shot timer The output will switch back to open circuit once the one shot time has expired This polarity is ideally suited for lighting control A PIR can be used to trigger an output for turning on lights While ever there is movement the PIR will keep re triggering the output and lengthen the time the lights will remain switched on Normally Open One Shot Low With Reset 5 This one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs The output will switch back to open circuit when the one shot time has expired or when the event has returned to normal This means the operation of the outpu
310. t Qualifier Which Gives Event Code Group Number Point ID Number Subscriber ID Specific Event Information Made Up Of 3 Made Up Of 2 Made Up Of 3 Number 1 New Event Or Opening Hex Digits Hex Digits Hex Digits 3 New Restore Or Closing Table 57 Contact ID Format Breakdown In general Contact ID reporting format is very simple as most of the Event Codes and Point ID Codes have been predefined The base station software usually only has the ability to identify a zone going into alarm by its Point ID Code and usually pays little attention to the Event Code Refer to Table 58 Point ID Codes on page 137 for further information on the Solut ion 844 862 880 Point ID Codes ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Dialler Reporting Formats 137 Point ID Codes The table below shows the different Point ID Codes and Event Codes that are transmitted to the base station receiver when using Contact ID Reporting Format All event codes are fixed and will always transmit the same code as there are no programming locations made available to alter these Point ID Event Event Number Description Code Explanation Page O poemas w fen O Medical Zone 24 Hour Medical S a E C eee e ere E a E AE oe a a e ema o e e eoe e a e ee e ee e ee e e o pee e pee Table 58 Point ID Codes Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 138 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual ISSUE140 4
311. t can be shortened regardless of the time parameter programmed Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 214 ISSUE140 10 I 12 13 14 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Normally Open One Shot Low With Alarm This one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs The output will switch back to open circuit once the one shot time has expired when the event has returned to normal or when the system has been disarmed This polarity is ideally suited for the operation of strobe lights as they can be programmed Up to 99 hours to reset and prevent them from burning out or becoming annoying to others from prolonged operation Normally Open Latching Low This polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs The output will switch back to open circuit once the 7 button on the remote codepad is held down until two beeps are heard Time parameters are not applicable to this polarity Normally Low Going Open This polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs The output will switch back to zero volts when the event has restored Time parameters are not applicable to this polarity Normally Low Pulsing Open This polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to pulsing open circuit when the event occurs The output will switch back to zero volts when the event has restored Ti
312. t selected the system will not allow the user code holder to arm the system until the zone in question has been sealed or manually isolated Refer to Isolating Zones on page 70 for more information Zone Restore Report If this option has been selected the zone will send restore reports as soon as the zone has restored If this option has not been selected the zone will not send restore reports after the zone has restored If a non 24 hour zone has not restored at the time the system is disarmed the system will automatically send a zone restore report for that zone All 24 hour zone types will only a send zone restore report at the time the zone has restored Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 184 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Zone Reporting Information Zone Report Code If you wish the control panel to transmit zone alarm reports this location should be programmed as 1 If you do not wish to transmit zone alarm reports this location should be programmed as a 0 Zone Dialler Options This location is factory default to report only to receiver 1 You can select each zone to report on receiver 1 receiver 2 both receiver 1 and receiver 2 receiver 2 only when receiver fails or no reporting at all Select the required dialler option from the table below Option Description oo No Report Required 4 Receiver and Receiver 2 og Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails
313. tash evs bel edathe E E T 233 Send Test Report After Siren Reset ee 233 Send Test Reports Only If Armed 233 Consumer Options 2 Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm eee 234 Enable Codepad Extinguish Mode ee 234 Single Button Arming 00 eee cece cess cee cree enee 234 Single Button Disarming eee eeeeeseeeeeeeee 234 Consumer Options 3 Codepad Fault Alarm Beeps cece eee eeeeeee 235 Operation Of Siren amp Strobe In STAY Mode 235 Use Digit 3 For Duress Instead Of Digit 9 0 0 0 235 Contact ID Format pinne steeds eevee croeyeoes eats 136 Control Panel To Power Up Disarmed 232 Copy Control Panel Memory To Programming Key 40 Copy From Programming Key To Control Panel 41 D Dat and TIME e eei eea iea aon 74 114 225 Day Alaf Minea iioa Arie e a ne ees 168 259 Tatching setii tects cones Sas eds 168 Operation 2 lt ss bisa iiss Ae he Bane oes Sih enis 169 Resetting 3 0 snes itis te eiie ioeie setae lle 168 Status Indicator oe eee eseeeeceeecesecesecsseesaeenes 233 Turning On Off ee eee eeceeeceseceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeee 120 Decadic Dialling To 60 40 eee eee cee cree eneeeee 159 Defaulting The Control Panel eee 39 48 Delay Alarm Reporting Time eee eee eeeeee 219 Delay Siren Until Transmission Complete 158 D tectorS ooet ei ineei o ade cub She cuee tees 259 Diallets aae E Wien Gielen ae 259 Dialler Information Answering Machine Bypass
314. tation as well as a mobile phone etc or even to two different monitoring stations Is a feature used to monitor and test the condition of your backup battery Is a self contained siren unit complete with flashing blue strobe light and a backup battery It offers a higher level of security for your alarm system Is the time allowed after entering your premises to disarm your system before an alarm occurs Is the beeping from your codepad during entry time to remind you to disarm your system Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 260 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Term Description Exit Time or Exit Delay External Equipment Forced Arming Handover Delay Hand Held Radio Remote Control Lockout Dialler Lockout Siren Master Code Monitoring Station Panic Phone Controller Partitioning Radio Remote User Codes Sealed Sensor Watch Silent Alarm ISSUE140 Is the amount of time you have to leave your premises after you have armed your system Is any device connected to your system such as detectors codepads and sirens Is a situation where your alarm system is permitted to be armed when one or more zones are unsealed When your system is armed and zone one is violated the entry delay starts timing If zone two is then violated the entry delay time is handed over to zone two and so on through zones three and four This is known as sequential hand over delay Hand h
315. tems will be able to actually trick the dialler into thinking it is talking to a base station thus actually clearing the alarm signal Pretty frightening when you thought the control panel you were using and recommending to your customers is supposed to have anti jamming At Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited we take anti jamming very seriously and have in fact devoted a great deal of time and money researching this problem Our engineers have come up with the best possible anti jamming procedure known and patented accordingly Patent Number 571994 Our procedure is very simple and effective because we never answer the burglar s phone call and the Telecom Network will automatically clear an unanswered call in approximately ninety seconds This time will be even shorter if the call is originated through the Mobile Net Network where it will most likely be in the case of a true burglary Once the control panel detects that the phone line has stopped ringing it immediately loops the line and makes its call therefore transmitting its alarm message successfully The line is also automatically disconnected from the telephones within the protected premises immediately on an alarm condition by the control panel to further confuse the burglar and eliminate the possibility of the burglar answering the call As you can see our method of anti jamming will in the worst possible case delay the alarm signal by ninety seconds but even more importantly
316. ter Code 2580 with the Master Code that has been programmed 7 2580 1 A aww STAY Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 102 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Changing and Deleting Remote Radio User Codes This function allows a Master Code holder to add change or delete any of the system user codes How To Add Or Change A Remofe Radio User Code 1 Enter your MASTER cone followed by 1 andthe away button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter the USER NuMBER 9 16 that you wish to change followed by the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate Refer to Table 45 Codepad Indicators Showing Relative Remote User Numbers on page 103 T 3 Now press any of the RANSMIT J buttons on the hand held transmitter Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish If you wish to change any further user codes repeat this procedure as many times as required WASTER CODE 1 ow USER NUMBER AWAY TRANSMIT When adding or changing remote radio user codes this function will automatically terminate if a button is not pressed within sixty seconds or by pressing the AWAY button will also terminate the session at anytime One long beep indicates the code entered already exists or an incorrect user number has been selected
317. tery test reports the battery test is OK If a Low Battery Restore report is not required program LOCATION 354 355 with a zero ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Reporting Information 197 System Status Access Denied LOCATION 356 358 6 7 Location Description Code Retries 0 15 System Status Access Denied Reporting Code Units Digit System Status Access Denied Reporting Code Tens Digit Table 108 System Status Access Denied Locations An Access Denied report Contact ID Event Code 421 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the number of incorrect code attempts equals the number programmed in LOCATION 356 This is an audible alarm Refer to Option 8 in LOCATION 425 on page 230 if you require this alarm to be silent at Restore signals for this event are not transmitted If an Access Denied report is not required program LOCATION 357 358 with a zero Code Retries Code retries restricts the amount of times an invalid user code can be used in an attempt to operate the system This location sets the number of incorrect code attempts that will cause an alarm condition When the number of incorrect code attempts equals the number programmed in this location the system will carry out the following 1 Activate the sirens internal screamers and strobes connected to the control panel Refer to Option 8 in LOCATION 425 on page 230 if you req
318. test calls at pre determined times Such test calls will interrupt any other calls that may be set up on the line at the same time The timing set for such test calls should be discussed with the installer The timing set for test calls from this equipment may be subject to drift If this proves to be inconvenient and your calls are interrupted then the problem of timing should be discussed with the equipment installer The matter should NOT be reported as a fault to Telecom Faults Service This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111 Emergency Service This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers In the event of any problem with this device the systems battery AC mains supply and telephone line should be disconnected The user is to then arrange with the supplier of the device to make the necessary repairs Should the matter be reported to Telecom as a wiring fault and the fault be proven to be due to this product a call out charge will be incurred Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Solution 844 Programming Sheets 274 Location 000 015 Primary Telephone Number For Receiver I Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Page 143 Location 016 031 Secondary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 Page 143 Location 032 Handshake Tone For Receiver 1 HI LO Handshake Contact ID 1400 Hz TX 1900
319. that guide you through the general operation AU M NS FAI x gt E The codepad incorporates numerous indicators There are ZONE indicators that are used to show the condition of each zone and four others for general status The following is a list of situations and the relevant indications that will be seen Figure 13 CP5 Master Partitioned LED Codepad CP500P The indicators on a CP5 Master Partitioned LED codepad are configured in to four groups Following is a description of what the indicators mean Zone Indicators 1 The ZONE indicators are used to display the status of the zones The following table lists the various circumstances that the indicators will display i e Zone Sealed Zone Unsealed Indicator Definition Off Zone Is Sealed 0 25 Eaten Off Zone Is In Alarm Condition a Sone oS Zone Is Manually Isolated Table 143 Zone Indicators ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Partitioning 239 Area On Off Indicators The group of four Area On Off indicators 1 4 show the status of each area i e If an indicator is illuminated that area is armed and if the indicator is not illuminated that area is disarmed If an area is armed in STAY Mode 1 the corresponding Area On Off indicator will be illuminated in conjunction with the PARTIAL indicator If the area is armed in AWAY Mode only the corresponding Area On Off Indicator will be illuminated Area On Off
320. the indicators and their meanings If there is no call forward sequence programmed a further two beeps will be heard after entering this mode These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the call forward sequence has been displayed 3 Enter stay 1 2 1 followed by the you wish the control panel to divert all calls to followed by stay 2 and the button Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state lt a RSTALERCODE 3 my 1 aww E 21 GSES ED a Example If you wish to automatically divert all incoming calls to another telephone number e g 9672 1777 when the system is armed in AWAY Mode follow the example sequence below and replace the telephone number mentioned in the manual with the telephone number that you wish to divert all calls to F 1234 35 1 ae a How To Disable The Telco Arming Sequence If at any time you wish to cancel the telco arming sequence you may enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 3 and the button followed by 1 and the AWAY YJ button then the stay button followed by the 4 and the button o o RSMERCODE 3 Rm 1 Sy 4 Gow Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 94 ISSUE140 EF I Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual How To Program The Telco Disarming Sequence Easy Call Forward Immediate Off 1 Enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 3 and the AWAY button Three beep
321. the end of exit time the ZONE indicators will extinguish and the codepad will give one short beep O If a zone is not sealed at the end of exit time the zone will be automatically isolated and will be constantly illuminated on the remote codepad The zone will become an active part of the system again as soon as it has resealed i e If a window is left open after exit time has expired the window will not be an active part of the system until it has closed Opening the window after exit time has expired will cause an alarm condition Forced Arming The feature of arming the system when a zone is not sealed is known as forced arming Refer to Zone Options 2 on page 183 to enable forced arming for each zone If the STAY indicator does not illuminate and a long beep is heard when attempting to arm the system forced arming is not permitted If this is the case you must ensure that all zones are sealed or manually isolated before you can arm the system Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 68 i Method One KF Method Two ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Disarming The System From STAY Mode 2 There are two methods for disarming the system from STAY Mode 2 Method one is standard and will always operate Method two is optional and needs Option 4 to be enabled in LOCATION 429 on page 234 Method two will not operate unless both Option 2 and Option 4 has been enabled in LOCATION 429
322. the system is armed or disarmed 8 Disarmed 9 Armed The second digit on the system status display indicates which codepad alarm was triggered by the operator 0 No Codepad Alarm 1 Codepad Panic or Duress 2 Codepad Fire Alarm 3 Codepad Medical Alarm Refer to Figure 4 CP5 LED Codepad Showing Audible Alarm Buttons on page 69 for more information The third digit on the system status display indicates when the AC mains supply has failed 0 AC mains supply is normal 1 AC mains supply has failed or disconnected The fourth digit on the system status display indicates when a system fault has occurred at the control panel 0 System Normal There is no faults 1 System Fault There is a fault registered by the control panel Refer to Fault Analysis Mode on page 73 for more information on the types of system faults that may occur Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Dialler Information 142 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Dialler Information ISSUE140 Example Example Example This section outlines the programming information required for the Solution 844 862 880 control panel when communicating with base station receivers Typically these parameters specify the telephone numbers to call the transmission formats handshake tones and transmission speeds The Solution 844 862 880 has the ability to report event information from two on board diallers The first dialler
323. the telco disarming sequence Three beeps will be heard If a previous telco disarming sequence has already been programmed the sequence will be displayed one digit at a time via the remote codepad indicators Refer to Refer to Table 49 Codepad Indicators For Changing Telco Arm Disarm Sequence on page 106 for the indicators and their meanings If no telco disarming sequence has been programmed a further two beeps will be heard after entering this mode These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the call forward sequence has been displayed Enter stay 2 1 stay 2 and the LAWAY button Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to the disarmed state SESE 3 Be 2 fu Em2 2 1 E2 E How To Disable The Telco Disarming Sequence If at any time you wish to cancel the telco disarming sequence you may enter your MASTER Cope followed by 3 and the button followed by 2 and the button then the button followed by the 4 and the button to disable the telco arming sequence WASTER CODE 3 Rw 2 fom Say 4 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 111 Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones 4 This function allows the Master Code Holder to select which zones are to be automatically isolated when the system is armed in STAY Mode 2 Every time the system is armed in STAY Mode 2 the zones selected using this function will be automatically isolated To arm the system i
324. tion356 358 EEE Page 197 System Status Access Denied OCAlON S98 Gode Retries T Location 357 Reporting Code Tens Digit 617112 Location 358 Reporting Code Units Digit Location 359 EEE Page 198 0 No Report Required System Status Reporting Options Teese 2 Receiver 2 4 Receiver 1 2 8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails Eocatign 360 368 T E ru pious turnin uiyng Wury nt UC Kay tyra E E E is gn pa Page 198 Test Reporting Time Location 360 Actual Hour Of The Day Tens Digit P g Location 361 Actual Hour Of The Day Units Digit Location 362 Actual Minute Of The Day Tens Digit Location 363 Actual Minute Of The Day Units Digit Location 364 Test Report Code Tens Digit Location 365 Test Report Code Units Digit fo ofojo 7 1 o Location 366 Repeat Interval In Days Location 3867 tt ee he ee el Page 199 Test Reporting Dialler Options 0 Ne Repor Heard 1 Receiver 1 2 Receiver 2 4 Receiver 1 2 8 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails Location 368 397 00 EEE Page 202 Output Location 368 373 Location 374 379 Location 380 385 Coninwtins owr ujoja jojo wwa a fila i s sete a Tofefa jole Default For Default For Default For Strobe Horn Speaker Fire Alarm Verification Reset In 8 Hrs Location 386 391 Location 392 397 Rely 1 Js to o of dod o fis 2 i fo r Default For Default For Entry Exit Sirens Running Warning Day Alarm O U U Li Event Type Polarity Time Base Time Multiplier Electr
325. tions 3 Change Decadic Dialling To 60 40 159 Set DTMF Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit Second 159 Dialler Reporting Formats 0 eee eee eseeeeeeeeeees 136 Dialling Format 0 eee ee eee ceseceeecneecneeeeeeeeeeeeees 149 Disable Factory Default eee ceeeeseeeeseeeneeceeeeeeneeees 47 DiSarme dy sists cc nase leds Set eek evs Aneto E 259 Disarming Automate eien a eiin oserei T sey 223 Both Areas At Same Time ccccccccccceeeeeees 99 117 From AWAY Mode eee eceeceseceseceecnsecsseeaeeenes 63 From STAY Mod Trennen 66 From S TAY Mode Ze tnesietig nE R ES 68 Single Button Operation eee eeeeeeeeeeees 234 Domestic Dialling Acknowledging Alarm Report cece 132 Changing Domestic Telephone Numberts 88 104 Command 969 x eie s easheon RA 43 Disable89 91 92 93 94 96 105 107 108 109 110 112 134 POtmatl sereo rE ghee EER 132 F ncton seirer a eei raer E E E cheese 132 Setting Up amp Programming eseseeesseeereersereersreeee 133 DTMF Dialling Pulses To 1 Digit Sec oe 159 Dual Reporting secesii riire cpeneesseteactsees teess 259 Duress Alartns sisi cacesscesesstes cieessevsieie es casebeaseeeioee ceed 69 E EZ Faulting siti naan bate ait diana 74 EDM Smart Watch 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseensees 229 EDMSAT roires oios 96 204 253 259 Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode 64 67 219 Entry Tife ennas ateena ease enee 259 Entry Timer T inia e E N 218 Entry Timer 2ni
326. to Friday when the premises are generally open and the system disarmed a test report will not be transmitted However on the weekend the premises will be closed and the system armed so a test report will be transmitted at the programmed time thus verifying the operation of the dialler At first glance this may not seem to be a big deal but lets do a few sums and you will see just where savings can be made Let us assume that the customer wants needs or has test reports programmed for once a day as well as opening and closing reports This means that at least three phone calls will be made each week day and one call on Saturday and one call on Sunday By using the Solution 844 862 880 control panel you will be able to eliminate five calls per week This means that over one week you will save your customer 1 25 and over one year you will save them 65 00 Not a bad saving and remember these figures are for local calls only Turning the table slightly a control room with lets say 1000 customers sending the above mentioned reports can expect to receive some 884 000 phone calls 221 000 assuming local calls just for reporting opening closing and test reports over a 12 month period If you use the Solut ion 844 862 880 control panel you can effectively cut the calls to 624 000 per year at a value of 156 000 assuming local calls a saving of 65 000 If we now assume that for each call one line is printed on the logging printer and th
327. tput Location 368 373 Location 374 379 Location 380 385 Coninwtins owr r ujo o jojo mwa x fila i s sete Tel oL sole Default For Default For Default For Strobe Horn Speaker Fire Alarm Verification Reset In 8 Hrs Location 386 391 Location 392 397 Relay 17 15 1 0 0 o Codepad 9 113 2 1 0 Default For Default For Entry Exit Sirens Running Warning Day Alarm O O U ee Event Type Polarity Time Base Time Multiplier Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 300 Location 398 399 Entry Timer 1 Location 398 Location 399 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Page 218 Location 400 401 Entry Timer 2 Location 400 Location 401 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location 402 403 Exit Time Location 402 Location 403 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location 404 405 Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode Location 404 Location 405 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location 406 407 Delay Alarm Reporting Time Location 406 Location 407 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location 408 409 Sensor Watch Time Location 408 Location 409 Increments Of Days Tens Digit I
328. tput will operate when the button marked AUX on the 4 channel hand held transmitter is activated when the system is disarmed or armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 The output will not operate when the system is armed in AWAY Mode Communications Failure After 3 Unsuccessful Calls This output will operate when the communication dialler has made 3 unsuccessful calls to the base station receiver The output will reset when all messages have been transmitted i e When the buffer is empty or when all possible attempts have been made Communications Failure This output will operate when the communication dialler has made all possible attempts to reach the base station receiver The output will reset when the first Kiss Off has been received This output will not operate for domestic formats Dialler Disabled This output will operate as long as Option 1 in LOCATION 177 on page 157 has been disabled The output will reset once Option 1 Enable Dialler Reporting Functions in LOCATION 177 on page 157 has been enabled Dialler Active This output will operate when the communication dialler is on line The output will reset when the communication dialler has released the telephone line Ring Detect This output will operate when an incoming call has been detected by the control panel The output will reset when the ringing has stopped or when the call has been answered Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 210
329. tton The factory default Installer Code is 1234 Two beeps will be heard and both the AWAY and the STAY indicators will flash simultaneously to indicate that you have entered Installer s Programming Mode When entering Installer s Programming Mode you will be automatically positioned at LOCATION 000 the beginning of the Primary Telephone Number for Receiver 1 Data Zone Zone2 Zone3 Zone4 Zone5 4 Zone7 A MAINS Value Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator 1 4 x 4 e ee ee ee es ee ee ee Table 5 Codepad Indicators When Programming lt S To access Installer s Programming Mode enter the INSTALLER CODE followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and both the AWAY and the STAY indicators will flash simultaneously to indicate that you have entered Installer s Programming Mode The codepad indicators will display the current data stored in the first location LOCATION 000 To move to another pro LOCATION 000 ente LOCATION 004 UMBER LOCATION 015 by the button The data of the ne ocatron o0 W be displayed e g 3 4 followed by the button will automatically swp you w ux crginning of the Subscriber ID Number for Receiver 1 To move to the next location press the button This will step you to the next location and the data in that location will be displayed e g If you are currently positioned at LOCATION 034 pressing the AWAY button
330. ty Limited ISSUE140 254 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Night Arm Station CP105 The night arm station incorporates a panic button and is designed to allow system operation from a bedroom or sitting room to arm and disarm the system in STAY Mode 1 Refer to Option 8 in LOCATION 427 on page 232 to enable the night arm station to operate with the system Phone Controller CC911 The phone controller operates at a frequency of 1400 Hz and allows the user to remotely arm the system in AWAY Mode via the telephone This phone controller can also be used to acknowledge a phone call from the control panel when the system is set up for domestic dialling Hand Held Dialler Tester DD901 The hand held dialler tester simulates a base station for testing of the control panel s dialling functions It communicates in most formats Cellular Diallers The cellular dialler when connected to the control panel will transmit alarm information via the cellular phone network to the base station receiver when a land telephone line is not present or has been tampered with PS100 Power Supply Module PS100 The PS100 Power Supply Module has been designed for applications requiring 13 8 volts DC at currents of up to 1 Amp and must be used in conjunction with the TF008 18 volt AC plug pack The unit comes complete with our standard fully short circuit proof power out and battery charging terminals as well as a DC LED in
331. ufacturing Pty Limited System Operations 75 Fuse Fail This fault will occur when either the 1 Amp 12 V accessories fuse or the 1 Amp codepad fuse has failed After 10 seconds has expired since the fuse had failed the control panel will automatically send a System Trouble code Contact ID Event Code 300 to the base station receiver After the fuse has been replaced for a period of 10 seconds a restore report will be sent to the base station receiver If both the 1 Amp 12 V accessories fuse and the 1 Amp codepad fuse have failed only one system trouble report will be sent to the base station receiver Only after both fuses have been replaced will any system trouble restore report will be sent to the base station receiver Communication Failure A communication failure fault will register if the primary telephone number and secondary telephone number for either Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 is unsuccessful in calling the receiving party When a communications fault occurs to determine which receiver failed to report hold down the 8 button for two seconds until two beeps are heard If Receiver 1 failed to report zone 1 will illuminate If Receiver 2 failed to report zone 2 will illuminate If the primary telephone number and secondary telephone number for Receiver or Receiver 2 is set up for back to base reporting Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 has a maximum of twelve call attempts per event to call the base station receiver If
332. uire access denied to be silent 2 Shutdown all codepads that are connected to the control panel and lock them out for the time period programmed in LOCATION 410 on page 220 3 Transmit an Access Denied Contact ID Event Code 421 report to the base station receiver Each time the system is armed or disarmed the counter will be reset The number of attempts can be anywhere between 1 15 If you program a zero into LOCATION 356 the code attempts are unlimited and neither of the three points listed above will take place This function works when the system is in the armed or disarmed state Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 198 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual System Status Reporting Options LOCATION 359 1 Description No Report Required Receiver 1 Receiver 2 Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails Table 109 System Status Reporting Options Location This location is factory default to report only to receiver 1 You can select whether the system status reporting options will report on receiver 1 receiver 2 both receiver 1 and receiver 2 receiver 2 only when receiver fails or no reporting at all ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Reporting Information 199 Test Reporting Time LOCATION 360 366 y Example 0000 71 O Location Description Actual Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Actual Hour Of The Da
333. uish If the horn speaker indication beeps have been enabled one beep will be heard from the horn speaker If the strobe indications have been enabled the strobe will flash for 3 seconds to indicate that the system has been disarmed Panic Alarm 1 Press both the BLACK button and the GREEN button together for two seconds on the hand held transmitter This will initiate an audible panic alarm that will activate the horn speaker strobe and internal sirens If Option 1 Enable Codepad Panic To Be Silent has been programmed in LOCATION 425 on page 230 the remote radio panic alarm will also be silent Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 82 Figure 6 4 Button Hand Held Transmitter REO13 ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual 4 Channel Radio Remote Hand Held Transmitter Operations All operations via the 4 channel radio remote hand held transmitter are fixed once the control panel has been taught the hand held transmitters code Therefore there is no programming required for each button of the transmitter The DOOR and AUX buttons on the 4 channel radio remote hand held transmitter may be used to operate programmable outputs e g garage door or outside lights etc on the control panel Arming In AWAY Mode 1 Press the AWAY button on the hand held transmitter for two seconds Two beeps will be heard on the remote codepad and the AWAY indicator will illuminate Exit time will n
334. uld be programmed as a 0 Zone Dialler Options This location is factory default to report only to receiver 1 You can select each zone to report on receiver 1 receiver 2 both receiver 1 and receiver 2 receiver 2 only when receiver fails or no reporting at all Select the required dialler option from the table below Option Description No Report Required Receiver 1 Receiver and Receiver 2 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails Table 81 Zone Dialler Options a 6 5 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 174 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Solution 844 Zones Defaults LOCATION 267 322 Zone l Location 267 273 Zone 2 Location 274 280 alojoj jaf lejoj jafi Zone 3 Location 281 287 Zone 4 Location 288 294 Zone 5 Location 295 301 popogi DODD wou one 6 Location 302 308 one7 Location 309 31 Zone 8 Location 316 322 DODGED RCO Coo olofoja ooo Gh J er GI Tale GY e Zone Zone Pulse Zone Pulse Zone Zone Report Dialler Type Count Count Time Option 1 Option 2 Code Options N N oa amp Zones 1 4 may be programmed as any zone type whereas zones 5 8 may only be programmed to any 24 hour zone type Solution 862 Zones Defaults LOCATION 267 322 D 3 oO rc fe O S prar N o gt N N N wo Zone 2 Location 274 280 afofofijiafi oloto jiafafi one 4 Location 288 294 Zone 5 Location 295 301 DODDOG fo
335. utput for this feature use the following settings EVENT TYPE 2 7 POLARITY 10 TIMEBASE 2 MULTIPLIER 15 The zone that the fire smoke detector is connected to should be programmed as follows ZONE TYPE 13 ZONE PULSE COUNT 3 ZONE PULSE COUNT TIME 15 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs 28 2 Lo 2 E 2 2 2 bs 30 31 32 33 209 Remote Control 1 2 9 Remote Control 2 Remote Control 3 These outputs can be remotely activated Turned On or Off via the following methods 1 Remote Codepad Refer to the Master Code Functions Turning Outputs On Off on page 112 for further information 2 Remotely Via Alarm Link Software Refer to your Alarm Link Instruction Manual for further information Radio Control Output 1 This output will operate when the button marked DOOR on the 4 channel hand held transmitter is activated when the system is armed or disarmed Radio Control Output 2 This output will operate when the button marked AUX on the 4 channel hand held transmitter is activated when the system is armed or disarmed Radio Control Output 1 Not In AWAY Mode This output will operate when the button marked DOOR on the 4 channel hand held transmitter is activated when the system is disarmed or armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 The output will not operate when the system is armed in AWAY Mode Radio Control Output 2 Not In AWAY Mode This ou
336. ver 1 and receiver 2 receiver 2 only when receiver 1 fails or no reporting at all Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 200 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs 202 Outputs ISSUE140 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual The Solution 844 862 880 control panel has four fully programmable outputs on the main PCB and one other programmable output that operates the codepad buzzer These four outputs are factory default to operate a horn speaker fire alarm verification strobe and an internal screamer Outputs 1 4 will NOT operate whilst the control panel detects a low battery Programmable outputs require four parameters to be programmed in order to operate correctly Event Type When To Operate Polarity How To Operate Time Base How Long To Operate For Time Multiplier How Often To Operate LL 0 O Lv Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier When To Operate Is selected from the output event types listed on page 204 Each digit should be entered into the two corresponding locations for the output event type required How To Operate Is selected from Table 112 Event Type Polarities on page 213 This determines whether the output remains operating for the duration of the event pulses for the duration operates once only one shot or latches on How Long To Operate For Is determined by a t
337. will be between from when the fuse has been replaced and when the system will report the event Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Reporting Information 195 System Status AC Fail Report LOCATION 348 349 2 Location Description System Status AC Fail Reporting Code Tens Digit System Status AC Fail Reporting Code Units Digit Table 104 System Status AC Fail Report Locations An AC Loss report Contact ID Event Code 301 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the AC mains supply has been disconnected for two minutes If you require an AC Loss report to be transmitted to the base station receiver when the AC mains supply has been disconnected for 1 hour enable Option 1 in LOCATION 426 on page 231 If you wish to ignore AC fail enable Option 2 in LOCATION 426 on page 231 If an AC Loss report is not required program LOCATION 348 349 with a zero System Status AC Fail Restore Report LOCATION 350 351 7 Location Description System Status AC Fail Restore Reporting Code Tens Digit System Status AC Fail Restore Reporting Code Units Digit Table 105 System Status AC Fail Restore Report Locations A restore signal will be transmitted when the AC mains supply has been restored continuously for more than two minutes If an AC Loss restore report is not required program LOCATION 350 351 with a zero Electronics D
338. will flash the FAULT indicator and beep once fault and stop the codepad from beeping once every minute simply press the button If this option has not been enabled the codepad will only flash the FAULT indicator when a new fault has occurred but will not cause the codepad to beep once every minute until the fault has been acknowledge or rectified Use Digit 3 For Codepad Duress Instead Of Digit 9 2 This option if selected will allow the customer to use the digit 3 after entering their code to disarm the system to activate a duress alarm Alarm Activates Sirens amp Strobe In STAY Mode 1 amp 2 4 This option will need to be selected if audible alarms are required when the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 Reserved Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 236 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Radio Input Options LOCATION 431 0 Description Radio Receiver WE800 Latching Keyswitch Input Momentary Keyswitch Input Table 142 Radio Input Options Radio Receiver WE800 1 This option needs to be selected when using the optional 304 Mhz RF Receiver WE800 for remote operations using radio remote hand held transmitters Latching Keyswitch Input 2 This option allows you to connect a latching keyswitch to the JP3 terminals D and GND to remotely arm and disarm the system in AWAY Mode Momentary Keyswitch Input 3 This option allows you to connect a momentary keyswitc
339. will sound for two seconds if the battery test fails Refer to the Output Event Type EDMSAT Satellite Siren on page 204 when programming a programmable output for the satellite siren Hand Held Programmer C814 The hand held programmer is used to program the locations in the Solution 844 862 880 control panel The unit displays the actual location number and the data value currently programmed It comes complete with a one metre connecting cable and a socket for an external programming key Refer to Programming With The Hand Held Programmer on page 31 for more information Programming Key CC891 The programming key is a unique device that will store all programming information programmed in your control panel once copied to the programming key The programming key can hold all your common configuration data such as monitoring station telephone numbers and zone reporting channels etc Alarm Link Software CC816 This software package is designed to be used for programming the Solution 844 862 880 control panel by either the direct connect method or the remote connect method via the telephone line All options and features can be accessed using this software as well as maintaining history and service reports Refer to LOCATION 180 on page 129 or 160 to enable this feature Refer to Alarm Link Software on page 126 for more information on the remote connect methods CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad CP508 This codepad is designed to o
340. wn count will be decremented by one to a swinger shutdown count of 4 If zone 1 re triggers the dialler 3 more times the swinger shutdown count will be 1 If zone 2 triggers an alarm the swinger shutdown count will be decremented by one to a swinger shutdown count of zero therefore locking out zone 2 from activating the dialler again until the system has been reset However at this point in time the swinger shutdown count for the dialler has again a lockout count of 6 and the process of swinger shutdown for the remaining zones including zone begin again until all zones have been locked out ISSUE140 Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited System Reporting Information 188 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Reporting Information This section covers features that are involved with the basic house keeping of the system This includes monitoring of the zones whether they are isolated from the system or more importantly that they are actually operating the status of both the AC mains and DC power to the system and codepad generated alarms activated by the user Zone Status Bypass Reports LOCATION 325 326 98 Location Description Zone Bypass Report Zone Bypass Restore Report Table 91 Zone Status Bypass Report Locations A zone is bypassed when it is manually isolated Refer to Isolating Zones on page 70 for information on isolating zones A Zone Bypass report Contact ID Event Code 570 will be t
341. y Units Digit Actual Minute Of The Day Tens Digit Test Report Code Tens Digit Test Report Code Units Digit Repeat Interval In Days Table 110 Test Reporting Time Locations 363 Actual Minute Of The Day Units Digit A Test report Contact ID Event Code 602 is a specific signal that is transmitted to the base station receiver and is normally used to test the dialling and reporting functions of the control panel Test reports will not be transmitted if the Subscriber ID Number is 0000 When programming test reports the control panel needs to know the hour and minute of the day the report is required as well as how often to transmit the report Test reports are reported on a daily basis ranging from every day to every fifteen days Refer to Installer Code Functions on page 86 to set the first test report If you do not require Test reports program the repeat interval in LOCATION 366 as zero If you wish to send test reports once every seven days at 11 35 PM you would program LOCATION 360 366 as follows 2335 71 7 Test Reporting Dialler Options LOCATION 367 1 Description No Report Required Receiver 2 Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 Receiver 2 Only When Receiver 1 Fails Table 111 Test Reporting Options Location Receiver 1 This location is factory default to report only to receiver 1 You can select whether the test reporting options will report on receiver 1 receiver 2 both recei
342. y be used with the Solut ion 844 862 880 control panel How To Copy The Programming Key Memory To The Control Panel 1 Enter Installer s Programming Mode i e 1 2 3 4 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash on the remote codepad to indicate that you have entered Installer s Programming Mode You will also notice that the remote codepad will display the data currently programmed in LOCATION 000 2 Connect the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the control panel found at the top of the PCB printed circuit board next to the Auxiliary Module socket 3 Enter command 9 6 3 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard after the programming key s data has successfully been copied into to the control panel If you heard a long beep after issuing this command the programming key has become corrupt and will need to be erased to clear the corrupt data Refer to Command 964 Erase Programming Key on page 42 for more information 4 Before removing the programming key from the control panel enter command 9 6 Q followed by the button to exit Installer s Programming Mode The STAY and AWAY indicators will now extinguish on the remote codepad and the system will return to the disarmed state Failing to exit Installer s Programming Mode before removing the programming key may result in corrupting the programming key How To Copy Programming Key M
343. ystem Armed In AWAY Mode System Armed In STAY Mode 1 Table 135 Horn Speaker Beeps For Remote Operations Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 230 Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual System Options 2 LOCATION 425 0 Description Codepad Panic To Be Silent Codepad Fire To Be Silent Codepad Medical To Be Silent Access Denied To Be Silent Table 136 System Options 2 Codepad Panic To Be Silent If this option has been selected a codepad panic alarm or radio remote panic alarm will not operate the horn speaker the bell or the strobe outputs If this option is not selected all three outputs will operate after a codepad panic alarm has been activated when the 1 and 3 buttons or the LSTAYY and away buttons on the remote codepad are pressed simultaneously Selecting this option does not effect the operation of the communication dialler If you wish to disable the reporting of the codepad panic alarm program LOCATION 337 338 on page 192 as zero Codepad Fire To Be Silent 2 If this option has been selected a codepad fire alarm will not operate the horn speaker the bell or the strobe outputs If this option is not selected all three outputs will operate after a codepad fire alarm has been activated when the 4 and buttons on the remote codepad are pressed simultaneously Selecting this option does not effect the operation of the communication dialler If you wish to disable the
344. zone actually restores Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Information 14 15 177 Chime Zone A Chime zone is not a burglary zone It can never sound the sirens or trigger the dialler Its purpose is to map it to a programmable output for an indication of sealed or unsealed state Refer to Output Event Type Global Chime on page 210 Chime zones require EOL resistors and they will register at a remote codepad These zones do not effect the operation of forced arming Zone Not Used If a zone is not used program it as a zone type of 15 This zone will never sound the sirens or trigger the dialler An EOL resistor is not required if this zone type is used Zone Pulse Count Zone pulse count is the number of times a zone must be triggered before the zone registers as an alarm The number of pulses vary between 0 15 The zone pulse count value is relative to the time frame i e The number of pulses must be present during a particular time frame Refer to Table 84 Zone Pulse Count Times on page 178 for time frame settings Option Number Of Pulses Option Number Of Pulses Table 83 Number Of Pulses Zones that have been programmed with pulse count which are continuously unsealed for 10 seconds will activate an alarm condition 24 Hour Fire zones that have been programmed with pulse count which are continuously unsealed for 30 seconds will activate an alarm condition Zone Pulse Count Handover
345. zones are programmed for both lockout siren and dialler Zone 1 is triggered followed by all other zones causing the sirens to sound and the dialler to report to the base station receiver Zone will be the only zone that stops reporting to the base station receiver because of the first zone to trigger is locked out The remaining zones will continue to report if they are triggered again Refer to Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren on page 185 to set the number of times the siren will be allowed to activate before it will be locked out and Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler on page 186 to set the number of times the dialler will activate before lockout will take effect Delay Alarm Reporting This option will allow the reporting of alarms on selected zones to be delayed to allow the user to enter their code to cancel alarms that are not required to report All sounding devices e g horn speaker strobe and bell outputs will operate as soon as the alarm condition occurs but the dialler will not operate until the delay time in LOCATION 406 407 on page 219 has expired Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE140 180 ISSUE140 Example Solution 844 862 880 Installation Manual Silent Alarm A zone programmed to be silent will not activate the horn speaker bell strobe or EDMSAT outputs The dialler and all other programmable outputs will function as per their particular programming Sensor Watch Sensor watch

Solution 844/862/880 Installation Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents